Operation/Reference Guide

TPDesign4
Touch Panel Design Program
(v2.11 or higher)

S of t w ar e

Last Revised: 9/22/2009

Software License and Warranty Agreement
• LICENSE GRANT. AMX grants to Licensee the non-exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this License. The AMX Software is licensed, not sold. This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the AMX Software. The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software, product documentation, sample applications, tools and utilities, and miscellaneous technical information. Please refer to the README.TXT file on the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software. The AMX Software is subject to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement. AMX Dealer, Distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity shall not, and shall not permit any other person to, disclose, display, loan, publish, transfer (whether by sale, assignment, exchange, gift, operation of law or otherwise), license, sublicense, copy, or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software. Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the AMX Software. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer, distributor, VIP or other AMX authorized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws, patent laws, international treaty provisions, and/or state of Texas trade secret laws. Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software solely for backup or archival purposes. Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software. TERMINATION. AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT, IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REASON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE. In the event that AMX terminates this License, the Licensee shall return or destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been returned or destroyed. PRE-RELEASE CODE. Portions of the AMX Software may, from time to time, as identified in the AMX Software, include PRERELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance, compatibility and functionality of the GA code. The PRE-RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may not be generally released. AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE-RELEASE CODE. ALL PRE-RELEASE CODE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITH NO WARRANTIES. LIMITED WARRANTY. AMX warrants that the AMX Software (other than pre-release code) will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. AMX DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE, including without limitation, any (if any) service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety (90) day Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition, express, implied or statutory. LICENSEE REMEDIES. AMX's entire liability and Licensee's exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Software that does not meet AMX's Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX's current return policy. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the AMX Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Outside the United States, these remedies may not available. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AMX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph ©(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs ©(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX.COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL. The United States Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories. No software from this Site may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, Iran, Syria, or any other country to which the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. AMX does not authorize the downloading or exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws.

• •

This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of the State of Texas, and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County, Texas, USA. For any questions concerning this Agreement, or to contact AMX for any reason, please write: AMX License and Warranty Department, 3000 Research Drive, Richardson, TX 75082.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) ...............................................................................1
Overview .................................................................................................................. 1 What's New in Version 2.11...................................................................................... 1 Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements .............................................. 1
Supported Operating Systems ........................................................................................ 1 Supported Operating System Languages ...................................................................... 1 PC Requirements/Recommendations .............................................................................. 2

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions............................................................ 2
Supported Panel Types ................................................................................................... 2 Supported Screen Resolutions ........................................................................................ 3 Supported Screen Resolutions - NXI-TPI/4 ...................................................................... 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO ........................................................................ 4 Supported Screen Resolutions - TPI-PRO-DVI ................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels ............................................................................. 5 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels ............................................................ 5 Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels ........................................................................ 5 AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images ........................................... 6

True Type Font Support............................................................................................ 6 Supported Image File Types ..................................................................................... 6 Related Software Applications.................................................................................. 6
NetLinx Studio ................................................................................................................ 6 AMX WebUpdate ............................................................................................................ 7 G4 PanelBuilder .............................................................................................................. 7 G4 PanelPreview ............................................................................................................. 7

The TPDesign4 Work Area .................................................................................9
Overview .................................................................................................................. 9 Design View Windows ............................................................................................ 10
Design View Window tab controls ................................................................................ 11 Using the Zoom Controls .............................................................................................. 11 Magnifier Window......................................................................................................... 12

Workspace Window ................................................................................................ 12
Workspace Navigator - Pages Tab ................................................................................ 13 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 14

Properties Window ................................................................................................. 14
Properties Control - General Tab .................................................................................. 15 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 16 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 17

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

i

Table of Contents

Using the Apply To All option ....................................................................................... 18 Using the Prev and Next buttons .................................................................................. 18

State Manager window........................................................................................... 19
State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu ............................................................................ 20

Transfer Status Window.......................................................................................... 20 Status Bar ............................................................................................................... 21 Button Preview Window ......................................................................................... 22 Print Preview Window ............................................................................................ 23 Working With Dockable Windows .......................................................................... 23
Moving, Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows ....................................................... 23 Toggling the Windows .................................................................................................. 23

Using the New Project Wizard ..........................................................................25
Overview ................................................................................................................ 25 New Project Wizard dialogs.................................................................................... 26
New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog .............................................................................. 26 New Project Wizard - Step Two dialog.......................................................................... 27 New Project Wizard - Final Step dialog......................................................................... 28

TPD4 Project Files (*.TP4) .................................................................................29
Overview ................................................................................................................ 29 Inappropriate File Name Characters ....................................................................... 29 Creating a New Project........................................................................................... 29 System-Generated Project File Names ................................................................... 30 Edit Focus ............................................................................................................... 31 Quick Input ............................................................................................................. 31 Undo/Redo ............................................................................................................. 32 Cutting, Copying and Pasting ................................................................................. 32 Using the Selection Tool ......................................................................................... 33 Working With Video Fills ........................................................................................ 33 Drag and Drop Support .......................................................................................... 34 Using G4 PanelPreview ........................................................................................... 34 Setting Project Properties ...................................................................................... 34
Project Properties dialog - Project Information tab....................................................... 35 Project Properties dialog - Panel Setup Information tab ............................................... 37 Project Properties dialog - Sensors tab ......................................................................... 38 Project Properties dialog - IR Emitters and Receivers tab ............................................. 39

Applying Password Protection to Your Project File ................................................ 40 Setting a Power Up Page........................................................................................ 41 Setting Power Up Popup Pages.............................................................................. 41

ii

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Setting an Inactive Page Flip .................................................................................. 42 Using the Workspace Window ................................................................................ 43
Workspace Window - Pages Tab ................................................................................... 43 Workspace Window- Function Maps Tab ...................................................................... 44 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window ........................................... 44

Using the Properties Window ................................................................................. 45
Properties Window - General Tab ................................................................................. 45 Properties Control - Programming Tab ......................................................................... 46 Properties Control - States Tab..................................................................................... 46

Working With Multiple Projects .............................................................................. 46
Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously.................................................................... 46 Copying/Pasting Across Projects................................................................................... 46

Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4)...................................... 47
Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 ..................................................................................... 47

R-4 Remote Controller Projects .............................................................................. 48
Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers .................................................... 48 R-4 Remote Devices - Unsupported Button Types ........................................................ 49

R-4 Setup Codes ..................................................................................................... 49
Levels: .......................................................................................................................... 49 Addresses ..................................................................................................................... 49 External Button Options ............................................................................................... 50 R-4 External Buttons - Default Channel Codes .............................................................. 50

Working With The Resource Manager ..............................................................51
Overview ................................................................................................................ 51 Working With Images ............................................................................................. 53
Resource Manager dialog - Images tab ......................................................................... 53 Static Image Files .......................................................................................................... 53 Supported Image File Types ......................................................................................... 54 Importing Image Files Into Your Project ....................................................................... 54

Working With Dynamic Images............................................................................... 56
Resource Manager dialog - Dynamic Images tab .......................................................... 56 Dynamic Images ............................................................................................................ 57 Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project ............................................................... 57 Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Dynamic Image .................................................... 58

DynaMo™ Dynamic Images .................................................................................... 60
Creating a DynaMo Image ............................................................................................ 60 Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager .................................... 61 Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images ...................................................... 62 Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images .................................................. 62

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

iii

Table of Contents

Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output........................................... 63
Network Path Information............................................................................................. 63 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 1: Axis.................................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 2: Panasonic .......................................................... 64 Dynamic Image Settings - Example 3: Vivotek ............................................................. 65 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras .............................................................................. 65 DynaMo Dynamic Image Example - Adding a Streaming Webcam Image..................... 65

Working With Slots ................................................................................................. 68
Resource Manager dialog - Slots tab............................................................................. 68 Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions ............................................................ 69

Working With Icons................................................................................................. 70
Bitmaps vs. Icons ........................................................................................................... 70

Working With Sounds ............................................................................................. 71
Resource Manager dialog - Sounds tab......................................................................... 71 Supported Sound File Types ......................................................................................... 72 Importing Sound Files To Your Project.......................................................................... 72

Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory ...... 72 Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs ....................................... 73
Editing Image Files ........................................................................................................ 73 Editing Sound Files........................................................................................................ 73

Working With Pages .........................................................................................75
Overview ................................................................................................................ 75 Creating a New Page .............................................................................................. 75 Setting Page Properties.......................................................................................... 76
Setting General Properties: Pages ................................................................................ 76 Setting Programming Properties: Pages ....................................................................... 76 Setting States Properties: Pages ................................................................................... 76

Renaming a Page .................................................................................................... 77 Adding a Fill Color to a Page.................................................................................. 77 Adding a Bitmap to a Page..................................................................................... 78 Adding an Icon to a Page ....................................................................................... 79 Adding Text to a Page............................................................................................ 79 Displaying a Video Source on a Page ..................................................................... 81 Copying/Pasting Pages ........................................................................................... 81
Copying Pages .............................................................................................................. 81 Pasting Pages ................................................................................................................ 81

Deleting Pages From a Project ............................................................................... 81 Exporting Pages as Image Files .............................................................................. 82 Printing Pages......................................................................................................... 83

iv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

.................................... 101 Adding a Fill Color To a Button ................................................................................................................................................ 90 Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page.......................................................................... 93 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages.................................................................................................................... 90 Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page .............................. 107 Adding Text Effects ................................... 85 Creating a Popup Page....................... 91 Adding Text to a Popup Page ........................................................................... 85 Using the Popup Draw Tool................................... 95 Working With Buttons .............................................. 97 Button Draw Tools ........................................................................... 94 Deleting Popup Pages From a Project ......................................... 100 Specifying a Button Border..................... 104 Working With Transparent Backgrounds............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 89 Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 106 Displaying a Video Source on a Button.................................... 94 Pasting Popup Pages......................... 91 Adding an Icon to a Popup Page ................ 87 Setting Popup Page Properties ........................................ 94 Copying Popup Pages ................................................................................................. 97 Drawing a Button...........................................................................................................................................85 Overview ............................97 Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 88 Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages................................................................................ 98 Generated Button Names .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 89 Setting States Properties: Popup Pages ....11 or higher) v ............................ 94 Show/Hide Popup Pages .......................................... 93 Creating Popup Page Groups ........................ 88 Setting General Properties: Popup Pages.................................................... 102 Adding a Bitmap to a Button ........... 99 Specifying the Button Type ............................................................................................... 103 Adding an Icon to a Button............................................................................................................ 107 TPDesign4 (v2..................................................................................... 107 Page Flips ............................................ 102 Changing the Button Fill Color.............Table of Contents Working With Popup Pages ................................................................. 100 Adding Text to a Button ............................... 100 Foreign Language Support for Text ........................................... 92 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page ............................................................................................................................................................... 90 Renaming a Popup Page..................................................

.......................... 111 Editing Multiple Selections................................................................. 111 General Buttons ........................................................................................................................................................... 123 Input Mask Ranges .......................................................... 120 Joystick Buttons.......................... 127 Size Assist toolbar ......................................... 131 vi TPDesign4 (v2................................................................. 116 Slider Types............ 122 Input Mask Characters................................................................................................................................................................................ 125 Setting Default New Button Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 110 Editing Button Properties ............................................................................................................................................ 112 Setting Properties: General Buttons ....Table of Contents Creating a Page Flip ................11 or higher) ................................................................................................................................... 130 Creating a Date Button...................................... 114 Bargraph Buttons....................... 126 Using the Drawing Assist Features ....................................................... 117 Creating a Custom Slider ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 109 Page Flip Actions.............................................................. 123 Computer Control Buttons .............. 117 Formatting Codes ................................................................................................................. 124 TakeNote Buttons...................... 123 Input Mask Operators ................................................... 115 Multi-State Bargraph Buttons ........................................................................................................................ 124 Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons ................................................... 113 Level Control Parameters .............. 127 Order Assist toolbar ............................................................. 123 Input Mask Next Field Characters ..................................... 128 Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 118 Working With Touch Maps ............................. 125 Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons .......................... 113 Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 116 Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons....................................................................................................................... 108 Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips ......... 109 Copying/Pasting Buttons ................................. 121 Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons ................................................................................................................................................ 127 Position Assist toolbar.................................................................................................................................................................................. 110 Copying Buttons..................................................................................... 129 Previewing a Button .............................................. 110 Pasting Buttons .......... 121 Text Input Buttons ......................................................................................................................................... 112 Multi-State General Buttons ................................................................

... 151 Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) ........................................................................................................................ 143 Deleting Columns.... 141 Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) ... Copying and Pasting a List Box ............................................................ 147 Subordinate Button Placement .................................................................................................................................................. 154 TPDesign4 (v2.. 132 Working With External Controls ......................................................................................................................................... 143 Deleting Rows ....................................................................... 139 G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs ......................................................... Column Properties........ 143 Cutting.................................................. 140 List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Z-Order ................................................................... 144 List Box Buttons .............................................................................Subordinate Buttons ............................................................................... 152 List Box Buttons .......................................................... 142 Adding Columns.....................139 Overview . 135 Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels .................................................. 145 Setting List Box Container Button Properties ................................................................................................................. 140 List Box Toolbar.............................. 144 List Box Container Properties vs.. 148 List Box Buttons ............... 148 Setting List Box Button Column Properties............................................................................ 140 List Box Buttons: Managed Mode................................ 136 Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ................................................................................................................................................................................. 137 Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons.......... 147 Subordinate Buttons ............. 136 Setting Global Properties for External LEDs ............................................................ 135 External Button Options .........................................................Resizing................. 141 Adding Rows ....................... 150 Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons ......................................................11 or higher) vii .Container Button................ 153 List Box Buttons ...... 146 List Box Buttons ..... 145 Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons..................................................................... 154 Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons ............... 135 Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs ..................................................................................................................... 149 List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode ................................... 136 Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons ..............Drag and Drop Capability..............................................135 Overview .............................................................................................................. 148 Setting Properties: List Box Columns ......................................................Columns.....................................................Table of Contents Creating a Time Button..................... 138 Working With List Box Buttons .......

...................... 180 Cursor Color ..........................................11 or higher) ............. 179 Above Popups ................ 158 List Data Table Properties ................................................................................................................ 166 Command Structure List View ........................ 163 Deleting a List Data Table ................................................................................. 154 Creating List Box Navigation Buttons ................................................................................................................................................................ 160 Creating a Static List Data Table........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 171 Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table .......................................................................................... 179 Column Sort Order .............................................................................................. 179 Animate Time Up.................................................................................................................. 178 General Properties.... 179 Border Style ......................................................175 Overview ........................................................... 180 Cursor Name .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Channel Code Values ...................................................... 169 Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button ..............Navigation Buttons ............................................................................. 159 Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button...................................................... 167 Dynamic List box Table Example .......... 155 Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar...................................................Table of Contents List Box Buttons ........................................................................... 176 Using the Prev and Next buttons ... 156 Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar....................................................................................................................................................................................... 164 Data List Commands ...................... 157 Navigation Buttons ............................................................................................................. 180 viii TPDesign4 (v2........ 179 Column Display Order ........................................................ 159 Dynamic List Box Data............................................................................... 160 Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button ......................... 180 Compression.......................................................................................................................................................................... 179 Animate Time Down ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 172 Working With Properties ... 159 Static List Box Data .............................................................................................................................................. 179 Color Depth............ 157 Scroll Bar Components ...................................................................... 164 Data List Command Rules.................................................................................................. 179 Auto-Repeat ................................. 177 Saving a Properties Set .................................................................................... 158 List Data Table ............................................................................................................................. 175 Drag and Drop Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 164 Creating a Dynamic List Data Table ...................................................................................................... 176 Working With The Property Painter................................................................ 175 Using the Apply To All option ......................................

................................................................................. 181 Hide Effect Time .................... 184 List Row Padding..................... 186 Show Effect ................................................. 184 List Selectable ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 186 Show Effect Time ............................................................... 184 Lock Button Name...............................11 or higher) ix ..................... 181 Hide Effect X/Y Pos............................................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Password Character .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 182 List Table Port ................................................................................................................................... 180 Group ................................................................................................................ 185 Password Protection .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 181 Left.............. 183 List Offset Enabled... 183 List Filter Column .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 185 Reset Pos.......................................................................Table of Contents Description................................................................................... 182 List Column Padding ............................................................................................................................ 185 Password ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 183 List Table Wrap ................................... 186 TPDesign4 (v2..................................................... 184 List Row Height ............................................... 183 List Managed.................. 185 Remote Host ...................................................................................................................................................... 180 Disabled ........................................................... 182 List Display ................................................................. 181 Hidden ...................................................................... 186 Scale To Fit.............................................................................................................................................. 180 Height ......................................... 183 List Preferred Row ................... 180 Display Type.................................................... On Show ..... 181 Hide Effect .................................................................................................... 184 List Preferred Row Height....................................................................................................................................................................... 184 List Row......................................................................................................................................... 185 Max Text Length ................................. 182 List Table Address.............................................................................................................. 185 Name.................................................................................. 185 Modal ....................... 185 Page Flip ............. 181 Input Mask .... 185 Remote Port........................................................................ 182 List Column ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

..................... 190 Level Port ............................. 191 Range Time Down ................................................................................................................................................................................... 187 Touch Style....... 189 Address Code........................ 189 Channel Port.......................................................................... 187 TakeNote Port............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 190 Level Control Value ................................................................................. 186 State Count ........................................ 186 TakeNote Enabled...................................................................................... 187 Touch Map........................................................... 190 Level Control Repeat Time ................................................................................................................................................. 186 Slider Color ................................................ 187 Timeout ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 189 Command Output ..................... 187 TakeNote Host ................................................................................................................... 190 Range Drag Increment ......................... 189 Command Port .............................................................................................................11 or higher) ............................................................... 191 Range Inverted ............................................................................................................................................................................ 189 Feedback................................................................................................................. 189 Channel Code ............... 190 Level Function ............................................................................................................................................................................ 191 Range High..................................................................................... 188 Value Direction....................................................................................... 189 Level Aux.......................................... 191 Range Low................................................................................................. 189 Level Code ................................................................................................. 186 Slider Name.................................................................................. 192 x TPDesign4 (v2................................... 187 Top ............................................................... 190 Range Aux Inverted.....Table of Contents Show Effect X/Y Pos............................................................................................................... 188 Width................................................................................................................................................................................................. 189 Address Port .......................................... 190 Level Control Type .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 191 Range Time Up ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 187 Type ............................... 191 String Output .......................................................... 188 Programing Properties............................................................................................................................................................................................ 192 Bitmap............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 191 String Output Port .............................................................. 191 State Properties.......................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 193 Icon Justification ..... 195 Text Effect Color ............................................................ 198 Working With States ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 192 Bitmap X Offset ........................... 192 Bitmap Y Offset................................................................................................... 196 Using the All States Option .................................................................... 194 Overall Opacity ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 194 Scale Bitmap To Fit ................................................... 196 Video Touch Pass-Thru ................................................................................... 195 Text Y Offset....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 202 Adding States From the Clipboard .......................................................................................................................... 193 Font..........11 or higher) xi .......... 195 Text ................................................................................ 193 Fill Color....................... 193 Icon Slot ................... 196 Video Cropping........................................................................................................................................... 192 Chameleon Image ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194 Marquee Repeat ..................................... 203 TPDesign4 (v2.......................... 193 Icon Y Offset ..............................................................................201 Overview ............................................... 195 Streaming Source ............................................................... 196 Word Wrap........................................................... 192 Border Color ........................................................... 201 Adding States To a Button ................................................................................................................................................................. 195 Text Color .......................................................................................................... 197 Searching and Replacing Button Properties .................................................... 193 Icon X Offset ............................................................................................. 195 Text Justification ............................................... 196 Searching For Button Properties ........................ 196 Video Fill ..................................................................................................... 192 Draw Order .................................................................................................................................... 195 Text X Offset. 192 Border Name.... 202 Duplicating an Existing State on the Button ..................... 193 Marquee Direction .................. 194 Sound ................................................................................. 201 State Manager Context Menu .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 201 State Manager Window ...Table of Contents Bitmap Justification......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 Text Effect.........................................................

....................................................................................................................................... 205 Draw Order (Z-Order) .................................... 205 Reordering States Through the Clipboard .................... 215 Creating New Palette Entries .......... 205 Copying a State to the Clipboard..................................... 210 Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) ................................................................................ 210 Clear Channels First................................. 217 Exporting Palette Files ..... 218 Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program............................. 204 Cutting States To the Clipboard............................................................................................... 215 Creating Custom Palettes............................................................................. 216 Changing the Active Palette.......................................................................Table of Contents Drag & Drop To Add States ................ 207 Show/Hide Function Codes......................... 205 Changing the Order Of States On A Button ........ 203 Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button ................... 204 Removing States From A Button......................................................................... 205 Pasting a State from the Clipboard ................11 or higher) ................................................................................................................................................................................... 209 Using Power Assign ................ 206 Changing the Draw Order for Selected States................................. 211 Working With Colors and Palettes ...............207 Overview ................................................................................................... 211 Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign)............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 217 Importing Palette Files ........... 208 Function Code Map ................................................................................................................ 208 Function Codes ...... 218 xii TPDesign4 (v2..........................................................Limitations................. 204 Deleting States............. 213 Working With Palettes ............................................................................................................213 Working With Colors............................................................... 211 Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) ............................................................................................................... 206 Working With Function Codes .......................... 217 Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder ..........................................................................................................................Setup Port............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 217 Copying Palettes ................................ Popup Page or Button ...................................................... 210 Assign Codes..... 208 0................................................................................................................................. 216 Renaming Palettes...................... 215 Working With Multiple Color Palettes. 205 Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop .............................. 217 Copying Palette Entries....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 205 Copying/Pasting States From a Page......................................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................233 Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Page......................................................... 228 Tweeners sub-menu .....Table of Contents Working With Video Fills .............. 220 Displaying a Video Source on a Button .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 224 Animation Wizard .................................. 223 Animation Wizard ............................................... 223 Animation Wizard ................................................................................. 224 Animation Wizard ........................ 238 TPDesign4 (v2....... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port .....................................................................Example ...... 223 Animation Wizard .................................................... 234 Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration................................................................................................ Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder..................................................... 223 Using the Animation Wizard ..... 229 Working With Chameleon Images ....... 238 Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master ........................................................................................................ 226 Creating Animated Bitmap Effects................................................................................. 227 Creating Animated Text Effects ......................................... 236 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem.... 233 Secure NetLinx Connections ...Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) ........................................................................................ 237 Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master..........................................................................................223 Overview ................ 231 File Transfer Operations ................................. 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP .......................................................... 230 Chameleon Images.............................11 or higher) xiii ........................................................................219 Overview .................. 225 Creating Color Transition Effects .........................................................................................................................................................................................................Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) ........................................... 219 Streaming Video Fills .......... 229 Requirements for Chameleon Images ................................ 220 Working With Animation Effects .......................................... 235 Connecting to a NetLinx Master ......................................................................... 219 Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page .......................................................................... 228 Chameleon Images ...........Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) ....................................................... 225 Tweening .....Appearance (Step 5 of 6) .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 238 Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master................................................... 230 Working With Chameleon Images ............. 225 Animation Wizard ..................... 234 Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations .............................................................................................................................................................................................Finish (Step 6 of 6) ...Select Type (Step 1 of 6)................................. 233 Working With Communications Configurations ........... 238 Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP .........

Table of Contents

Panel File Transfers via Serial Port .............................................................................. 239 Panel File Transfers via Modem................................................................................... 240 Transfer Options ......................................................................................................... 241

Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers............................................................... 241
Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers.................. 241 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers .................................. 242 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP)................................................... 242

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection .................. 242
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 242 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 243

Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers................................................................... 243
Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels.................................................... 243 Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers...................... 243 Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers ...................................... 244 Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB)....................................................... 244

Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection ...................... 244
Sending Files To the Panel .......................................................................................... 244 Receiving Files From The Panel ................................................................................... 244

MVP-5200i USB Driver .......................................................................................... 245

Working With Templates ................................................................................247
Importing Template (*.VAT or *.TPT) Files ............................................................ 247 Working With the System Page Template ............................................................ 247
Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project .................................................. 248 Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page ...................................... 249 Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads .................................................. 249 System Page Template Reference ............................................................................... 250 System Page Template Popup Pages .......................................................................... 251

Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template........................................ 252 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Required Template Elements.................................. 254
Navigation Elements ................................................................................................... 254 Placeholder Elements .................................................................................................. 255

G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Optional Template Elements .................................. 256
Mode Elements ........................................................................................................... 256 Sub-Navigation Elements ............................................................................................ 257 Splash Elements .......................................................................................................... 257 Device Elements .......................................................................................................... 258 Feature Elements ........................................................................................................ 258 Sub-Feature Elements ................................................................................................. 259

xiv

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Table of Contents

Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template ................................................ 259 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - Template Wide Conventions................................... 260 G4 PanelBuilder Templates - AMX Naming Conventions...................................... 261 Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template.......................................... 262
VA Templates - Navigations as Pages ......................................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements ....................................................... 262 VA Templates - Logical Page Info Element.................................................................. 263 VA Templates - Logical Page Up and Down Elements ................................................ 263 VA Templates - List Box Page Up and Down Elements ............................................... 263

Program Preferences ......................................................................................265
Overview .............................................................................................................. 265 Preferences Dialog - Application tab .................................................................... 265
Startup ........................................................................................................................ 265 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. 266 Warning Messages ...................................................................................................... 266

Preferences Dialog - Appearance tab ................................................................... 267
Window ....................................................................................................................... 267 Grid ............................................................................................................................. 268 Transparency ............................................................................................................... 268

Preferences Dialog - Directories tab..................................................................... 269
Default Directories ...................................................................................................... 269

Preferences Dialog - Editor Selection tab ............................................................. 270 Preferences Dialog - Undo/Redo tab .................................................................... 271
Undo / Redo Support .................................................................................................. 271

Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files............................................ 272 Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files ........................................... 272 Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program .......................... 273 Customizing the Menus and Toolbars................................................................... 274 Customizing the Toolbars ..................................................................................... 274
Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars.......................................................................... 274 Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars ................................................................. 275 Associating an Icon With a New Command................................................................. 275 Creating a New Custom Toolbar ................................................................................. 276 Renaming Custom Toolbars ........................................................................................ 276 Deleting Custom Toolbars........................................................................................... 277

Customizing the Menus ........................................................................................ 277
Adding Commands To Existing Menus........................................................................ 277 Removing Commands From Existing Menus ............................................................... 277 Creating a New Custom Menu .................................................................................... 278

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

xv

Table of Contents

Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu ...................................... 279 Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) ......................................................................... 280
Setting Custom Hotkeys.............................................................................................. 280

xvi

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)
Overview
The TPDesign4 (or "TPD4") Touch Panel Design program is designed to assist you in creating a state-of-theart touch panel interface for AMX's G4 Level touch panels (including the Modero line, MIO-R4 remote controllers, and the NXP-TPI/4 Touch Panel Interface). Use TPD4 to create Project Files (*.TP4) containing all of the information required to define a user-interface to be utilized on a G4 touch panel. This includes Pages, Popup Pages and associated navigation/page-flip information, as well as buttons (including function code information), and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design (including dynamic images and video feeds).

What's New in Version 2.11
Support for Dynamo Resource Images on the following panel-types: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i

Supported Windows Platforms and PC Requirements
Supported Operating Systems
Windows 2000® (service pack 4 or greater) Windows XP® Professional (service pack 2 or greater) Windows Vista-Business You must have Power User (or Administrator) rights to install and run all required System files.

Supported Operating System Languages
Windows XP® Professional / Windows 2000®: • English (US) • French • German • Spanish Windows Vista-Business®: • Chinese (Classic, HK) • French • Japanese • Spanish • English • Chinese (Simplified, PRC) • Arabic • German • Turkish • Greek • Italian • Portuguese • Flemish (Dutch) • Russian • Turkish

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

1

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

PC Requirements/Recommendations
Pentium III 750MHZ processor (minimum requirement); 1.5GHz or faster recommended. 700 MB of free disk space (minimum requirement) 512 MB of RAM (minimum - SQL Server 2005 Express Edition requires 512MB) Minimum (VGA) screen resolution of 800x600. Windows-compatible mouse (or other pointing device). If the mouse wheel on your Microsoft® IntelliMouse® doesn't work with VA, try downloading the latest IntelliMouse drivers from Microsoft.

Supported Touch Panels/Screen Resolutions
Supported Panel Types
TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) supports the following AMX (G4) touch panel types: Supported Panel Types
Name MVP-5100 MVP-5150 MVP-5200i MVP-7500 MVP-8400 MVP-8400i NXD-430 NXD-435 NXD-CV5 NXD-500i NXD/NXT-CV7 NXD-700vi NXD/NXT-CV10 NXT-CV10/PB NXD-1000vi NXD/NXT-CA12 NXD/NXT-CV12 NXD/NXT-1200V Description 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® IR Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Wi-Fi Touch Panel 5.2" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 7.5" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel 8.4" Modero® ViewPoint® Touch Panel with Intercom 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 4.3" Modero Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 5" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel 7" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 7" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 10" Modero Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 10" Modero Table Top Touch Panel with Pushbuttons 10" Modero® Wall/Flush Mount Touch Panel with Intercom 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 12" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels 12" Modero® Video Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG5966-08) (FG5966-07) (FG5966-01) (FG5965-01) (FG5965-05) (FG5965-04) (FG2262-01) (FG2262-03) (FG2261-01) (FG2261-02) (FG2258-02K, FG2258-01K) (FG2258-04K) (FG2259-02K, FG2259-01K) (FG2259-03K) (FG2259-04K) (FG2251-10, FG2250) (FG2251-12K, FG2250-11K) (FG2251-60K, FG2250-60K) (FG225161RGB, FG2250-61V)

NXD/NXT-1200VG 12" Modero® VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels with RGB

2

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Supported Panel Types (Cont.)
Name NXD/NXT-CA15 NXD/NXT-CV15 Description 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels 15" Flush Mount & Table Top Video Touch Panels FG#(s) (FG2253-10, FG2252) (FG2253-12K, FG2252-11K) (FG2253-61V, FG2252-61V) (FG2256K, FG2257K) (FG2256-61V, FG2257-61V) (FG630-100) (FG2275-01) (FG2275-102, FG2275-104) (FG2275-112, FG2275-114) (FG148-04)

NXD/NXT-1500VG 15" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXD/NXT-CV17 17" Flush Mount & Table Top Color Video Touch Panels

NXD/NXT-1700VG 17" Modero VG Series Wall/Flush Mount & Table Top Touch Panels NXP-PLV NXP-TPI/4 TPI-PRO TPI-PRO-DVI R-4 Modero PosiTrack Pilot Camera Controller NetLinx® Touch Panel Interface Total Presentation Interface, 2/4 Source Input Total Presentation Interface with DVI, 2/4 Source Input Mio R-4 Remote

The prefix " NXT" indicates the table-top (tilt) model, and "NXD" represents the wallmount version.

Supported Screen Resolutions
While most touch panels support a single screen resolution, the NXI-TPI/4, TPI-PRO, TPI-PRO-DVI and NXV-300 support multiple resolutions, selectable in the New Project Wizard - Step 1 dialog. The screen resolution setting for these panel devices can be changed later via the Screen Size option in the Save As Different Panel Type dialog. Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions
Resolution 640x480 720x480 CEA 720x576 CEA 800x480 • MVP-7500 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO-DVI • MVP-5150 • MVP-5200i • CV5 • MVP-8400i • MVP-8400 800x600 • 1200V • 1200VG • 1500VG 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB • CA12 • CV12 • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • NXP-TPI4 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

3

11 or higher) .Pro Edition (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 • 1920x1200 4 TPDesign4 (v2. Supported Screen Resolutions .TPI-PRO TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface .) Resolution 1280x720 VESA/CEA 1280x768 • TPI-PRO-DVI • 1700VG • CV17 • NXP-TPI4 1280x1024 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI 1360x768 1440x900 1600x1200 1680x1050 1920x1080 1920x1080 VESA/CEA 1920x1200 • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI • TPI-PRO • TPI-PRO-DVI Panel Type TPD4 provides scrolling if a Design View is larger than the available visible work area.NXI-TPI/4 TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the NXI-TPI/4 (NetLinx Touch Panel Interface 4): • 640x480 • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x1024 Supported Screen Resolutions .TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) Supported Panel Types Per Resolutions (Cont.

These include: NXT/NXD-CV7 NXD/NXT-CV10 NXD/NXT-CV10/PB NXT/NXD-CV12 NXT/NXD-CV15 NXT/NXD-CV17 Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels Video capable Enhanced Modero Panels all support Composite. These include: NXT/NXD-1200V (Composite only) NXT/NXD-1200VG NXT/NXD-1500VG NXT/NXD-1700VG While the NXT/NXD-1200V panel is considered to be part of the enhanced Modero family of Panels.11 or higher) 5 .TPDesign4 (v2. it also supports Composite video (only). These panels include: MVP-5200i MVP-8400i NXD-1000vi NXD-700vi TPDesign4 (v2. Intercom Capabilities for Modero Panels Intercom-equipped Modero Panels support 2-way full-duplex intercom capabilities. Component/RGB and Streaming video inputs.11 or higher) Supported Screen Resolutions .TPI-PRO-DVI TPDesign4 supports 24-bit RGB color at the following screen resolutions for the TPI-PRO (Total Presentation Interface PRO with DVI (2/4 Source Input)): • 640x480 • 720x480 CEA • 720x576 CEA • 800x600 • 1024x768 • 1280x720 VESA • 1280x720 CEA • 1280x768 • 1280x1024 • 1360x768 • 1440x900 • 1600x1200 • 1680x1050 • 1920x1080 VESA • 1920x1080 CEA • 1920x1200 Video Capabilities for Modero Panels Video Capable Modero Panels all support Composite video inputs.

amx. as well as the Button Selection/Draw toolbar and the Add Page and Add Popup Page dialogs. Refer to the NetLinx Studio online help and Instruction Manual for instructions. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details. Fonts are presented in the Properties Control window (States tab). Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. 6 TPDesign4 (v2. NetLinx Studio is available for free download from www. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs. This list will be updated as support for Dynamo Resource Images is added to new and existing panels: NXD-1000Vi MVP-8400i MVP-8400 MVP-5200i NXD-700Vi NXD-500i True Type Font Support Since G4 panels have the ability to decode and display Windows True Type Font files (TTF).com: NetLinx Studio NetLinx Studio is a full featured Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for NetLinx and Axcess Control Systems. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. Related Software Applications The related AMX software applications described in the following sections are available to download from www.11 or higher) AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images The following list indicates the AMX Touch Panels that support Dynamo Resource Images (at the time of this TPDesign4 release).TPDesign4 (v2. The TTF files listed represent those TTF files installed in Windows with their available point sizes. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4.11 or higher) .com.amx. Unless you are actually using transparency. TPD4 directly utilizes TTF files.

VAT) into TPD4 as a starting point for your panel design. or user-designed templates. TPD4 will prompt you to download the application from www. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. Note: The WebUpdate application is not installed by TPD4. Refer to the WebUpdate on-line help for details and instructions. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application. For example.TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 is required to complete the project by specifying channel mapping information. the File > New From G4 PanelBuilder option (available only if G4 PanelBuilder is installed) launches the G4 PanelBuilder application to allow you to create a new TPD4 project. Click File > Import Touch Panel Template to import an existing PanelBuilder (*. Click File > Export G4 PanelBuilder Template to export the active TP4 project as a PanelBuilder Template file (*. For details on using G4 PanelBuilder to generate G4 PanelBuilder project files (*. returns a listing of available updates.amx.11 or higher) 7 . refer to the G4 PanelBuilder online help. If not found. G4 PanelBuilder G4 PanelBuilder is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to quickly create TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. Select Help > Web Update to launch this application.PB4).amx. it is fully integrated with TPD4. The G4 PanelBuilder application is designed to do the bulk of the basic layout and navigational design of a touch panel design. and to generally fine-tune the project as needed. allows a user to select from a list of available AMX Software programs to choose for updating. launches the installation of those downloads. and upon request. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. To preview your panel project.com. and must be installed separately. determines the latest version of the selected applications. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. G4 PanelPreview G4 PanelPreview is a stand-alone application (installed separately) from AMX that allows you to preview TPD4 projects for G4 touchpanels. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details.com. Although G4 PanelBuilder is installed separately. Use the set of options in the File menu to access the key functions of the G4 PanelBuilder application: Click File > New From G4 Panel Builder to create a new TP4 panel project using G4 PanelBuilder.TPT). using either pre-fabricated templates from AMX.11 or higher) AMX WebUpdate The AMX WebUpdate program is a stand-alone application that communicates with the AMX website. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons. allows a user to download the selected installation files. TPDesign4 (v2.TPT) or Visual Architect template file (*.

11 or higher) .TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 8 TPDesign4 (v2.

Click View. and their pages and popup pages. 1 TPDesign4 Work Area In its default configuration. Edit. the main components are: Title Bar . Button. then it is displayed. TPDesign4 (v2. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. Menu Bar . Layout. If a toolbar has a check next to it in the sub-menu. When this option is enabled.Contains the main menu options (File. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). left to right. States. Use the Pages tabs to open/edit the pages / popup pages in each project. and Help). The Function Maps tab allows you to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. a tab is displayed for each open page. These tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area.Contains two tabs: The Pages tab contains a tree structure representing all open projects. Panel. then click in the checkboxes to select/de-select the listed toolbars (including custom toolbars).Lists the name of the active Project file.The TPDesign4 Work Area The TPDesign4 Work Area Overview The TPD4 work area consists of several main components (FIG.Each tabbed Design View Window represents a Touch Panel page or popup page. These settings are saved. Window. Workspace Window . Note that a MDI tab is displayed for each opened page. Transfer. from top to bottom. Tools. View. Design View Windows . Toolbars .11 or higher) 9 . so they'll apply the next time the application is launched.You can choose which toolbars to show in the workspace via the View > Toolbars submenu. Page. 1): Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbars Workspace Window Design View Windows Properties Window State Manager Window Status Bar FIG. but can be moved.

Feedback and Initial page file target information. The status bar also indicates the status of your connection to the NetLinx Master. Top. 3). They provide a canvas upon which you may place buttons of any size that will fit within the confines of the windows. you can click and drag to resize and position it manually. 2 Design View windows The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. the Status Bar shows the current XY cursor position. you can set their size and dimensions manually by first enabling the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. and the States tab allows you to view/edit button state information. but can be moved. State Manager Window .Displays each state of the selected button as a thumbnail image in this window. Width or Height properties. and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. Since Design View windows represent the pages on the panel themselves. panel revision. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. the Programming tab allows you view/edit programming-oriented properties. The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area. 3 Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (View toolbar) Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. a tab is displayed for each open page.11 or higher) . Status Bar . FIG. but can be moved. Level code.Contains three tabs: the General tab allows you to view/edit general (non-state oriented) button properties. Alternatively. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs).The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Window . The State Manager window allows you to view/edit the various states of a selected button. Popup pages are resizable through the Properties Window by adjusting their Left. toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (right-click inside any of the tabs to open). Address code. Design View Windows Design View windows (FIG. 10 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG.By default. button size. 2) represent pages or popup pages in the panel file you are creating. Select the Toggle Information Overlay toolbar button (in the View toolbar) to display function codes associated with each button (FIG. When this option is enabled. Design Views that represent pages are not resizable. Use the Zoom and Magnifier Window features to control the size of the view.

these page tabs are referred to as "MDI tabs".5” and 20” viewable area. The monitor size should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a full-screen image. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. This context menu contains shortcuts to many key design tools. Design View Window tab controls Each panel page that you open is shown in its own Design View window for editing. and they can be toggled on/off via the View > MDI Page Tabs option. If you open more than 10 pages. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). In TPD4. each of these windows has its own page tab (normally appearing along the bottom edge of the Design View window area) that shows the Page name. No data will be lost. Actual Size: Automatically adjusts the zoom to represent how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the target panel type. you must first specify the monitor’s visible size (in the Monitor Size field of the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog). Right-click inside any of the page tabs to access the MDI Page tabs context menu. by the increments listed in the Zoom Control drop-down.11 or higher) 11 . click the Zoom Out and Zoom In toolbar buttons to adjust the display size of the selected object. the tabs automatically disappear. most 21” monitors typically have between a 19. If you open more than 15 pages. center. This menu is identical to the Layout menu. as opposed to the monitor’s overall diagonal size. 4 Zoom toolbar The following Zoom Controls are available via the Zoom toolbar: Full Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to show the entire page at 100% size. Zoom Out/In: With a page or popup page selected. Use these options to control the zoom factor on the selected page or popup page. FIG. By default. Use these tabs to easily flip from page to page. To use this option. Using the Zoom Controls The Zoom toolbar (FIG. align. containing options that allow you to select which state of a selected button to display in the Design View. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. Zoom controls do not affect the actual size of the selected object. once you have several pages open. Select Layout from the Design View context menu to access the Layout sub-menu. etc). accessible from the main menu bar. TPD4 displays up to a maximum of 10 page tabs. Fit Page: Automatically adjusts the zoom to fit inside the Design View window. 4) contains shortcuts to the main Zoom Controls. only the view is closed. containing options for layout/design control (send to front/back.The TPDesign4 Work Area TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. TPDesign4 (v2. Select Display from the Design View context menu to access the Display sub-menu. only the way it is represented in the workspace area. Right mouse click anywhere within a Design View window to open the Design View context menu. For example.

Select View > Magnifier Window (or click the toolbar button) to access the Magnifier Window. where you can specify any zoom percentage within the range of 25 . 6): FIG. Custom: Opens the Custom Window Zoom dialog. Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus). 5 Magnifier Window toolbar button (View toolbar) Right-click inside the Magnifier window to access the Magnify Control context menu. without zooming the entire design view.400% (in 1-percent increments). For Width or Fit Height. 6 Workspace window 12 TPDesign4 (v2. 75%. where you can select a zoom factor from 2 to 8 times actual size. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. Additional Zoom options are available via the Window > Zoom submenu: Fit Width: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the width of the selected object inside the Design View window. Use this list to manually set the zoom to by incremental percentages (25%. 200% or 400%). and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. Fit Height: Automatically adjusts the zoom to accommodate the height of the selected object inside the Design View window. or by Fit Page. This floating window is resizable and dockable. 150%. Magnifier Window The Magnifier window allows you to magnify a given area of a design view for temporary viewing in a separate floating window.11 or higher) . 100%. 50%. FIG.The TPDesign4 Work Area Zoom Control Drop-down: Click the down-arrow to open the Zoom control options list.

The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Navigator . and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages. or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. 7): FIG. 7 Workspace Navigator . Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders.Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages. in the Workspace Navigator.11 or higher) 13 . In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. Each open Project is represented by a folder. These folders represent Popup Page Groups. TPDesign4 (v2. Click the + symbol next to the folders. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group.Pages Tab Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. each one with a different colored panel icon (FIG.

The TPDesign4 Work Area Workspace Window. Programming and States: 14 TPDesign4 (v2. 8). The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window (FIG. popup page and button properties. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. Level codes.Function Maps Tab This list is sorted by Port. the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. Address codes. the selected button is named "pause". and within Port by Code. Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map.11 or higher) . and the button type is general. 8 Workspace Window. Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. FIG. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window.

Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. General buttons). With an item selected. you can either set the item manually. TPDesign4 (v2. and the original value is left unchanged. 9).General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types (FIG. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field.11 or higher) 15 . Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. or the Page itself). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. and drag it to another field.General Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. or both. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type (in this case. 9 Properties Control . the value is copied to the new location.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). Depending on the item selected. select from a drop-down menu. click on an item in the right column to activate that field for editing. FIG. When you release the mouse button.

This information is displayed in a table format. 10 Properties Control . or both. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. FIG.Programming Tab To edit any of the listed button properties. With an item selected. or the Page itself). 16 TPDesign4 (v2. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column.11 or higher) . the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. you can either set the item manually. select from a drop-down menu. When you release the mouse button.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button (FIG. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. similar to the General tab. Depending on the item selected. 10). the value is copied to the new location. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. and the original value is left unchanged. and drag it to another field. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control .

and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. the value is copied to the new location. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. or the Page itself). FIG.11 or higher) 17 . and drag it to another field. 0. 11). All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). TPDesign4 (v2. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. and the original value is left unchanged. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. Depending on the item selected. With an item selected. similar to the General tab. you can either set the item manually.States Tab To edit any of the listed button properties.The TPDesign4 Work Area Properties Control . This information is displayed in a table format. When you release the mouse button. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog. or both. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. select from a drop-down menu. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself).States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button (FIG. 11 Properties Control .

use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. 12 Apply To All toggle button If the Apply To All button is not depressed. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. and you select more than one button to act on. FIG. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. but not on multiple states for a single button. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. provided that the change can be applied to them all. and the Apply To All button is not depressed (in its active state). When you have multiple buttons selected. 18 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . 12). All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window.The TPDesign4 Work Area Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All toggle button is located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (FIG. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected.

Replace states. which includes options to add single or multiple states. When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display.The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager window The State Manager is typically located along the bottom edge of the screen (although it is a dockable window and you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit the various states of a selected button (FIG. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states. The user will be able to set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu. Send Commands can set the state number provided it is not a level type button. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. To display the State Manager window. Select a Page.11 or higher) 19 . Each state of the selected button is displayed as a thumbnail image in this window. and supports full Cut. 13). For Multi-Bargraph buttons. Right mouse click on any thumbnail to open the State Manager context menu. Note that because the thumbnails displayed in the State Manager window are scaled versions of the button images. the states will be displayed in reverse order. Popup page or button to view the state or states associated with it. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. The State Manager window allows the viewing and modification of individual states. When the button is turned back off. replace states. For Multi-General buttons. and does not represent distortion on the button itself. and back again to Off (Range Time Down in the States tab). which includes options to Add single or multiple states. the different states (up to 256) are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up in the States tab). Double-click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to view/edit the properties for the selected state. the level will directly reflect the displayed state. Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities. 13 State Manager window The State Manager interacts with the Properties Control window to allow the visual aspects of a page. Insert. Copy. and remove states. TPDesign4 (v2. select View > State Manager. some visual distortion may occur. This is only a result of the scaling. popup page or button to be set. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. in the Properties Control window (States tab). insert single or multiple states. FIG. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. Delete. For buttons with multiple states. Insert single or multiple states and Remove states.

For all other button types: A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state will execute a replace operation. Project . FIG. prior to the first state. or after the last state is disallowed. accessible through the main menu bar: 20 TPDesign4 (v2. "Move…". Right mouse click anywhere in the Transfer Status Window to open the Transfer Status context menu.11 or higher) .This column indicates the name of the Project to which the files belong. and the overall status of the transfer. Transfer Status Window The Send To Panel and Receive From Panel dialogs place the requested transfer into a queue. which may be docked/undocked from the main application window (FIG. and for transferring TP4 files to the panels. containing options for establishing a connection to the NetLinx Master and panels. A left mouse button drag-and-drop between states. select a button state (thumbnail view).This column gives the Device # and a description of the target/source device. or "Cancel".The status bars indicate the progress of each file in the transfer. 14 Transfer Status Window This window displays the following data for each transfer: Status . "Insert copy…". and hold the mouse button down while dragging the selected state to another location in the State Manager window. or "Cancel". or after the last state executes a move operation. prior to the first state. unless all states have been selected. the status of which is displayed in the Transfer Status window. A right mouse button drag-and-drop over a state presents a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Copy over…". or after the last state will present a drag-and-drop menu with options to "Insert copy…". Note that this context menu is identical to the Transfer Menu. "Move…".The TPDesign4 Work Area State Manager Drag-and-Drop Menu To access the State Manager Drag-and-Drop menu. The contents of the Drag-and-Drop menu change depending on the type of button selected: For Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph Buttons: A left mouse button drag-and-drop over a state executes a replace operation. A right mouse button drag-and-drop between states. 14). Device . prior to the first state. A left or right mouse button drag-and-drop between states.

it shows the current Cursor position. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. 16 Status Bar . Address code and Level code (FIG.connection status TPDesign4 (v2. it shows the current Cursor position. Double-click anywhere on the status bar to view this secondary position. and (for the button the mouse is over): Location. and (for the button the mouse is over): Channel code. 15 Status Bar . In the default view.11 or higher) 21 . Size. 17): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG.The TPDesign4 Work Area Status Bar There are two views available for the status bar (located along the bottom edge of the application window). 16): FIG. FbBk: Displays the type of feedback associated with the button that the cursor is over. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels).secondary view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. Add: Displays the Address code (port number:address code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 0. The Status Bar also indicates connection status as follows (FIG. Loc: Displays the X-Y location of the button that the cursor is over (relative to the upper-left corner of the button). Ch: Displays the Channel code (port number:channel code) associated with the button that the cursor is over.default view Cursor: Displays the current X-Y cursor position. and Feedback (FIG. The default view. Size: Displays the size of the button that the cursor is over. In the secondary view. 15): FIG. Lvl: Displays the Level code (port number:level code) associated with the button that the cursor is over. 17 Status Bar . and the secondary view which is available via a double-click anywhere inside the status bar.

11 or higher) . Disable Mute Push FIG.The TPDesign4 Work Area Button Preview Window Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. but initially it opens undocked. Button Preview is not available for Joystick or Listbox Buttons. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. for multi-state buttons). 18). the Button Preview window is fully dockable. Click on the button in the Button Preview window to "push" the button in an identical fashion to utilizing the Push command button. Like the other windows in TPD4. 22 TPDesign4 (v2. but not close the Button Preview window. Click to Mute any sounds associated with this button. This allows you to visually preview the On/Off states (and all states in between. This window includes three command buttons: Click the Disable button to disable the button preview. Click again to enable the preview. Right-click inside the preview area of the Button Preview window to access the Button Preview context menu. 18 Button Preview window The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. Click the Push button to simulate a push on the selected button.

The printed output maintains a constant scaling factor across all pages. The dockable windows in TPD4 are: Design View Properties Control Workspace Navigator State Manager Transfer Status Window Button Preview Magnifier Window Moving. Docking and Resizing Dockable Windows To move the windows. bottom. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print . They automatically snap to the top. right or left side of the application window.Toggles the page view to one or two pages.Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page . To dock these windows. TPDesign4 (v2. the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer.Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC.Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out . click on any border and drag the border either vertically or horizontally. click on the bottom-left corner of the window border in the area shaded with parallel diagonal lines and drag the corner in any direction.Prints the current page view Next Page . Zoom In . Working With Dockable Windows All windows in TPD4 are fully dockable. To resize the windows. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page. as they will appear when printed. with the image centered on the printed page. Workspace Navigator. State Manager and Button Preview windows) can be toggled on/off via the options in the View menu. Properties Control. Select or de-select each window to toggle by checking or un-checking the window listings in this menu (checked = window is on/ displayed). To dock/undock a window. or along the edges of other docked windows.The TPDesign4 Work Area Print Preview Window Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. double-click inside the window's title bar. To stretch the windows.Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page .11 or higher) 23 . Toggling the Windows Each of the dockable windows (Design View. Dockable windows can be re-arranged within the application window.Zooms out from the page view Close . drag the window to reposition it next to any border or window frame and the window will automatically snap to the nearest border. Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. Dockable windows automatically snap into place once they are positioned near an available docking area (along the edges of the application window. or along the edge of another dockable window. click on the title bar and drag and drop the window into place.

11 or higher) .The TPDesign4 Work Area 24 TPDesign4 (v2.

To cancel the wizard at any point in the process. and consists of up to three dialogs: 1. Click Finish to close the wizard. If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields. 3.. The initial page is listed under the Pages folder. When you finish the New Project Wizard. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. 2. JobComments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. FontSize: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size. Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font. If you close the wizard after step 1. SalesOrder: Enter the Sales Order number in this field. you will have created a project with a single page. The last dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . from a list of all available fonts on your PC. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text. DealerID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field. The New Project Wizard is by its nature self-explanatory and intuitive. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project.Using the New Project Wizard Using the New Project Wizard Overview The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). select File > New. FileRevision: Enter the Revision in this field. The first dialog to appear (New Project Wizard . PurchaseOrder: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. You can add pages manually via the Panel > Add Page command. Every project created will have at least one page. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. and has the edit focus. Name: Enter a name for the page.Final Step) contains fields for setting up the initial touch panel page in the project. note that the new project appears in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). Resolution: Click the down-arrow to select the target resolution for the project.) to open the Colors dialog.Step 1) contains fields to allow you set up the basics of your new project. Fill out this information and click Next to proceed. Job Name: Enter a name for the new project.Step 2) contains fields for System-Generated File Names. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name. To launch the New Project Wizard. You can change the target panel type for any existing panel file via the File > Save as Different Panel Type option.11 or higher) 25 . The next dialog in the wizard (New Project Wizard . click Cancel. Fill out this information and click Finish to exit the New Project Wizard. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. If the Use System Generated File Names option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. TPDesign4 (v2.. complete with a start page. Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field.

select File > New. Use the New Project Wizard as a shortcut to starting new TPD4 projects. New Project Wizard .Step Two dialog 3. to support transport and Teletext keypads. CEA etc. Use System Generated File Name: Click this checkbox to use a System Generated File Name for this project. New Project Wizard . If the selected panel type supports resolution extensions (VESA. complete with a start page. The External Button Options and Panel Resolution selections cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.11 or higher) . The External Button Option selected here is represented in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog. 19 New Project Wizard .). The New Project Wizard consists of up to three dialogs: 1. click Cancel. Resolution: If the Panel Type selected supports multiple screen resolutions (such as the TPIs and NXV-300). Panel Type: Click the down-arrow to view a list of supported panel types. 19).Step One dialog 2. This invokes the first of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG.Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard dialogs The New Project Wizard steps you through the process of creating a new Project file (also known as a Panel file). Select the desired external button layout from the drop-down list (MIO R-4 only). FIG. the extension is provided with the associated resolution (not all resolutions require an extension).Step 1 dialog To launch the New Project Wizard (to create a new TPD4 Project). click the down-arrow to select a target resolution for the project.Step 1 dialog The options in this dialog include: Job Name: Enter a name for the new project. select File > New. External Button Options: MIO-R4 remotes support multiple external button options. To launch the New Project Wizard. use the Save As Different Panel Type option (File Menu) 26 TPDesign4 (v2. To change either of these. New Project Wizard . To cancel the wizard at any point in the process.Final Step dialog New Project Wizard .

Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . File Revision: Enter the File Revision identifier in this field. Sales Order: Enter the Sales Order number in this field.Step Two dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard . The options in this dialog include: Designer: Enter the name of the project designer in this field. Purchase Order: Enter the Purchase Order number in this field. 20 New Project Wizard . If you choose not to populate one or more of these fields.11 or higher) 27 .Step 2 dialog If the "Use System Generated File Names" option (in the Step 1 dialog) is not selected. Job Comments: Enter any project-related comments in this field. TPDesign4 (v2. Dealer ID: Enter the Dealer ID in this field.Step One dialog to access the second of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. FIG. this dialog is skipped since the information entered here would not apply. they will not be included in the System Generated File Name. 20).

Final Step dialog Select Next in the New Project Wizard .Using the New Project Wizard New Project Wizard . 21).Step Two dialog to access the third of three dialogs in the wizard (FIG. 28 TPDesign4 (v2.) to open the Colors dialog.. 21 New Project Wizard . Font: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font. Colors (Page background and Text): Click the browse button (. FIG. where you can select the colors for the Page Background and Page Text.Final Step dialog The options in this dialog allow you to set up the initial touch panel page in the project: Name: Enter a name for the page..11 or higher) . from a list of all available fonts on your PC. Font Size: Click the down arrow to select the Page Font size.

At this point. if the selected panel type features external pushbuttons). Click the Finish button in the last dialog in the wizard to close the wizard. unless you explicitly choose to save them in another location. Inappropriate File Name Characters Avoid using the following characters when naming TPD4 project files: Inappropriate File Name Characters • Vertical Bar • Question Mark • Asterisk • Less Than Sign • Greater Than Sign • Forward Slash • Back Slash • Double Quotes • Colon • Period | ? * < > / \ " : . avoid using inappropriate file name characters. The New Project Wizard is designed to be simple and intuitive.TPD4 Project Files (*. If you try to save with a longer name. Simply fill in the fields in each New Project Wizard dialog. and click Next to proceed to the next dialog. All name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. and all image and sound-related files that are used in the design. Project Files contain all of the information required to define the user-interface that is displayed on the touch panel. the project is created with one generic page. Creating a New Project TPD4 includes a New Project Wizard. or click the toolbar button. to quickly guide you through the process of setting up a new project. buttons including function code information.11 or higher) 29 . To launch the New Project Wizard. TPD4 will automatically truncate the name to 59 characters. Refer to the Using the New Project Wizard section on page 25 for details. Each page / popup page name must be unique within their respective panel files in order to be accepted by the program. When creating a new Project file. TPD4 has a limit of 59 characters for the project name/filename. including pages and popup pages and associated navigation/page-flip information.TP4) Overview TP4 Project (or Panel) files are created in the folder specified in the application preferences. popup pages and buttons (including External Controls. TPDesign4 (v2. select File > New. and is ready for you to start adding pages.TP4) TPD4 Project Files (*.

For example. If you select not to use System-Generated File Names. the file name will match the Job Name entered in the first dialog of the New Project Wizard.TP4) System-Generated Project File Names When you are creating a new Project. you are given the option to use System Generated File Names (in the New Project Wizard dialog). and Revision).My TP Project. Use these fields to enter this additional information for this project. System-generated file names are generated automatically based on several fields that hold various types of project information (Designer. 30 TPDesign4 (v2.Step 2 dialog (System-Generated File Names) The resulting file name would be: "1234.Super-Dave Osborne.TPD4 Project Files (*.rev a.5678-9876. If you leave any of the fields blank. 22 New Project Wizard . Dealer ID. When you utilize System-Generated File Names. the resulting filename for this project file consists of each of these entries separated by commas. they are simply omitted from the file name.TP4" The Purchase Order field and the (optional) Job comments field are not incorporated into the generated filename. All information entered in this dialog can be viewed/edited at any time via the Panel Properties dialog.11 or higher) . 22. if all fields are filled in as shown in FIG. Purchase Order. These fields are all optional. FIG. Sales Order.

You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). The Cut. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties window. For example. popup page.11 or higher) 31 . Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element which has the current edit focus.TP4) Edit Focus The page. edit focus is indicated in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) by a small arrow at the lower-left corner of the icon for the selected page or popup page.these errors are indicated by a TPD4 error dialog. The Quick Input setting determines how typing directly into a Design View or into the State Manager will be handled: Current Property . For example. For pages and popup pages. "Page 2" has current Edit Focus FIG. and you perform a "Copy". FIG. you can just type and press the Enter key to enter a new button name for the selected button. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. any time you select a button in the Design View.This setting redirects keyboard input to the currently selected property on the currently visible tab of the Properties Window (assuming one is selected). and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). if you select the Name property (in the General tab of the Properties control window). Button has Edit Focus Button does not currently have Edit Focus FIG. 23 shows that "Page 1" has the edit focus. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port".TPD4 Project Files (*. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field. This means the last thing selected (not necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows) has the edit focus. 24 Button Edit Focus as Indicated In the Design View windows Buttons that do not currently have edit focus are displayed with selection handles that are black squares (with white outlines). TPDesign4 (v2. Quick Input Select Quick Input from the Edit menu or Design View context menu to access the Quick Input sub-menu. or button(s) that are the target for change actions are said to have the Edit Focus. since it is not a valid Address Port number . edit focus is indicated in the Design View window with small red squares (with yellow outlines) on the edges of the selected button. 23 Page Edit Focus as Indicated In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) For buttons.

Undo/Redo TPD4 supports full Undo / Redo functionality at the panel level. you can type and press the Enter key to enter new button text for the selected states. For example. or click Edit > Undo or Edit > Redo. bitmaps. Popup Page or Button section on page 205. therefore you may undo past a save if you so desire. it's undo/redo stack is flushed and is no longer available. This means the last thing selected.see the Copying/Pasting Buttons section on page 110 Copying/Pasting States . and you perform a "Copy".see the Copying/Pasting Popup Pages section on page 94 Copying/Pasting Buttons . text is will be applied to all states of the button selected in the Design View. These actions are independent of any file saves. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry).see the Copying/Pasting States From a Page. Copying/Pasting Pages . If no states are selected.Disables the Quick Input option. copied or pasted in TPD4. has the edit focus. This means that each panel file that is open in the program maintains a separate undo/redo stack and manages this for the user.11 or higher) . Disabled . if you select several states on a Multi-State button (in the State Manager window). Click the down-arrows to view a history list that lists up to 25 of the most recent actions. Copying and Pasting There are several items that can be cut. Click to select one or more actions to be undone/redone. Text . even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus.TP4) The result of the keystroke will depend on the property selected. The following actions may be undone/redone: Button Property Changes Page / Popup Page Renames Button Deletions / Cuts Button Creations / Pastes Page / Popup Page Deletions / Cuts Page / Popup Page Creations / Pastes State Deletions / Cuts State Creations / Pastes Copying/Cutting/Pasting images and sounds Cutting. Once a panel file is closed. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port".TPD4 Project Files (*. The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. For instance. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window.see the Copying/Pasting Pages section on page 81 Copying/Pasting Popup Pages . Selecting either option will immediately undo/redo the last action. You may either click the Undo or Redo toolbar icons. 32 TPDesign4 (v2. which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows.This setting redirects keyboard input to the button Text property for all selected button states (in the States tab of the Properties Control window). and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). The commands alter their text dynamically to indicate which action is next in the undo/redo list. The ability to utilize these features effectively can greatly increase your productivity.

or left-click on the background of the page or popup page. When using the Selection Tool. The NXP-TPI/4. you can assign a "video fill" to a page. 25 Selection Tool Use the Selection tool to pick/select objects in the Design View window(s). hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons). hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it.TP4) If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window.11 or higher) 33 . popup page or button. as opposed to clicking on the item. To de-select a button. Working With Video Fills If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). You can also select multiple buttons. 2. select Edit > Selection Tool. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. 4. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. TPDesign4 (v2. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. you may turn the Apply To All toggle button (located at the bottom of the Properties Control window) On. you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field.TPD4 Project Files (*. With an item selected in a Design View window. then individually select each desired button. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodates up to four video source inputs. FIG. using any of the following techniques: 1. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. When using the Selection Tool. In the Properties Control window. 25). Using the Selection Tool To activate the Selection tool. 3. You may perform a marquis selection by holding down the left mouse button outside the boundaries of the desired buttons and drawing a selection box around the desired buttons. Left click on the remaining desired buttons while simultaneously depressing the Shift key on your keyboard. either select another button. See the Supported Panel Types section on page 2 for details. or click the toolbar button in the Selection/Button Draw Toolbar (FIG. since it is not a valid Address Port number (these errors are indicated by an error dialog). Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages.

Designer. to open the file via the TPD Conversion Wizard. the Use system generated filenames option and Protection options with Password fields. AMX IR Receivers and User (non-AMX) IR Emitters. Depending upon the panel selected. Last save date. Power-up and Inactivity Settings and Feedback Blink Rate. Setting Project Properties Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog.amx. IR Emitters and Receivers tab: Includes Channel Port information for AMX IR Emitters. Refer to the G4 PanelPreview online help file for details.TP4) from a Windows Explorer window onto the TPD4 workspace to open the project. Purchase Order.TPD) project files into the workspace. Sales Order. You can also drag and drop TPDesign3 (*. Created with Build Number. Dealer ID. 34 TPDesign4 (v2. Creation Date. Sensors tab: Includes Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors.com. Panel Setup Information tab: Includes touch panel setup options including Refresh Frequency. (including multi-state and bar graph buttons) via the mouse and keyboard on your PC. File Name.TPD4 Project Files (*. Wakeup and Sleep). Revision. Motion Sensors. Panel Strings (Startup. Marquee Speed. Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors. Using G4 PanelPreview To preview your panel project. The G4 PanelPreview application is available from www. Revision Date. Popup Pages: Popup Pages can be dragged from the Pages tab and dropped on a Design View as an alternate method of displaying the Popup Page on the full sized Page.TP4) Drag and Drop Support Project Files: Drag and drop TPD4 project files (*. and must be installed in order to activate this menu option. Job Comments. where you can preview the project and simulate push and release of buttons. This is a multi-tab dialog allowing you to view and edit the target touch panel's properties.11 or higher) . each panel will support all or part of the following properties at the panel level: Project Information tab: Includes basic project information such as Job Name. Dragging a Popup Page onto another Popup Page is not supported. select Panel > Send To G4 PanelPreview (or click the toolbar button) to launch the G4 PanelPreview application.

The options in this tab include: Job Name . Purchase Order .This editable field displays the current Purchase Order (identifier) associated with this project. File Revision .This editable field displays the current Dealer ID (identifier) associated with this project. Created . and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project. If the Use System-Generated File Names option was not selected.TP4) Project Properties dialog .This editable field displays the current Designer associated with this project.Project Information tab The information in this tab was set up when the project was created.This editable field displays the current Sales Order (identifier) associated with this project.TPD4 Project Files (*.11 or higher) 35 . 26). Designer ID . these fields will be blank. Dealer ID . FIG. Sales Order .Project Information tab Use the options in the Project Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit project information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG.This editable field displays the current Job Name associated with this project.This read-only field displays the creation date for this project. Modified . TPDesign4 (v2.This editable field displays the current Revision (identifier) associated with this project.This read-only field displays the last date on which this project was saved (and the build number of the TPD4 used to create this project). in the New Project Wizard. 26 Project Properties dialog . These items represent the various components of the System-Generated File Name.

a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. Also. prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. and no edits are allowed.Use this text field to confirm the password by re-typing the password exactly as it was entered in the Password field. Job Comments . To simply view the file (as read-only).259 characters) to use if the file is set as either read-only or locked.Click the down-arrow to select one of three levels of password protection for this project file: none .Click this option to apply system-generated filenames to this project.TP4) Revision Date . If the passwords don't match. the word "[Locked]" appears immediately to the right of the project name in the Workspace Navigator.this is the default setting (no password protection). then selecting this option will replace the original information with the updated information from this dialog. read-only . Confirm . prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. If the project was originally set up to use system-generated file names.This read-only field displays the date of the current revision of this project. this information will be added on the next save. files opened as read-only cannot be saved to another file name. If system-generated file names were not used for the project. Protection . click on the Read-Only command button (in the Enter Access Password dialog).Use this text field to enter the password (1 . File Name . the Enter Access Password dialog appears.This editable field displays any comments that were added in the New Project Wizard. Use System Generated File Names for This Project .the next time the panel file is selected to open.11 or higher) .the next time this panel file is opened. and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application.TPD4 Project Files (*. These protection options are not Windows file attributes. Once the password has been typed. it must be re-typed in the Confirm text field. If the file opened in read-only mode. locked .This read-only field displays the full path and disc filename of the project. 36 TPDesign4 (v2. Password .

In order to receive strings from a device. during these three conditions (Startup. the External Button Option selected is indicated as well. The options in this tab include: Refresh Frequency . Click to select the initial startup page for the panel. Marquee Speed .TPD4 Project Files (*. if you entered "Hello!" for the Wakeup string. and indicates it's screen resolution.TP4) Project Properties dialog . from the dropdown list of supported refresh frequencies (based on the selected panel/resolution).Select the desired refresh frequency for the selected panel. then the master will pass the strings from the device. This will cause an RXON command to be sent to the device.Use these three fields to specify text strings to appear on the panel. 27). TPDesign4 (v2. In the case of MIO R-4 remotes. Wakeup and Sleep). the programmer typically creates a buffer or adds a DATA_EVENT/STRING: handler for the device.Panel Setup Information tab This dialog identifies the panel for which this project is designed.Click the down-arrow to view a drop-down list of all pages currently saved in this project. 27 Project Properties dialog . Power Up/Inactivity Settings Power up page . Panel Strings . the panel will send this string to the NetLinx Master on wakeup.Sets the speed of motion for Marquee text. For example. FIG.Panel Setup Information tab Use the options in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit setup information associated with the active project/panel file (FIG.11 or higher) 37 .

Feedback blink rate (10th of second) . a text field is provided for you to manually enter the port number to be allocated.11 or higher) . Battery Levels and Cradle Sensors associated with the active panel file (FIG.select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum ports required (default setting).If you are using blinking button feedback in your project.select to supply a specific port number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. Motion Sensors. Device Port/Channel Allocation .Sensors tab 38 TPDesign4 (v2. These options include: Automatically calculate port allocation . When this option is selected. 28 Project Properties dialog .This field indicates the Power-Up popup pages that will appear over the Power up page. Specify port allocation . a text field is provided for you to manually enter the channel number.Sensors tab Use the options in the Sensors tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit Channel/Level and Port settings for Light Sensors.select to have TPDesign4 calculate the maximum channels required (default setting). use this field to specify the blink frequency. Specify channel allocation . When this option is selected. in 1/10th-second increments (default = 5).The use of dynamic list tables with channel codes may require the designer to specify the ports and/or channels to be allocated on the panel.Click the down arrow to select which page to flip to after the specified period of inactivity (set on the touch panel).TPD4 Project Files (*. Automatically calculate channel allocation .TP4) Power up popups . 28): FIG. Inactivity page . if the ports/channels utilized in the dynamic table(s) will exceed those declared in the project.select to supply a specific channel number to be allocated to dynamic list tables. Project Properties dialog .

Battery Levels . Cradle Sensor (MVP panels only) .TP4) Light Sensor . AMX 455KHz IR emitting and receiving.11 or higher) 39 .Use these fields to specify the Level and Channel port/code assignments for the onboard light sensor.Use these fields to set the Channel port/code assignments for the Cradle Sensor on MVP panels.Use these fields to specify the Level port/code assignments for the on-board battery charger. The channel will be turned on when the panel is docked (either in the tabletop docking station or in the wall cradle). 29 Project Properties dialog . 29). TPDesign4 (v2.IR Emitters and Receivers tab Use the options in the IR Emitters and Receivers tab of the Project Properties dialog to view/edit port information associated with the active panel file for AMX 38KHz IR emitting and receiving. and up to two user-defined ports for IR emitting using custom IR files (FIG. and the MVP-7500/8400 and MVP-8400i have AMX and User-defined IR emitters as well as a cradle sensor (see below).Use these fields to specify the Channel port/code assignments for the on-board motion sensor.IR Emitters and Receivers tab The NXD/T-CV7 have AMX IR receivers. Motion Sensor . FIG.TPD4 Project Files (*. Project Properties dialog .

or re-confirm the password. 2. Additional User IR Emitters (MVP-5220 & MVP-5200i) .see FIG. Note that if a read-only file is opened without using the password. Click the down-arrow next to Protection to select a level of password protection from the drop-down list (either read-only. 30). The password is not required to open and view the file. Non-numeric values will be rejected and the value reset to zero. Applying changes made to the grid control will set the project's "dirty" flag. 4.TPD4 Project Files (*.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for user-defined IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for AMX IR receiving for NXD/T-CV7 and NXD/TCV10 panels. it cannot be saved under a new file name. prompting the user to enter the correct password to open the file. in which case you'll need to re-enter the password. Enter the password in the Password text field. Applying Password Protection to Your Project File TPD4 supports two levels of password protection for Project (. locked or none . If the password is not entered correctly. Modifying values in the grid control will activate the Apply button as appropriate. AMX IR Receivers (CV7 and CV10s only) . FIG.Password settings (Project Information tab.These options allow you to specify the IR Channel port (either 38KHz or 455KHZ) to be used for standard AMX IR emitting for MVP-7500 and MVP-8400 panels. 40 TPDesign4 (v2.TP4) The options in this tab include: AMX IR Emitters (MVPs only) . To apply password protection to the open Project file: 1.the next time the panel file is selected to open. 5.the next time this Project file is opened. 30 Project Properties dialog .These options allow you to use up to 8 IR Emitters with the panel. prompting the user to enter the correct password in order to gain write access to the file. a "Passwords do not match" message box is displayed. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. or both. As with the original two user IR ports. Values in the Port column cannot be edited. The edit field will only accept integer values ranging from zero to 100 (consistent with other port values). The User IR Emitters table displays a grid of user IR ports and their respective values in two columns. If the passwords don't match. Passwords can be from 1 to 259 characters in length. The value associated with each port can be modified in-place. the file will not be opened at all.) 3. Locked . The default value for each port is zero (not used). Re-type the password in the Confirm field. the Enter Access Password dialog appears. Click Apply to save the changes and apply the specified password to the Project file.11 or higher) . User IR Emitters (MVPs only) . Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog .TP4) files: Read-only . These protection options are not Windows file attributes. all port values entered will be validated against other existing IR emitter or receiver port values to ensure that all non-zero IR port values are unique. and are only relevant within the context of the TPD4 application.Project Information tab.

If you select more than one popup page. 31 Project Properties dialog . The selected popup page is indicated in the Power up popups field. 32). 32 Project Properties dialog . In the Panel Setup Information tab.Power-up popups settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. To display multiple popups over the Power up page.TPD4 Project Files (*. 31). 2. Select the page that you want to be used as the Power-up page from this list (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. repeat steps 2 and 3 to select another popup. 2. Select a popup page that you want to be displayed over the Power-up page from this list and click OK. In the Panel Setup Information tab. The popup at the top of the list is the first to be displayed.TP4) Setting a Power Up Page Use the Power-up page option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is turned on: 1. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. click the down arrow next to the Power up page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project. you can specify the display order via the up/down arrow buttons below the Power up popups field. FIG. 3.Power-up page settings (IR Emitters and Receivers tab) Setting Power Up Popup Pages Use the Power-up popups option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify one or more popup pages in your project to be displayed over the Power up page when the panel is turned on: 1.11 or higher) 41 . 4. presenting a list of all popup pages in the active Project (FIG. FIG. click the green Plus sign icon below the Power up popups field to invoke the Add Power Up Popup dialog.

Select the page that you want the panel to flip to when the panel is inactive for the amount of time specified on the panel. 2. Setting an Inactive Page Flip Use the Inactive Page Flip option in the Panel Setup Information tab of the Project Properties dialog to specify a particular page in your project to be displayed when the panel is inactive for a specified period of time: 1.TPD4 Project Files (*. Select File > Project Properties to open the Project Properties dialog. click the down arrow next to the Inactivity Page field to display a list of all of the pages in this project (FIG.TP4) To remove a popup from the Power up popups list. You can use the Inactivity Page Flip option to create a "screen-saver" for the panel as part of your project. In the Panel Setup Information tab. 33).Inactivity Page settings (Panel Setup Information tab) 3.11 or higher) . 5. 42 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. Click Apply to apply this change. click the Remove Popup (X) button below the Power up popups field. 33 Project Properties dialog .

and of course they can live outside of any group at the same level as the group folders (see Popup Pages for additional information). These folders represent Popup Page Groups. and the presence of a Popup Page in one of these folders indicates that the particular Popup Page belongs to that group. 34 Workspace Navigator .Pages Tab Click the Pages tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the pages/popup pages contained within each open Project. The Workspace Window contains two tabs: Pages and Function Maps (FIG. Inside the Popup Page folder you may also see additional folders. Click the + symbol next to the folders. Right-click anywhere within the Pages tab to access the Workspace Navigator context menu.all tabs Workspace Window . each one with a different colored panel icon: Note that each Project folder contains two folders: Pages and Popup Pages. one for Pages and one for Popup Pages.11 or higher) 43 . or double-click on the folders to view the pages and popup pages they contain. 34): FIG. In the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator you will see that there are two panel level folders. Each open Project is represented by a folder. There are several actions that you can do simply by selecting an item in the tree and choosing the appropriate command or toolbar button: Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window Renaming Pages via the Workspace Window Drag and Drop Support TPDesign4 (v2. Use the Workspace Navigator to view/open and rename panel pages.TPD4 Project Files (*. in the Workspace Navigator. and to view/edit the function codes associated with each page. Popup Pages can belong to only one group at a time.TP4) Using the Workspace Window The Workspace Window is used to open the pages / popup pages in the file (establishing edit focus).

The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. Level codes. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file.TP4) Workspace Window.Function Maps Tab Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Window) to view the Function Code Map. 35 Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window 44 TPDesign4 (v2. and within Port by Code.Pages tab (FIG. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Window. Opening Pages/Popup Pages Via the Workspace Window You can open a page or popup page in the active Project by double-clicking on the Page or Popup Page in the Workspace Window . This list is sorted by Port. Address codes.11 or higher) . FIG.TPD4 Project Files (*. 35).

and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. or the Page itself). With an item selected. Properties Window . When you release the mouse button. you can either set the item manually. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. TPDesign4 (v2. select from a drop-down menu.in this case. Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties window. General buttons. the value is copied to the new location.General Tab Click the General tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to set/edit general properties for all button types. Programming and States (FIG. Properties from the Properties window can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. FIG. and the original value is left unchanged. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. or both. popup page and button properties.TPD4 Project Files (*. 36). 36 Properties Window To edit any of the listed button properties. Depending on the item selected. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog.TP4) Using the Properties Window The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. The General tab contains a table that lists the button properties for the selected button type . The Properties Window contains three tabs: General.11 or higher) 45 . and drag it to another field.

and there are a few key points to keep in mind in doing so: Use the Paste Controls dialog to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. with a few limitations: Opening Multiple Projects Simultaneously Each project page has its own tab along the bottom of the Design View window (known as MDI Page Tabs). Properties Control . This a powerful tool. only the most recently opened 15 pages will remain open (the others will be automatically closed). popup page or button you want to retain in the target project. This information is displayed in a table format. Give some thought to which elements of the page. similar to the General tab. popup pages and buttons across projects to save time and effort.TPD4 Project Files (*. This information is displayed in a table format. When this option is enabled. popup pages and buttons. 37). toggled or modified via the MDI tabs context menu (rightclick inside any of the tabs). All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). Copying/Pasting Across Projects TPD4 allows you to copy and paste pages. If you open more than 15 pages. You can copy/paste pages.TP4) Properties Control . The page tabs normally appear along the bottom edge of the Design View window area.States Tab Click the States tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit the state information for each state associated with the selected button.11 or higher) . This can obviously be a major time saver. FIG. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the page. The State tab contains a table that lists the properties for each state for the selected button. 37 Paste Controls dialog 46 TPDesign4 (v2. Page Flip Options. a tab is displayed for each open page. but can be moved. including all of their various attributes across projects. popup page or buttons are pasted into a separate project (FIG. Use the View > MDI Page Tabs option to toggle the page tabs. Channel and Level codes). 0.Programming Tab Click the Programming tab (at the top of the Properties Window) to view/edit programming-related information for the selected button. similar to the General tab. TPD4 will display up to a maximum of 15 page tabs. Working With Multiple Projects TPD4 supports working on multiple projects simultaneously.

this process will not have to be performed again. in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). Retain slot references and Retain sound references are all selected in the Paste Controls dialog). However. A description and image of the selected panel is displayed. and Paste (use Ctrl+V. icons and sounds that came over with the pasted buttons are available in the Resource Manager for the target project. Click Cancel to abort the file open command. Click to select the source page or popup page (the one that you want to copy to another project). If you copy/paste a page or popup page containing buttons. Click Next to proceed. 3. Step 2 of 3 (View Warnings and Substitute Fonts): The TPD Conversion Wizard . Once the buttons are pasted into the target project. Click the down arrows next to Panel Type and Resolution to specify the target G4 panel for the project file. then save the file. Channel and Level codes). You don't have to actually open a page to copy it: simply select the desired page with a single click in the Workspace Navigator window and copy the page.TP4) When you copy/paste across projects. once the conversion process is applied. TPI-PRO. Edit > Paste.Warnings & Font Substitution (Step 2 of 3) dialog in the wizard contains two read-only text fields: The Pre-Conversion Warnings list box alerts you to any possible conflicts that will exist in the selected file. select the TPD project file that you want to convert (use the browse button to navigate to the desired file. Open the Paste Control Options dialog (Button > Paste Controls) to specify wether to retain Function Codes (Address. the buttons are copied along with the page. For example. the Paste toolbar button. the Copy toolbar button (). popup page or button (assuming that Retain image references. you can specify the target resolution for the project. for use with G4 panels. prompting you to continue with the migration process. In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). if the target panel/resolution differs from the original target of the TPDesign3 file. Page Flip Options. 2. 2. Popup Pages and Buttons Across Projects: 1. Step 1 of 3 (Select Source and Destination): In the TPD Conversion Wizard . Click Yes to continue.11 or higher) 47 . you will see a Pre-Conversion warning TPDesign4 (v2. The TPD Conversion Wizard steps you through the conversion process in three dialogs: 1. c. TPI-PRO-DVI). Copying/Pasting Pages. and Images/Slots/Sounds when the copied buttons are pasted into a page in a separate project. Select File > Save As Different Panel Type to launch the TPD Conversion Wizard. a. or select Copy from the Workspace Navigator context window). the Project Migration dialog appears. If you selected a panel that supports multiple resolutions (i. icons and/or sounds. and Copy (use Ctrl+C. Using the TPD Conversion Wizard TPDesign4 includes a TPD Conversion Wizard tool that makes it easy to convert your existing TPDesign3 files for use with TPDesign4. via the Open dialog). project files that were created in TPDesign3 must be converted in order to be compatible with TPDesign4. if the selected pages. popup pages and/or buttons contain bitmaps. those elements are copied into the target project along with the page. b. Once the migration process is complete and the project file has been saved. Converting TPD3 files to TPD4 TPDesign4 is backward-compatible with TPDesign3.TPD4 Project Files (*.e. or select Paste from the Workspace Navigator context window). Pages and Popup pages are automatically pasted into the correct folders. click to select the target project (the one that you want to paste the page or popup page into). Edit > Copy.Select a Source & Destination (Step 1 of 3) dialog. NXP-TPI4. Project Migration (From Previous Versions of TPDesign4) If a TP4 project file created with a previous version of TPD4 is opened (File > Open). the bitmaps.

Final Step dialog. like minor shifts in shape and size on some buttons. 3.Finish (Step 3 of 3) dialog lists the selected file. the original panel/resolution association. When the TPD file is converted and opened in TPD4. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. For each unmatched font listed. The Errors and Warnings reports are displayed in the Errors and Warnings Report dialog. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. The conversion wizard handles most of these issues for you automatically. R-4 Remote Controller Projects AMX R-4 Remote Controllers feature a color LCD touch screen that can be programmed and customized like any other touch panel type. The pushbuttons on R-4 remotes are treated in TPD4 the same as external pushbuttons on any other panel type. 4. Step 3 of 3 (Finish): The TPD Conversion Wizard . and the target panel/resolution. 2. Select R-4 as the Panel Type. Errors are issues that result in unexpected button borders. Click Finish to launch the conversion process and open the Errors and Warnings Report dialog where you can view/fix the resulting warnings. since TPD4 sorts the page and popup pages alphabetically. and can be customized as External Controls. When you convert a TPDesign3 project to a TPDesign4 project via the TPD Conversion Wizard. you can select a substitute font to use instead. The lower list box indicates any fonts that were specified in the original TPDesign3 file. the pages and popup pages may appear in a different order than they occurred in TPDesign3.e. with a few caveats: 1.Step Two dialog. but that are not available to TPDesign4 (i. Fill in the fields in this dialog as desired. TPDesign4 generates a report that lists errors and warnings relating to the conversion process. As with the panel resolution. Select an External Button Option from the drop-down list. 4. The bottom text box lists all Warnings encountered during the conversion process.TP4) message indicating that scaling will occur. 48 TPDesign4 (v2. Creating a TPD4 Project for R-4 Remote Controllers The process of creating a TPD4 project for R-4 remote controllers is essentially the same as for any other panel type. The display area on R-4 remotes is 240 X 320 (pixels). Warnings are issues that represent potential visual/formatting problems. 5.11 or higher) . Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . Click Filter Warnings to select which warning messages to display or suppress via the Filter Conversion Warnings dialog. Neither errors nor warnings will prevent the file from being compiled.TPD4 Project Files (*. 3.Step 1) dialog. but will probably require that the issues be resolved in order to have buttons and pages that look and function as expected. Select File > New to launch the New Project Wizard (New Project Wizard . Select Next to proceed to the New Project Wizard . are not currently installed on your PC). If all fonts used in the original file are still available. the message "No unmatched fonts" is displayed. usually because there are button or buttons in the project that are smaller than the minimum size of the selected border.

11 or higher) 49 .Unsupported Button Types Computer Control.Levels • Mesh: • Mesh: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: • Mesh Neighbor: Current TX Link Quality Current RX Link Quality Signal Strength Row 1 Signal Strength Row 2 Signal Strength Row 3 Signal Strength Row 4 Signal Strength Row 5 Signal Strength Row 6 Addresses R-4 Setup Codes . TakeNote.61.TP4) 6. TPD4 will display an error message if you attempt to add an unsupported button type in an R-4 project. R-4 Remote Devices . Add Buttons and Popup Pages Set General.Addresses • Time Display: • Date Display: Selected Format Selected Format These setup codes apply to R-4 firmware versions beginning with version 2. and Text Input buttons are not supported by R-4 remote controllers. However.TPD4 Project Files (*. Programming and States properties for Buttons Pages Popup Pages (keep in mind that R-4 projects work just like any other panel type) Configure the external pushbuttons. All button types continue to be available in the Drawing Toolbar. ready for you to: Set Page Properties and add Pages (note that the display area on R-4 remotes is 240x320 pixels). At this point. the initial page is opened in the Design View.10. R-4 Setup Codes Levels: R-4 Setup Codes . Select Finish to close the New Project Wizard. and are not displayed in the Properties Window (when an R-4 project is active). TPDesign4 (v2.

for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys.11 or higher) . Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions .for use with a standard MIO R-4.axi): R-4 External Buttons .e. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons.Default Channel Codes The default channel codes for R-4 external buttons match the corresponding G4 API values (defined in G4API. This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. Teletext keypad . These defaults will not affect any existing R-4 projects.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. Keypad with Transport Functions . the options include: Default Configuration . 50 TPDesign4 (v2. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons.TPD4 Project Files (*. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created.Default Channel Codes Button MENU Up Down Left Right Select EXIT INFO GUIDE LAST G4 API CONSTANT BTN_MENU_FUNC BTN_MENU_UP BTN_MENU_DN BTN_MENU_LT BTN_MENU_RT BTN_MENU_SELECT BTN_MENU_EXIT BTN_MENU_INFO BTN_MENU_GUIDE BTN_TUNER_PREV Code 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 105 235 The default values are read in when a new project is created.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys. "<none>". R-4 External Buttons . the External Button Options list is empty. i. As with the panel resolution.TP4) External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options.

The Resource Manager contains its own toolbar. organized into four tabs: Images: The Images tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project. external to the panel. Slots and Sounds for your project. one or more of the following options will be available: TPDesign4 (v2. 39). above the tabs (FIG. 38).WAV or . FIG. Slots: The Slots tab allows you to manage slot assignments for images and icons. Dynamic Images: The Dynamic Images tab allows you to manage images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. Dynamic Image or Sound files. 39 Resource Manager dialog .Working With The Resource Manager Working With The Resource Manager Overview Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. Sounds: The Sounds tab provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files (.11 or higher) 51 . TPD4 supports most popular image formats. FIG.MP3) to be used in your project. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option.Toolbar Depending on what you are doing with the listed Image. 38 Resource Manager dialog This dialog contains features and options that allow you to easily organize and manage Images.

just from this project. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is set to display any time a used resource is deleted. The files are not deleted from the hard drive. Import: Click to invoke the Open dialog. Note that if you copy or cut multiple files to clipboard memory.lists the files with file size and image dimension descriptions. Thumbnails . Use the Choose Directory dialog to pick the target directory. List Style: Click the down-arrow to open a drop-down list of the available display options for this tab: Small Icons . PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. with small file icons. If any of the files selected for deletion are used by the active project.lists the files in a single column. However. you must select at least the same number of slots (in the Slots tab) in order to paste all of the files. Click OK to rename the file. you can toggle the display of this dialog either by selecting the "Don't show me again" checkbox in the dialog. For this reason. the Resource(s) In Use dialog is displayed. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file. displays the current file name). List . when you paste the multiple images. or by selecting "When deleting resources in use" in the Application tab of the Preference dialog. with small file icons. which allows you to add dynamic images to your project. Undo/Redo: All actions in the Resource Manager can be undone and/or redone. Click to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. You can also cut/copy/paste within any of the tabs.Working With The Resource Manager Cut/Copy/Paste: Use these controls primarily to move images files to and from the Slots tab. containing two fields: Old Name (read-only. Details . the files are automatically converted to JPGs.displays a thumbnail image of each file.lists the files in columns. They work in the typical way. If you only select one slot. New: This option is available only on the Dynamic Images tab (and replaces the Import button that is on the other tabs). if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). as well as the Page(s) on which each file is used. and support selected multiple files. 52 TPDesign4 (v2. Export: Use this option to export one or more files to a specified directory. you'll only see the first one that you selected. and New Name (enter the new file name in this field). When images of any (supported) file type except PNG are imported into a project. Use this dialog to locate and select image and sound files to import into this tab. with a listing of all files targeted for deletion. Rename: Select an image file and click Rename to open the Rename dialog. Delete: Select one or more files and click Delete to delete them from the collection.11 or higher) . By default.

the image and sound files must first be imported into the Project via the Resource Manager dialog. it is available for selection to be applied to Pages. Once the image has been imported.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Images Resource Manager dialog . etc). Popup pages or Buttons (at the state level).e. Static Image Files Before you can apply images to buttons and pages in your Project. FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. The Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all image files. button state. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. page background.Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every image file that will be used in your project (for pages.Images tab The Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all image files to be used in your project (FIG. 40 Resource Manager dialog . Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. before they are applied in the project. 40). regardless of their context (i. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected image file(s) to slot(s).11 or higher) 53 . popup pages. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. buttons and icons). It is important to import all of your images to this tab first.

3. See the Working With Transparent Backgrounds section on page 106 for details. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing images that have the same file name as the image selected for import. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. if you import (or paste) a file that has the same name as a previously imported file (even if it has a different extension). Supported Image File Types TPD4 supports the following image file types: BMP (Windows bitmap) IFF (Interchange File Format) JPG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) PCT (Macintosh Pict) PCX (PC (Zsoft) Paintbrush) PNG (Portable Network Graphic) PSD (Photoshop) TGA (TrueVision Targa) WMF (Windows Meta File) EPS (Encapsulated Post Script) FPX (FlashPix) Notes: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. If this option is selected.Working With The Resource Manager Consider assigning Slot positions to those image files that you expect to use multiple times in the Project. Notes on importing image files: When images of any supported file type (except PNG) are imported into a project. This functionality works in an identical manner for sound files. Click the Import button to invoke the Open dialog. 54 TPDesign4 (v2. 5. Click Open to import the files to the Images tab. Locate and select the file(s) to import. 4. anytime an image with a duplicate file name is imported. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. TPD4 supports most popular image formats. Importing Image Files Into Your Project To import image files into your Project 1. the files are automatically converted to JPGs. Unless you are actually using transparency. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. 6. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. 2. For this reason. it will replace the original image on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. Open the Images tab. PNGs are not converted because they are already sufficiently compressed. TPD4 automatically adds the "copy of" prefix to the file.11 or higher) . only one accommodates transparency as a color: PNGs.

. If you import an image file that has already been imported to the Images tab. the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of.Working With The Resource Manager The largest image size supported on the panels is 1280x1024.11 or higher) 55 . Any image files that are imported to the project that are larger than 1280x1024 are automatically scaled down to fit this maximum resolution. so that the image will not be stretched.. This is true even if the second version of the image file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. TPDesign4 (v2.". Any scaling that occurs is proportional.

before they are applied in the project. 41): FIG.11 or higher) . popup pages.e. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all images in the project. The Dynamic Images tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all images.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Dynamic Images Resource Manager dialog . regardless of their context (i. buttons and icons). Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. button state. to replace the generic icon in this tab. It is important to import all of your dynamic images to this tab first. Get Live File: Click to retrieve a thumbnail of the live feed. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the image files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. 41 Resource Manager dialog .Dynamic Images tab The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project (FIG. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected Image file(s) to slot(s). etc). Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option.Dynamic Images tab Use this tab as a "library" of every dynamic image file that will be used in your project (for pages. page background. 56 TPDesign4 (v2.

3. Password: Enter Password if desired (optional). Refresh Rate: Leave the Refresh Rate set to zero (default). 41 on page 56). try to give the file a descriptive name so that it can be identified easily later. Adding Dynamic Image Files To Your Project To add dynamic image files to the Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog: 1. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. Refresh only at panel startup: Click to refresh this image only when the panel is powered up. The Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all dynamic image files to be used in your project.11 or higher) 57 . Host: Enter the Host Name (URL) or IP Address of the image source. FIG. Path: Enter the Path for the image source. 5. File: Enter the File name for the image source. To use dynamic images in your project you'll specify a URL. 42). Click OK to add the file to the Dynamic Images tab. Use the Scale Bitmap To Fit state property (Properties Control window . TPDesign4 (v2. Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). 2. Dynamic images can be applied to all button types except Computer Control and Text Area buttons. This can be any name you choose. User: Enter User name if desired (optional). Click the New button to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. 42 Create Dynamic Image dialog 4. or FTP. Dynamic images can be refreshed at specified regular intervals or via the Panel > Refresh Dynamic Images option. Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Images Dynamic Images are images that exist on an HTTP server or FTP server. rather than a directory path to an image file. This option is only displayed if the current panel type supports Dynamo Resource images (see the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6).States tab) to automatically scale (down only) the dynamic image to fit the button that it is being displayed on. Open the Dynamic Images tab (FIG. external to the panel. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for Dynamo Resource images only).

4. At this point. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string. 43). 3.Adding a Dynamic Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image to the Resource Manager: 1. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog. refer to the source image properties: a.jpg d.myspacecdn. 43 Example Element Properties dialog As indicated in the drop-down example above. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.myspacecdn.ac-images. we'll use "Photo 1". the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: c1. e.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field. In a web browser. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. To provide the other information required in this dialog.11 or higher) .com Path = images02/64 File = l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this photo: http://c1.myspacecdn. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. b. Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. but also protocol and path information as well.ac-images. it is not required as part of the Host.com/images02/64/l_7e3368c694a94bacbbadfeb84f491004. FIG. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Example . Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol.jpg The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: c.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.ac-images. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case. 58 TPDesign4 (v2. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog. go to the image that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. 2. 44): Name = Photo 1 Protocol = HTTP Host = c1. Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab.

Working With The Resource Manager FIG. 44 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog The Refresh Rate should be left to zero (default setting). Click OK to add this image as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager (FIG. f.11 or higher) 59 . When the Refresh Rate is set to zero. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. 45 Example Dynamic Image TPDesign4 (v2. the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available. 45). FIG. This option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted.

Working With The Resource Manager When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager. File: Enter the File name for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation. with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be accelerated. 46 Create Dynamic Image dialog .11 or higher). simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog (FIG. In the Dynamic Images tab. DynaMo™ Dynamic Images TPDesign4 (v2. In TPDesign4. these are referred to as Dynamo Resource images. Protocol: Select the communication protocol: HTTP (default). as opposed to Dynamic (static) or Dynamo (non-accelerated) images. Host: Enter the IP Address of the camera/video server. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. Password: Enter Password if required (this field is also optional). 60 TPDesign4 (v2. Select Panel > Resource Manager to open the Resource Manager dialog.11 or higher) . Path: Enter the Path for the image source provided in the camera or video server manufacturer's documentation (see the Network Path Information section on page 63). or FTP. 2. 46). Fill in the fields provided: Name: Enter a name for this dynamic image. click on New to open the Create Dynamic Image dialog. The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. Dynamo Resource images are essentially the same as standard Dynamo images with one key difference: the playback of Dynamo Resource images is accelerated to up to 30 frames-per-second. User: Enter User name if required (this field is optional).Dynamo Resource option Creating a DynaMo Image 1. See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. and a select number of AMX Touch Panels support "enhanced" or "accelerated" Dynamo images. FIG. they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image such as is shown in the example above Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. 3.

47). only one of them should be set as a Dynamo Resource image. which resembles the standard Dynamic Image icon but features a lightning bolt (FIG.) button b. select Bitmap to enable the Browse (.Working With The Resource Manager Refresh Rate: Refreshing resources will cause the button displaying that resource to refresh as well.FIG. FIG. While TPDesign4 will allow you to place more than one Dynamo Resource image on a page. select the dynamic image that you want to display on this button. c. which means that the resource is only downloaded once. as opposed to upon each visit to the page (as is the default).. it is important to note the following: If there are multiple Dynamic images displayed on a single page. leave the User and Password fields blank. 5. Select the DynaMo Dynamic Image that you want to apply to this button. simply select the Dynamo Resource option at the bottom of the Create Dynamic Image dialog. Some cameras/servers support more than one output resolution. The Dynamo Resource option is only displayed if the currently selected panel-type supports Accelerated Dynamo images (see AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images). that matches the output resolution of the camera/video server providing the dynamic image. The user must type either "Anonymous" or "Guest" to access the specified FTP site.. Click Browse to access the Select Resource dialog. the frame-rate on all Dynamo Resource images may be reduced as a result.Dynamo Resource option The User (name) and Password fields are typically used with FTP servers. and causes the dynamic image to refresh only upon restart of the panel. 48). To allow other users to access the files via FTP without password protection. 47 Create Dynamic Image dialog . Create a General button on which the DynaMo Dynamic Image will be displayed. In the States tab of the Properties window. Refresh only at panel startup: This option is only available if the Refresh Rate is set to zero. TPDesign4 (v2. Select one that fits your application requirements and interface design.11 or higher) 61 . Dynamic images that have the Dynamo Resource property set are displayed with a modified icon. Dynamo Resource: Click to specify this image as a Dynamo Resource (for accelerated DynaMo Dynamic images only . When working with Dynamo Resource images. Adding an Dynamo Resource Image to the Resource Manager The process of adding a Dynamo Resource image to the Resource Manager is identical to that of adding a standard Dynamo image. 4. In the Dynamic Images tab. with one exception: to specify that the dynamic image will be treated as an (accelerated) Dynamo Resource image. via the button's Bitmap properties: a. The default value is 0.

with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of 2x. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container. 2x . Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. Click here for a listing of all AMX touch panels that support Dynamo Resource Images. The Scale to Fit option for Dynamo Resource images differs from panels that do not support Dynamo Resource images in that the aspect ratio of the image is maintained. If the resulting image is larger than it's container. Any paste operation that causes a Dynamo Resource image to be imported into a target panel project that does not support Dynamo Resource images will cause the Scale Bitmap to Fit setting to be reset on the imported resource. Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from an OMAP panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration with a Scale Bitmap to Fit setting of Scale to Fit. 48 Dynamic Resource Image & Dynamic Image icons (Dynamic Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog) Scaling and Cropping of Dynamo Resource Images Dynamo Resource Images have specific scaling/cropping options available via the Scale Bitmap to Fit (State) property for any state that has a Dynamo Resource image assigned to the "Bitmap" property. popup or page. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). into an FPGA panel-type that supports Dynamo acceleration results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states. Copy/Paste Operations on Dynamo Resource Images Paste operations of a button with a Dynamo Resource image from a panel-type that supports Dynamo Resource images. and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. into a panel-type that doesn't support Dynamo Resource images results in the Scale Bitmap to Fit value being set to No in the pasted button for all states.The Dynamo Resource image is doubled in size.11 or higher) . The Scale Bitmap To Fit options presented here depend on the panel type selected: No .The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all. This is the default setting.This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Resource image to fit the container button. 62 TPDesign4 (v2. popup or page. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit .

An example of such browser is Mozilla FireFox. For Dynamo. In the case of streaming network cameras/servers. however. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 63 . you may need to consult product documentation. What follows are examples for some of most popular manufacturers. manufacturer's documentation and customer support are the most reliable ways of obtaining information on the device's communication protocol/syntax. many networked cameras/servers are accessed using a regular HTML browser. left click on the streaming image and select Copy Image Location. Depending on the camera/network video server type you are using. and the camera/ server is serving up an HTML page with a video window being a part of the page. contact manufacturer's technical support.mozilla. This can also help you fully utilize optional features available on that specific device. or if necessary. at points we have to work through the different ways manufacturers implement standards. however. Like with any other type of equipment AMX controls.Working With The Resource Manager Cameras and Servers With M-JPEG Streaming Output A number of leading manufacturers are offering a variety of equipment that provides Motion JPEG streaming output. Using the browser you can go to your network device's IP address. not the entire HTML page served by the camera/server by default. at times it can be difficult to get the needed information with respect to the protocol/syntax of a particular camera/server. You can download a free version of FireFox at www. However. In general. the panel needs to access only the M-JPEG stream.org. Below is a sample list of popular manufacturers and models: Motion JPEG Cameras and Servers Manufacturer Axis Network camera 205 Network Camera 2100 Network Camera 2120 Network Camera 2420 Network Camera Panasonic KX-HCM280 Color Pan Tilt Zoom KX-HCM10 Indoor Pan Tilt KX-HCM250 Wireless Pan Tilt KX-HCM230 Outdoor Pan Tilt Sony Trendnet Vivotek SCN-RZ30N Pan/Tilt/25x Zoom TV-IP301 IP2111 Network Camera IP2112 Network Camera VS2402 Video Server Network video server 241Q Video Server 4 Inputs 241S Video Server 1 Input Network Path Information While AMX strives to bring to the market innovative features such as support for Motion JPEG. For example. manufacturers are using somewhat different syntax for requesting Motion JPEG streams from their networked cameras and servers. One way to work around this is connecting to your networked camera or video server using an Internet browser that captures the location or path to the stream. what is being sent to the camera/server in the path is a CGI call that may have additional parameters based on the feature set of the camera/server and the syntax the manufacturer requires.

Example 2: Panasonic Manufacturer: Panasonic Model: BL-C10A (camera) Path: nphMotionJpeg?resolution=320x240&Quality=Standard 64 TPDesign4 (v2.Example 2: Panasonic FIG. 49). Each camera can also have a camera ID number but that is optional.Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings .Example 1: Axis Axis equipment supports a number of resolutions. 49 Dynamic Image Settings . just as a number of other features that can be indicated in the path (FIG. and therefore requires that the target resolution be indicated.Example 1: Axis Manufacturer: Axis Model: 2100 (camera) Path: axis-cgi/mjpg/video. 50 Dynamic Image Settings . FIG.11 or higher) .cgi?camera=&resolution=320x240 Dynamic Image Settings .

Adding a Streaming Webcam Image The following example steps you through the process of adding a dynamic image in the form of an online streaming webcam to the Resource Manager: 1. 52): TPDesign4 (v2.Example 3: Vivotek FIG. 2. 2. 4. 3. The default settings of "640x480" and "Highest Quality" should be OK. Right-click to view it's element properties (FIG. To provide the other information required in this dialog.jpg?cam=1&quality=3&size=2 Working With Trendnet IP Cameras To get a streaming image from the TV-IP301 Trendnet IP camera on to a dynamic image window of a touch panel: 1. Click New to invoke the Create Dynamic Image dialog. set the dynamic image properties to: Protocol: HTTP (default) Host: (the default IP of this camera is 192.11 or higher) 65 .Working With The Resource Manager Dynamic Image Settings . Open the Resource Manager to the Dynamic Images tab. 51 Dynamic Image Settings . Enter a descriptive name for this dynamic image in the Name field (in this example. go to the web cam that you want to add as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. Configure the camera for JPEG and 15fps. In TPD4. refer to the source image properties: a. b.168.1. In a web browser.Example 3: Vivotek Manufacturer: Vivotek Model: 2111 (camera) Path: cgi-bin/video.30) Path: goform File: video2 user & password are blank Refresh Rate: 1 (or more) DynaMo Dynamic Image Example . we'll use "Beach 1").

jpg 5.axiscam.jpg d. b. and paste it into the Host field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.Working With The Resource Manager FIG. Note that the Location entry consists of not only the Host address information.11 or higher) .cgi? File = camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. Verify that HTTP is selected as the Protocol. since no credentials are required by the Host to access the webcam in this case. The various types of information included in the Location string (as provided in the Element Properties dialog) must be broken up and entered into the appropriate fields in the Create Dynamic Image dialog in order for this dynamic image to work: a.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. but also protocol and path information as well. the host address information for this example is listed in the Location entry of the Element Properties dialog.jpg The User and Password fields are left blank. At this point in the Create Dynamic Image dialog: Host = coralsandsinn. the Host string contains Host address information as well as Path and File information: coralsandsinn. it is not required as part of the Host. and delete "HTTP://" from the pasted string.element properties As indicated above. At this point.axiscam. Here is the full string provided by the image source for this webcam: http://coralsandsinn. c. Cut the path and file information from the string and paste it into the Path field in the Create Dynamic Image dialog. e.cgi?camera=1&resolution=480x360&time=1228758918124&dummy=image. 52 Online webcam . Copy the address string from the Element Properties dialog.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image.net/axis-cgi/jpg/ image. Cut the file information from the Path string and paste it into the File field.net Path = axis-cgi/jpg/image. Since HTTP is already selected (by default) as the Protocol in the Create Dynamic Image dialog.axiscam. 66 TPDesign4 (v2.

they are initially indicated by an icon rather than a thumbnail image. TPDesign4 (v2. Click OK to add this webcam as a dynamic image to the Resource Manager. or click Get Live File to replace the icon with a thumbnail image. Double-click on any Dynamic image icon. FIG. to allow the image to update automatically based on the source's refresh rate. The Refresh Only at Panel Startup option directs the panel to refresh this image only when the panel is rebooted. Click Dynamo Resource to use this Dynamic Image as an (accelerated) DynaMo Dynamic Image. 53 Example Create Dynamic Image dialog f. When the Refresh Rate is set to zero. When Dynamic images are added to the Resource Manager.11 or higher) 67 . the Refresh Only at Panel Startup option is available.Working With The Resource Manager The Refresh Rate should be left to zero.

Slots tab Where the Images and Sounds tabs contain "libraries" of all Image and Sound files (even if they have not been assigned to a slot). 68 TPDesign4 (v2. TPD4 supports up to 500 icon slot assignments. The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog lists all Icon Slot assignments currently defined in the Project. the Slot tab lists only those image and sound files that are currently assigned to a slot. Resource Manager dialog . Each project has 2000 slots available. Once an image or sound file has been assigned a slot. Once an image file is imported into the Project (via the Resource Manager). it is considered to be an Icon. FIG. 54).11 or higher) . 54 Resource Manager dialog . it is available for selection as an icon through the Properties Control Window (States tab). Popup Pages or Buttons in the Project. Once the image file is assigned to a Slot. popup pages and/or buttons as Icons.Slots tab The Slots tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to preview and manage all image and sound files that are being used in your project (FIG.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Slots TPD4 utilizes the concept of Slots for adding Icons to Pages. it can be assigned to a Slot position. Once a Image or Sound has been assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. All image and sound files must be assigned to a slot before they can applied to pages. it can be used as an Icon in your Project.

4. For example. Select one or more files (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. click to select the slot to which you want to apply the image file and click Assign (in the Slots tab). If there are no images or sounds already assigned to slots (the Slots tab is empty). only the first five files will be assigned. Icons). depending on the type of file you are adding. The files will be pasted consecutively. Ctrl + click to select two files.Working With The Resource Manager If you don't intend to use a image or sound file as an Icon. click the slot where you want to begin pasting the set of images. 2. The selected file is moved to the selected slot. and click Duplicate. TPDesign4 (v2. select ten slots before assigning the files. If you are assigning multiple files to multiple slots. Assigning Images and Sounds to Slot Positions To assign image files. Select Overwrite to automatically overwrite any pre-existing file assignments in the affected slots. Note that the Overwrite and Insert options affect how the Move option works. Assign: This command assigns the selected Image or Sound file(s) to slot(s). there is no need to assign it to a slot (see Bitmaps vs. Open the Images. the other slot assignments are shifted to accommodate the new assignments. When pasting multiple image files to the Slots tab. In this case. and clicked Assign to Slot (in the Images tab). However. dynamic images or sound files to slot positions for use in the Project: 1. Select Insert to insert the files without overwriting anything. you can click Cancel to cancel the process before you set the slot assignment. If there are already some slot assignments present (in the Slots tab). the program limits you to 2000 slots per panel. you'll have to more careful about how you choose to assign the files.11 or higher) 69 . in the order in which they were selected. By default. then select the slot that you want to target for the duplicated file. if you selected ten files to assign to slots. The toolbar button in this tab contains several command options: Select All: Click to select all slots (1-2000). Cancel: If have selected one or more images. then click on the target slot for the selected file and click Move. Click Assign To Slot. The two file / slot assignments are swapped. If you select just one slot. This open the Slots tab (FIG. If you selected multiple files. First select a file / slot assignment. Use the Overwrite and Insert radio buttons to select a preference for assigning files to slot(s) with previous file assignments. The selected file is duplicated in the targeted slot. only the first file selected will be assigned. 3. Move: Use this option to move a slot assignment. If you select five slots. If you are assigning a single file to a slot with a pre-existing file assignment. click Assign (in the Slots tab) to assign the file to slot 1. Duplicate: Use this option to duplicate a selected file to another slot. Dynamic Images or Sounds tab. First select the file that you want to duplicate. they will be assigned in the order in which they were selected. Swap: Use this option to swap two file / slot assignments. you must select the same number of slots as the number of images copied. 54 on page 68). you can use up to 9900 slots per panel if necessary by changing the maximum number of slots per panel. and click Swap. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. or Shift + click to select a range of files).

For example. For example. JPGs. you could place a static icon over an animated bitmap or color transition effect. Icons allow for complex graphics and animations. and place an Icon on top of the Bitmap. the image is still available as a Bitmap (and remains in any other slot it is assigned to). Text is always drawn last. PSDs and BMPs (among others) are supported Bitmap file types. Bitmaps that have been imported into the Project are listed in the Images tab of the Resource Manager. on top of the icon. bitmap or video fill background. and they are always placed in a layer beneath any Icons. Any supported image file can be made to be an icon. For example. and icons as the foreground graphic image. you could create a button with a Bitmap image. See Z-Order for details.BMP files). Think of bitmaps as the background button graphic. and are always appear on top of the Bitmap layer. when a Bitmap (in the Images tab of the Resource Manager) is deleted. 70 TPDesign4 (v2. and assigned slot numbers (via the Resource Manager dialog). including all slots to which it was assigned. There are important differences in the way each type is treated: Bitmaps: The term Bitmap is a generic term that describes any pixel-based image file. Popup Pages and Buttons. Icons are drawn after Bitmaps. Icons can also be put into motion via the Slot Position tweener (accessible via the Tweeners sub-menu). which may also use Icons (as well as text) in addition to the background image (see Z-Order for details). Bitmaps cannot. so they are always drawn on top of a bitmap image. Having an image assigned to a slot allows you to reference the same image as either a Bitmap or an Icon. that image is removed from the entire project. a Bitmap can be any supported image type (not limited to . however. Use icons as button graphics that can be placed "on top" of a color fill. You can think of Bitmaps as the background image used on Pages. PNGs. In TPD4. Icons TPD4 uses two concepts of image files: Bitmaps and Icons. In TPD4. but an image cannot also be referenced as an Icon until it is assigned to a slot in the Resource Manager. When an image's slot position assignment is deleted from the Project. simply by assigning it to a slot position. Icons: The term Icon refers to any image file that has been imported into the Project and assigned to a Slot position in the Resource Manager. Bitmaps vs.Working With The Resource Manager Working With Icons Icons are bitmap images that have imported into the project. The important thing to understand about Bitmaps in the context of TPD4 buttons is that they are drawn first. Icons occupy slots in the Resource Manager. icons exist before bitmaps in the Z-Order. Icons are different than Bitmaps in several ways: All imported images are considered to be Bitmaps. Icon Slot Assignments that have been specified in the Project are listed in the Slots tab of the Resource Manager.11 or higher) .

MP3 files. 55 Resource Manager dialog . It is important to import all of your sound files to this tab first. Sort (ascending / descending): Click to sort the sound files either in ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order. so that you can maintain an organized profile of all sound files in the project. Edit: Click to edit the file name of the selected item. TPDesign4 (v2. Use this tab as a "library" of every sound file that will be used in your project (for pages. before they are applied in the project. button state. The Slots tab provides the following command buttons: Select All: Click to select all sound files. Assign To Slot: Click to assign the selected sound file(s) to slot(s).Sounds tab The Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog provides a convenient way to import and preview all sound files to be used in your project (FIG. 55): FIG.WAV and .Working With The Resource Manager Working With Sounds Resource Manager dialog . regardless of their context (i. etc). popup pages.11 or higher) 71 . buttons and icons).e.Sounds tab TPD4 supports . page flip.

the filename is changed to include the prefix "Copy of. 6. 56 Choose Directory dialog 5. Click the Overwrite resources with duplicate names checkbox to automatically overwrite any existing sound files that have the same file name as the file selected for import. If you import an sound file that has already been imported to the Sounds tab. 6. The program prompts you when the export is finished. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog. If MP3 files are encoded correctly. 2. 4. 5. Select one or more files to export (Ctrl + click to select multiple files individually. There are many freeware programs available to encode WAV files into MP3's. or Shift + click to select a range of files). If this option is selected. it will replace the original file on every button or page that referenced that file name in the Project. Open the Sounds tab. Click the Export button. 4.11 or higher) . Exporting Image and Sound Files From Your Project To a Specified Directory To export image (including dynamic images) and sound files from Resource Manager dialog to a specified directory: 1.. Click OK.". anytime a sound file with a duplicate file name is imported. Click Open to import the files to the Sounds tab. FIG. you should experience very little (if any) difference in sound quality. Importing Sound Files To Your Project To import sound files to the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog (FIG. The primary difference between the two is that MP3 represents a compressed version of a WAV file. Open the appropriate tab for the type of file you want to export (Images. 3.. This opens the Choose Directory dialog (FIG. 3. This invokes the Open dialog. 72 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Slots or Sounds). Locate and select the file(s) to import. Use the Browse button to locate a target directory for the files. 55 on page 71): 1. This is true even if the second version of the sound file you have imported is of a different file type with a different extension. Dynamic Images. Click the Import button. Select Panel > Resource Manager (or click the toolbar button) to open the Resource Manager dialog.Working With The Resource Manager Supported Sound File Types TPD4 supports WAV and MP3 sound formats. 56).

the Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files section on page 272 and the Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program section on page 273 for more information. 2. Open the Sounds tab of the Resource Manager dialog. TPDesign4 (v2.g. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for image files.Working With The Resource Manager Editing Image and Sound Files Using External Programs TPD4 supports the use of external programs for editing image and/or sound files used in your project. Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to add external image and sound editing programs. See the Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files section on page 272. undo/redo.) will cause the link between TPD4 and the external application to be broken. Select the sound file that you want to edit. 3. Any action taken in TPD4 that would change the state of the image or sound file being edited (e. 3. you can access it via the Edit button in the Images and Sounds tabs of the Resource Manager dialog. rename.. Once you have indicated a program to be used as the default editor. Editing Sound Files 1. and control is returned to TPD4. Open the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog. etc. You must first associate one or more external editing programs with Image files. Any subsequent changes made in the external editor will not be reflected nor applied. and another for Sound files. Click the Edit button to launch the external program specified as the default editor for sound files. Any saved changes to the resource made in the external editor will be immediately reflected in TPD4. When the edit session begins. See the Program Preferences section on page 265 for details. 2. the image or sound file is opened in the default editing program. Select the image file that you want to edit. Editing Image Files 1. and specify the default editors.11 or higher) 73 . delete.

Working With The Resource Manager 74 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

11 or higher) 75 . 57. Each page must be uniquely named within its respective panel file in order to be accepted by the program. You can select the name for the page.Working With Pages Working With Pages Overview Pages are not only containers for buttons. You may place text directly on a page outside the context of a button. 58 Add Page dialog TPDesign4 (v2. 58). and a font for any text specified (including the font size and settings). FIG. Pages cannot have borders and possess only one state. Double-click on any page contained in any open project to set it as the active project. but can also have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. In FIG. Creating a New Page 1. The maximum number of pages in a panel file = 500.see the Creating a Page Flip section on page 108. Select Panel > Add Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Page dialog (FIG. "TPI-PRO-DVI test" is the active project. the page background color. all name collision checks in the program are case insensitive. 57 Workspace Window (indicating the active Project & Page) Page Flips (which provide the ability to "flip" from one page to another via a button press) are a button-oriented function . If you change any of these properties (except the name) your changes will be saved and future page creations will carry those selections forward. the text color for text applied directly to the page. The active project/page is indicated in the Workspace Window by a green wedge to the left of the panel and page icons. and "Page 1" is the active page in the project: FIG.

select from a drop-down menu... click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.) next to Text to open the Colors dialog. separated into three tabs (General. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the window beneath these fields. The new page will be appear in the Workspace Navigator in the Pages folder. Setting General Properties: Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Window to set/edit page properties.11 or higher) . With the Page selected. select from a drop-down menu. you can either set the item manually. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index.Working With Pages 2. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. The General tab contains a table that lists the page properties for the active page. The Programming tab contains a table that lists the programming properties for the active page. The following programming properties are supported at the page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page state properties. Enter a descriptive name for the new page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters). Depending on the item selected. To edit any of the listed properties. The State tab contains a table that lists the page state properties for the active page. In most cases. The following general properties are supported at the page level: Name Description Setting Programming Properties: Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit page programming properties. or both. under the project to which the page was added (as the active page). 3. or both. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Set the Page Background color: a. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. To edit any of the listed properties. you can either set the item manually. Click the browse button (.) next to Page Background to open the Colors dialog.. Set the Font Name and Size. 76 TPDesign4 (v2. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Single-click to select a new color from the list. you can either set the item manually. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. 4. select from a drop-down menu. Programming and States).. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Single-click to select a new color from the list. or both. Setting Page Properties Panel Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Window. To set Page-level properties. click on the Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). Depending on the item selected. 5. 6. Click OK to add the new page to the active project. the Properties Window displays the properties available for the Page. b. Depending on the item selected. To edit any of the listed properties. Click the browse button (. b. Set the Page Text color (for text applied directly to the page): a.

59).Working With Pages The following state properties are supported at the page level: Draw Order Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Video Fill Video Touch Pass-Thru Bitmap Bitmap Justification Icon Slot Icon Justification Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Sound Renaming a Page To rename any Page in the active project. TPDesign4 (v2. 59 Renaming a Page (via the Workspace Window) Adding a Fill Color to a Page 1. and select the color that you want to apply to the page..) button (FIG. FIG.11 or higher) 77 .Fill Color field 3. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. FIG. 4. 60 States tab of the Properties Control window . 60).Pages tab). In the States tab of the Properties Window. Select the page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . simply click on a Page entry in the Workspace Window and type directly into the text field (FIG. 2.. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (.

click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (.Bitmap field 3. FIG. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page.. To scale an image to fit a target Page. to serve as the background image. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the page (FIG..Pages tab).Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. 61). Select the page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. where you can select the desired bitmap. 5. FIG. 78 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Page in your project. To check the size of the Pages in your project. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. 4. 1. open the image in any graphics editor program. 61 States tab of the Properties Control window . 62 States tab of the Properties Control window . TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Page. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog.11 or higher) . Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. 62). 2. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). In the States tab of the Properties Window.) button (FIG.

unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (. If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.. Select the page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace .11 or higher) 79 . FIG. 1..Pages tab). Select the page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace . the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the page (FIG. 65). and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). FIG. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Page.Working With Pages Adding an Icon to a Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Page in your project.) button (FIG. 64). you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. click on the Text field to enable the browse (. FIG. where you can select the desired icon.Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog. 65 States tab of the Properties Control window . 63). TPDesign4 (v2. you can display text directly on a Page in your project. 63 States tab of the Properties Control window . Adding Text to a Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. Alternatively. 5. You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. 1.. Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state). 2.Icon Slot field 3.) button (FIG. 64 States tab of the Properties Control window . 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.Pages tab). 4.. you can type directly into the Text field. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image.

depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Page. 69 States tab of the Properties Control window . any text that won't fit on the selected Page may not be visible.Font field Select the desired font (in the Font dialog).Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text.. 4. FIG. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (. 66).Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Page text.Working With Pages Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. if any exists. 68 States tab of the Properties Control window .) button (FIG. Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the page (FIG.. FIG.11 or higher) . FIG.) button (FIG. 5.Word Wrap field If you select No. 3. 80 TPDesign4 (v2...FIG. 67 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click Word Wrap. 6. 68). 69). 67). FIG. and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Page (Yes or No . 66 States tab of the Properties Control window . Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.

Pasting Pages You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied page onto: (1) an active Design View window (2) the panel name in the Workspace Navigator (3) the folder named Pages Pasting a page onto the Popup Pages folder (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.States Tab. and select Edit > Delete. Copying/Pasting Pages Copying Pages In the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). therefore. 70 States tab of the Properties Control window . You can copy a page either by selecting a Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. deleting the last remaining page is not allowed. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. Deleting Pages From a Project To delete a page from the active project. at the top most level are Panel Names. The program will prompt you to verify the page deletion first. TPDesign4 (v2. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1.Working With Pages Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. select the page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). and a Popup Pages folder (containing Popup pages). 70): FIG. Select (or a create) a Page in your project.11 or higher) 81 . In the Properties Control window . 2. Popup Page or Button. All panels must include at least one page. Immediately below the panel names is a Pages folder (containing Pages). click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar).Video Fill field 3.

3. PNG or BMP) for the resulting image files from the File Format dropdown. with the button's current display state. Select Panel > Export Page Images to open the Export Page Images dialog (FIG. use $P to insert the Panel name and $p to insert the Page name into the exported file's name. If this option is not selected. Specify a template for the resulting filenames in the Filename Template field. By default. only the Page underneath any currently viewed Popup Pages will be exported.. this option is disabled. the template is set to include the Panel file name and the Page name into the generated image's file name. 5. only the Page underneath any currently displayed function codes will be exported. The file extension is automatically. based on the File Format selection. Use the browse button (. By default.. you can select the desired level of image compression 7.Working With Pages Exporting Pages as Image Files Use the options in the Export Page Images dialog to export one or Pages in the current Project as image files: 1. this option is enabled. it will export the buttons in the (default) Off state. 8. By default. 82 TPDesign4 (v2. As described on the dialog.) to navigate to a target directory via the Browse For Folder dialog. Select Export information overlay to include any function code information this is currently being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. Select a image file type (JPG. Select Export current display state for buttons to capture the Pages as they are currently displayed in the Design View. Select Export popup pages shown on pages to include any Popup Pages that are being displayed on the Design View at the time of selection in the exported Page image file. Specify a target directory for the exported image files in the Export Directory field. If this option is not selected. this option is enabled. Use the checkboxes in the Pages and Popups lists to select which Pages and Popup Pages to export. The default setting is 100% (no scaling). 71 Export Page Images dialog 2. 71). 6. 9. By default. 4. Use the Scale% up and down arrows indicate a percentage to down-scale the exported images. FIG. If JPG is selected.11 or higher) . If this option is not selected.

the File > Print and File > Print Preview options invoke a message alerting you to install a printer. as they will appear when printed.11 or higher) 83 . in the Print Preview window (FIG.Working With Pages Printing Pages Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages and popup pages in the active project. The options in the Print Preview window toolbar include: Print: Prints the current page view Next Page: Displays the next page of the selected file Prev Page: Displays the previous page of the selected file One Page/Two Page: Toggles the page view to one or two pages. 72 Print Preview window Each page and popup page in the project is printed one per page. FIG. 72). Zoom In: Zooms in on the page view Zoom Out: Zooms out from the page view Close: Closes the Print Preview window If you don't have a printer installed on your PC. TPDesign4 (v2. This option is enabled only if the active file is longer than one page.

Working With Pages 84 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

73). Once the Popup is displayed on the page. Use the Position fields when you need to achieve exact positioning. top. Beyond these properties popup pages have many typically button specific properties. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu. Refer to the Using the Popup Draw Tool section on page 87 for details. can be assigned a border style and border color.0) for the desired placement of the popup page when it displayed on the panel. To position the Popup manually. 4.11 or higher) 85 . unlike pages. Select Panel > Add Popup Page (or click the toolbar icon) to open the Add Popup Page dialog (FIG.Working With Popup Pages Working With Popup Pages Overview Popup pages are similar to pages in some respects as they are a container for buttons. as well as left. width or height values. which allows you to quickly create new popup pages. The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width. 1. Enter a descriptive name for the new popup page in the Name field (avoid using inappropriate file name characters . TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. Popup pages. In the Position fields. Creating a Popup Page TPD4 features the Popup Draw tool. Click the down-arrow to open the Border Style drop-down menu. You must first select a Popup Page (in the Workspace window) in order to enable the Show Popup Page option in the Page menu. You can also set it's position manually by dragging it wherever you want it to appear. 73 Add Popup Page dialog 2. enter Left and Top coordinates (in pixels. and click to select the desired border style for the popup page. as well as some special properties that apply only to popup pages. they may have up to one address port / address code and up to one channel port / channel code combination. you can click and drag to position it manually.see the Inappropriate File Name Characters section on page 29). relative to the upper-left corner of the page which is 0. in a way that is similar to drawing new buttons. and contain only one state. 3.

The minimum size for popup pages is 15 pixels in height or width.Working With Popup Pages Note that once you specify the position of the Popup on the page. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option). 74). 74 Colors dialog b. b. Single-click to select a new color from the list. Set the Border color: a. any time you display the Popup (via the Page > Show Popup Pages option).11 or higher) . you can click and drag the red handles on the Popup to resize it manually. 8. where you can select the Popup Page that you want to display on the page.. Single-click to select a new color from the list. regardless of the page that you display on. 6.. You can also set the dimensions manually by dragging the sizing handles on the Popup.. the Popup will always appear in the position specified. the Popup will retain the dimensions specified. Click the browse button (... Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the right side of the dialog. Note that once you resize the Popup on the page. Click the browse button (.) next to Text Color to open the Colors dialog. b. regardless of the page that you display on. Once the Popup is displayed on the page. To resize the Popup manually. Set the Page Background color: a. enter the desired Width and Height dimensions (in pixels) for the popup window. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Set the Text color (for text applied directly to the popup page): a. FIG.) next to Fill Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog (FIG. This option opens the Select Popup Pages to Show dialog. 86 TPDesign4 (v2. you must first enable the Show Popup Pages option in the Page menu.) next to Border Color (in the States tab) to open the Colors dialog. Note the current and new color selections are shown together for comparison on the left side of the dialog. Popup Pages may be created in any size beyond the minimum and up to the maximum size of the panel. In the Size fields. Click the browse button (. 5. Single-click to select a new color from the list.. 7.

TPDesign4 (v2. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. In most cases. The minimum popup page size is 15 pixels in height or width. FIG. and the result is the same as through standard means: 1. drag to draw the popup page to the desired size and shape. Using the Popup Draw Tool The Popup Draw Tool (FIG.. To access the Popup Draw toolbar button. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. 75). FIG.) next to Font to open the Choose Font dialog (FIG. a. A sample of the selected font type and size is displayed in the Sample window. hold down the ALT key while clicking and dragging in a Design View window to move the current selections without selecting anything new on the mouse press (useful for moving popup pages whose entire area is filled with buttons).Working With Popup Pages 9. When using the Selection tool. and while holding the left mouse button down. under the project to which the page was added. if desired. Select Edit > Popup Draw Tool (or click the toolbar button) to activate the Popup Draw tool. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. Click the browse button (.11 or higher) 87 . click and hold the Button Draw tool (in the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) for one second to open the drop-down menu containing the Popup Draw tool. Use the Group drop-down list to assign the newly created popup page to an existing group. When using the Button Draw or Popup Draw tools. 2. hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the item to a square. 10. Left-click inside the desired page (in the active Design View window). you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index.. Click OK to add the new Popup Page to the active project. The new Popup Page will be displayed in the Workspace Navigator Pages folder. 75 Choose Font dialog b. 76) allows you to draw Popup Pages directly onto a page. 76 Popup Draw Tool The technique is similar to drawing a button. 11. Set the Font Name and Size.

This is a visual indication that the newly created popup has the Edit Focus. select from a drop-down menu. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). Setting Popup Page Properties Popup Pages have a set of Page Properties that can be configured via the fields in the Properties Control Window. Select File > Save to save your changes. 4. 7. The following general properties are supported at the popup page level: Name Left Top Width Height Reset Pos. you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the popup that are small yellow squares with red interiors. To set Popup Page-level properties. Upon the creation of a popup page. you can either set the item manually. On Show Group Timeout Modal Show Effect Show Effect X/Y Pos Show Effect Time Hide Effect Hide Effect X/Y Pos 88 TPDesign4 (v2. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. In most cases. The States tab of the Properties Control window displays state-related information for the new popup in a editable table. 3. Edit the (Off) state properties as desired.11 or higher) . 5. separated into three tabs (General. the Properties Control window displays the properties available for the Popup Page. Depending on the item selected. With the Popup Page selected. click on the Popup Page area in the Design View (as opposed to a button on the page). hold down the CTRL key while clicking and dragging to force a "lasso" selection to occur (even if the mouse was clicked over a button or Popup Page shown on the Page). Use this table to set the popup page's programming properties. or both. Lasso selection forces you to draw a square around the outside of the item to select it. The General tab contains a table that lists the properties for the active popup page. Setting General Properties: Popup Pages Use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. Programming and States). The General tab of the Properties Control window displays general (non-states related) properties for the popup page in a editable table. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. 6. as opposed to clicking on the item. The Programming tab of the Properties Control window displays programming-related properties for the popup page in a editable table.Working With Popup Pages When using the Selection tool. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Use this table to set the popup page's general properties. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. With an item selected in a Design View window. To edit any of the listed button properties.

To edit any of the listed button properties.11 or higher) 89 . you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected. or both. Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually. To edit any of the listed button properties. The State tab contains a table that lists the state properties for the active popup page.Working With Popup Pages Setting Programming Properties: Popup Pages Use the Programming tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page properties. The Programming tab contains a table that lists program-related properties (Address and Channel Port/Channel Code assignments) for the active popup page. The following programming properties are supported at the popup page level: Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Setting States Properties: Popup Pages Use the State tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit popup page state properties. select from a drop-down menu. or both. The following state properties are supported at the popup page level: Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Video Fill Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. select from a drop-down menu.

77). 90 TPDesign4 (v2. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (via the Workspace . 79). the Size to Image tool (if an image has been placed on the popup page).Working With Popup Pages Drawing Assist Support for Popup Pages Once a popup page is displayed on a main Page in the Design View. Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog.) button (FIG. 2. Position Assist Tools toolbar Size Assist Tools toolbar FIG.11 or higher) . and select the color that you want to apply to the Popup Page. 79 States tab of the Properties Control window . 78). 78 Renaming a Popup Page Adding a Fill Color To a Popup Page 1. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.Pages tab). FIG.Fill Color field 3. With the selection of one or more buttons on the page in conjunction with a popup page selection. simply click on a Popup Page entry in the Workspace and type directly into the text field (FIG. click on the Fill Color field to enable the browse (. as well as apply any of the options from the Aspect Ratio tool. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. FIG. you can utilize several of the Drawing Assist tools available via the Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars and the Layout menu to edit the size and position of the popup page (FIG. all of the existing Drawing Assist tools are available to allow you to size and align their popup page(s) with existing buttons on the page. 4. 77 Position Assist Tools and Size Assist Tools toolbars With only the popup page selected.. you can use the Center Horizontal and Center Vertical. Renaming a Popup Page To rename any Popup Page in the active project. all five border tools (if a border has been applied to the popup page)..

Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change an image icon (via the Workspace ...Pages tab). Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the Popup Page.) button. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Popup Page. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. click on the Bitmap field to enable the browse (. TPDesign4 (v2. where you can select the desired icon. click on the Icon Slot field to enable the browse (. 6. FIG. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. 1. FIG. 1. 82 States tab of the Properties Control window . To check the size of the Popup Pages in your project.. 81 States tab of the Properties Control window .Pages tab). to serve as the background image. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. where you can select the desired bitmap.Working With Popup Pages Adding a Bitmap to a Popup Page You can apply a bitmap directly to a Popup Page in your project.) button. Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (via the Workspace . 4. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. to serve as the foreground image (see State Draw Order (Z-Order)). If you don't see the desired image icon file listed in the Select Resource dialog.Icon Slot field 3.Bitmap Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Page/panel. Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. 2.Bitmap field 3. 80 States tab of the Properties Control window . FIG. 5. Adding an Icon to a Popup Page You can apply an image Icon directly to a Popup Page in your project. open the image in any graphics editor program.11 or higher) 91 . Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog.. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab). To scale an image to fit a target Page/panel. 2.

5. If you are also displaying a bitmap on the Popup Page. FIG. the text will automatically be displayed on top of the bitmap. FIG. Since G4 panels utilize address and channel port/address codes (and possess a single state).. FIG. Adding Text to a Popup Page Refer to the True Type Font Support section on page 6 for details on supported text. and type the page text as desired (up to 4096 characters). 83 States tab of the Properties Control window . Also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing page text. click on the Text field to enable the browse (. 85).Icon Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the image. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. 86 States tab of the Properties Control window . you can display text directly on a Popup Page in your project. you can type directly into the Text field.) button (FIG. Alternatively. Select Text Color in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (.) button (FIG.) button (FIG. Click on Font in the States tab of the Properties Control window to enable the browse (..Working With Popup Pages 4. 4. 3.Pages tab). 2.Text field Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog. FIG.Font field 92 TPDesign4 (v2. Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image icon on the Popup Page.11 or higher) . 1. 85 States tab of the Properties Control window . Select the Popup Page to which you want to add or change a text (via the Workspace . Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog... if any exists. 86). unless otherwise directed via the Draw Order selection by the user (see the Draw Order (Z-Order) section on page 206). 84 States tab of the Properties Control window .Text Color field Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog where you can select a color for the Popup Page text... 84). You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text.

any text that won't fit on the selected Popup Page may not be visible. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. Creating Popup Page Groups Popup Page Groups provide a mechanism to group popup pages into mutually exclusive groups for display purposes. In the Properties Control window . Click Word Wrap. FIG. 87 States tab of the Properties Control window . 6. 88 States tab of the Properties Control window .Group field TPDesign4 (v2. FIG.Word Wrap field If you select No. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. 87). 90 States tab of the Properties Control window . Select a popup page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG. 2. click Group to activate the text field (FIG.Text Justification field Select Absolute to manually position the text. 89 States tab of the Properties Control window . Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. 2. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. Click Text Justification in the States tab of the Properties Control window to set the justification of the text on the Popup Page (FIG.11 or higher) 93 . FIG. depending on the text justification setting and the size of the Popup Page.Working With Popup Pages Select the desired font (in the Font dialog). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page.FIG. 89): FIG. Popup Page or Button. 88). 90). 5. To create a Popup Page group: 1. and select whether to wrap text that doesn't fit on a single line on the selected Popup Page (Yes or No . In the Properties Control window (General tab).States Tab.Video Fill field 3.

FIG. select the popup page in the Workspace Navigator. Enter a name for the popup group folder. Deleting Popup Pages From a Project To delete a popup page from the active project.Group field To remove a popup page from a group. 94 TPDesign4 (v2. 4. and select Edit > Delete. . Copying/Pasting Popup Pages Copying Popup Pages You can copy a popup page either by selecting a Popup Page only (ensuring that no buttons are selected) in an active Design View window. 92). 92 States tab of the Properties Control window . select the popup page to delete in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab).Working With Popup Pages 3. 91 Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator 5. 91). Pasting Popup Pages You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied popup page onto: (1) an active Design View (2) the panel name in the Panel Navigator (3) the folder named Popup Pages Pasting a popup page onto another page or popup page in the Panel Navigator (which is only a paste target for buttons) or onto the folder named Pages (which is for pages only) is not allowed. FIG. or set the Group field to None in the Properties Control window. The program will prompt you to verify the popup page deletion first.11 or higher) . or by single-clicking on a page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab) then clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu (or the Copy button in the main toolbar). The named Popup Group folder is created under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator Pages tab (FIG. drag the desired popup page(s) into the desired group folder or set the group association via the Group field in the Properties Control window (FIG. and drag it out of the group. To place a popup page in a particular popup group: In the Workspace Window.

or click the Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button. you can drag and drop a Popup Page from the Workspace Window onto a Design View window to show the selected Popup Page. To hide all Popup Pages: Select Hide All Popup Pages in the Page menu. Hide Popup Page & Hide All Popup Pages buttons This option deals only with showing a popup page (selected in the workspace) on a page that is currently open in the design view. Design View context menu.Show Popup Page. FIG. and select Show Popup Page (or click the toolbar button).11 or higher) 95 .Working With Popup Pages Show/Hide Popup Pages The Show Popup Page and Hide Popup Page options can be selected via the Page menu. Additionally. To hide a selected Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). 93). The Hide All Popup Pages toolbar button is available on the Main toolbar only. 93 Main Toolbar . TPDesign4 (v2. To show a Popup Page: Select a Popup Page in the Workspace Window (Popup Pages tab). the Workspace Navigator context menu or the toolbar buttons contained in the Main toolbar (FIG. and select Hide Popup Page (or click the toolbar button).

Working With Popup Pages 96 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

94 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to select from the other types of Draw Tools: Button Draw Tool . TakeNote: Allow you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. and select from the list (see List Box Buttons). Popup Draw Tool .Select to draw Popup Pages. 94): Button Draw Tool Popup Draw Tool List Box Draw Tool FIG. Button Draw Tools Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tools drop-down (FIG. List Box: Utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list. Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels.Working With Buttons Working With Buttons Overview TPDesign4 supports the following button types: General: Basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. List Box Draw Tool . Computer Control: Allow you to connect to a PC running a VNC server for remote control applications. List box buttons can be used to allow end-users to view data in list form. Joystick buttons only use the Off state. and support up to 256 states. except List Box buttons).Select to draw buttons (all types. Multi-State Bargraph: Level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). not associated with any specific functionality.11 or higher) 97 . and support up to 256 states. TPDesign4 (v2. Text Input: Intended only to display (non-interactive) text on the panel.Select to draw List Box Buttons. Multi-State General: Basic multi-state buttons that can also be used for most touch panel functions. Multi-state bargraph buttons also allow you to create custom bargraph sliders. there is no On state associated with them. Multi-state buttons are used to create animation effects. Joystick: Vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation).

and place your cursor within the boundaries of an open Design View.e. try using "Circle 50" rather than "Circle 100"). Upon the creation of a button on a page (or popup page) you will see selection handles appear on the outsides of the button that are small yellow squares with red interiors. Click and hold the Button Draw Tool to access a drop-down of the other types of Draw Tools (FIG.11 or higher) . With an item selected in a Design View window. Open the Page (or Popup page) that the button will be added to. FIG. 4. Holding the CTRL key while resizing the selected items with the keyboard will resize by the grid size. indicating edit focus. release the left mouse button (FIG. 95): Button Draw Tool FIG.Working With Buttons Drawing a Button Within the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar is the Button Draw Tool. You will see a sizing rectangle as you drag the mouse. 5. FIG. This is a result of scaling the button smaller than what the selected border requires to accommodate the slider bar. Select the Button Draw Tool (used for all button types other than List Box Buttons). Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. indicating the size of the button you are drawing (FIG. To complete the button draw action. hold down the CTRL key while moving the item with the keyboard arrow keys to move by the grid size instead of a single pixel (regardless of the grid visibility or snap to grid setting). 3. When using the circle. programming. The Button Selection/Draw toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. 6. 97 New Button The maximum number of buttons per page / popup page = 500. Programming and States tabs of the Properties Window to specify general. single-click the State button. If you see this. To toggle between Off and On states. you may notice the slider bar appearing partially outside of the button border. 97). 96). Use the fields and options in the General. select Edit > Button Draw Tool from the main menu. 98 TPDesign4 (v2. 1. Refer to Properties Window for details. Experiment with different border types to get the results you're after. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse diagonally. Minimum button size is 4 x 4 pixels. 95 Button Draw Tool (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) Alternatively. 96 Drawing a New Button Hold down the SHIFT key while drawing to constrain the button to a square. oval or diamond border types. 2. try using a "smaller" border (i. and state-specific properties for the selected button.

98): FIG. 98 New Button . and you add a bitmap. the button name will not change. However. any time you change the bitmap or the text on the button. the button name is automatically updated with either the latest text or bitmap assignment. 8. TPDesign4 (v2. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project). Additionally. and does not require a Save operation. via the Name field. the button name will not change. However. when you apply an icon to the button. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the bitmap file name (i. Furthermore. However. the Lock Button Name option is set to Off. the button text is substituted for the button number. based on the text and/or bitmap applied to the button: If you apply text to the button. Note that this name change occurs on the fly. note that the button is automatically renamed to "Welcome". if there is text associated with a button and you add an icon. if the button has no text. For example if you create a new button (which is automatically named "Button 9"). At any point in the design process. click Lock Button Name and select Yes to prevent the button from being automatically renamed by the program when you edit the text or bitmap assignment(s).Button Preview window Generated Button Names When new buttons are created. the button is automatically renamed to reflect the icon's name. then add the text "Welcome". when you apply a bitmap to the button. This is where the Lock Button Name option (General tab of the Properties Control Window) comes into play. Select View > Button Preview to preview the button (click Push to simulate a button press) in the Button Preview window (FIG. "Background").e. Note that if you change the text. the button is again renamed to reflect the updated text. Select File > Save to save your changes. if the button has no text.11 or higher) 99 . Text on a button always overrides the presence of a bitmap. If there is text associated with a button. Lock Button Name does not prevent you from manually renaming the button. However.Working With Buttons 7. By default. TPD4 goes further in automatically generating a descriptive name for the button.

102). Alternatively. 100 TPDesign4 (v2. If no Border Style was specified (none). This enables the browse (. 100 Border Name drop-down menu (State Property) If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab).. Select or a create a button. select Type to access the drop-down menu of Supported Button Types (FIG. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Border Style. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. Select the desired button type..11 or higher) . 101). Click the browse button to open the Enter Text dialog (FIG. click on the Text field in the state that you want add the text to. In the General tab of the Properties Window. 100): FIG.) button (FIG.Working With Buttons Specifying the Button Type To specify the button type for any button: 1. and type the button text as desired. FIG. Specifying a Button Border To specify a border style for a button. Select the button to which you want to add or change text (with the Selection tool). FIG. 99). then all border names are available in the provided list. you can type directly into the Text field. For List Box buttons. and select a border style from the Border Name (State) Property (FIG. 99 Button Type drop-down menu (General Property) 3. then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. you can add or change the button text via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1. select the button in the Design View window. Adding Text to a Button Since button text is a state-specific property. 2. 101 State Properties .Text 3. 2.

or use the Text field under All States to add the text to every state in the button. In order to display such languages on a page or button state. the graphic can be assigned to one or more page or button states. 102 Enter Text dialog You don't have to open the Enter Text dialog unless you intend to enter multiple lines of text. TPD4 (and the G4 firmware itself) do not provide explicit support for languages that utilize complex scripts.11 or higher) 101 . Hebrew. Foreign Language Support for Text For page and button state text properties. if any exists. TPD4 supports non-complex scripts (those that can be printed correctly without the use of a rendered script) to the extent that the True Type font currently selected for that state supports the language in question. so keep in mind wether you want the text to occur on all states. Button text is state-specific.Working With Buttons FIG. Once imported into the panel project. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. The size of the font required to support the language (particularly in the case of East Asian languages that utilize ideograms) might be prohibitive due to limits of available memory on the target device. the panel designer must create a pre-rendered graphic of the desired text (using a suitable graphics application) that can then be imported into the TPD4 panel project as a graphic (icon or bitmap). and Devangari. You can also use the Enter Text dialog to edit existing button text. If the size of the font exceeds the memory available on the device. 4. Click anywhere outside of the Text field to set the button text (or click OK to close the Enter Text dialog). so use the Text field in the state that you want to change. These languages include (but are not limited to) Arabic. the panel designer may be forced to use a pre-rendered graphic to display the desired text. TPDesign4 (v2. or only on specific states. See the True Type Font Support section on page 6.

This enables the browse button (. FIG. Changing the Button Fill Color Since button fill color is a state-specific property. This enables the browse (.Working With Buttons Adding a Fill Color To a Button Since Fill Color is a state-specific property. 2. you can add or change the button Fill Color assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1.) button (FIG.. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change the fill color on. FIG. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. 3. so keep in mind wether you want the Fill Color to occur on all states.. you can add or change the button fill color via the State tab of the Properties Control window: 1. so use the Fill Color field in the state that you want to change. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window.). click on the Fill Color field in the state that you want add the Fill Color to. 103 State Properties .. 104 Colors dialog 4. or only on specific states.Text Button Fill Colors are state-specific. or use the Fill Color field under All States to add the Fill Color to every state in the button. 102 TPDesign4 (v2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window.. Select the button that you want to add or change the fill color on (with the Selection tool). Click the browse button to open the Colors dialog. 103). 104). and select the color that you want to apply to the Button/State (FIG. Select the button to which you want to add or change the Fill Color (with the Selection tool).11 or higher) . or use the Fill Color field under All States to change the fill color on every state in the button. 2. Click OK to close the Colors dialog.

click on the Bitmap field in the state that you want add the bitmap to..11 or higher) 103 . so use the Bitmap field in the state that you want to change. 3.Bitmap Button bitmaps are state-specific. Select the button to which you want to add or change a bitmap image (with the Selection tool). 106).. where you can change the fill color.. 105). This enables the browse (. 106 Select Resource dialog Note that only bitmaps that have already been imported into the project are listed in the Select Resource dialog. or use the Bitmap field under All States to add the bitmap to every state in the button. where you can select the desired bitmap (FIG. 4. TPDesign4 (v2. Adding a Bitmap to a Button Since bitmap assignment is a state-specific property.Working With Buttons 3. 105 State Properties . Click the browse button (. or only on specific states. FIG. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. you can add or change the button bitmap assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1.) to open the Colors dialog. 2. In the States tab of the Properties Control window. FIG. Click OK to close the Colors dialog. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window.) button (FIG. Use the Import button (at the lower-left of this dialog) to import new bitmaps into the project (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54).. so keep in mind wether you want the bitmap to occur on all states.

5. so keep in mind wether you want the icon to occur on all states. 3. 108 State Properties .Bitmap Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. 107).Working With Buttons 4. FIG. Match the image size (in pixels) to the size indicated there. and scale the image to the exact size (in pixels) of the Button. so use the Icon Slot field in the state that you want to change.Icon Slot Button icons are state-specific. Select the button that you want to add an Icon to (with the Selection tool). In the States tab of the Properties Control window. or only on specific states. check the Width and Height values in the Properties Control window (General tab).. TPD4 does not automatically scale or stretch images to fit the Button. To scale an image to fit a target Button. FIG.. 2. Each state of the selected button is represented individually in the States tab of the Properties Control window. open the image in any graphics editor program. 107 State Properties . where you can select the desired icon (FIG. Adding an Icon to a Button With TPD4. Click Bitmap Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the image on the button (FIG. click on the Icon Slot field in the state that you want add the icon to. 108). you can add or change the button Icon assignment via the States tab of the Properties Control window: 1.) button (FIG. This enables the browse (. Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. or use the Icon Slot field under All States to add the icon to every state in the button. 109). 104 TPDesign4 (v2. Since Icon assignment is a state-specific property. Click the browse button to open the Select Resource dialog. To check the size of the Buttons in your project.11 or higher) . to serve as the foreground image (see Z-Order for details). you can apply Icons to buttons in your project.

11 or higher) 105 . Click Icon Justification (also in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to set the justification of the icon on the button (FIG.Icon Justification drop-down menu Select Absolute to manually position the image. 110 State Properties . Click OK to close the Select Resource dialog. 110). you need to import the image file into the project and assign it to a slot position. 4. FIG. 109 Select Resource dialog If you don't see the desired image file listed in the Select Resource dialog. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons FIG. 5.

111): FIG.Working With Buttons Working With Transparent Backgrounds When you are applying an icon. 112 Button With Image and Icon Obviously you don't want that unsightly box framing the icon! You need to edit the icon's fill color and make the background color transparent. 113 Button With Image and Icon using transparent background Check the documentation for your image-editing program to learn about applying transparency to your images. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. the icon actually retains its original rectangular shape. 106 TPDesign4 (v2. 111 Button With Image and you apply an icon that doesn't use transparent as the background color. 112): FIG. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors. but will display without the background (FIG. For example. Generally speaking. 113): FIG. you can take advantage of transparency support in TPD4. and select transparent as the fill color. JPGs are recommended over PNGs. since they are usually slightly smaller in size. there are a few key concepts to understand: Of all the image file formats supported by TPD4. by making the background color transparent. Typically transparency is used in images for the background color. you can effectively change the shape of the image. just like you would for any other color in the palette. Raster images are always created in the shape of a rectangle. if you have a button with an image (FIG. Unless you are actually using transparency. you will apply a fill to the areas that you want to appear transparent (in most cases the background).11 or higher) . to accommodate layering of images without trying to match colors across layers. However. With a transparent background color. only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. you'll wind up with something like this (FIG. When using images with transparencies in TPD4.

Refer to the TPD4 online help for previews of each Text Effect. 3. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column. In the Properties Control window . Page Flips A basic touch panel page design concept is the Page Flip. 114 Video Fill drop-down menu (State Property) The Video Fill options presented will depend on the panel type selected for this project. To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. Typically you would set up a different control page for each piece of equipment. 2. use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab).States Tab. A basic example would be a button labeled "DVD Player" on a main page that when touched. 114). Alternatively. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (FIG.11 or higher) 107 . opens a DVD Player page. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. 115): FIG. and page flips allow you to separate. Organization of device controls is essential to good touch panel design. organize and cross-link your control pages.Working With Buttons Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. containing only buttons that control the DVD player. TPDesign4 (v2. Popup Page or Button. FIG. 115 Text Effect drop-down menu (State Property) For List Box buttons. Since this is a state-oriented setting. and select a text effect from the Text Effect (State) Property (FIG. select the button in the Design View window. A page flip is a button attribute that allows the user to press a button to "flip" through different panel pages. Adding Text Effects To add a text effect to a button. To apply the video fill across all states.

116). popup page or popup group to open. Click the down arrow in the Target column to select the target of the selected Page Flip Action (FIG.Working With Buttons Creating a Page Flip 1.11 or higher) . 118). and access a drop-down list of Page Flip Actions (FIG. Select a (or create a new) button. 108 TPDesign4 (v2. 116 Button Page Flip Actions dialog 4.. FIG. Depending on the type of page flip action selected.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog (FIG. Click the Add command button to create a new page flip for this button. Click the browse button (. In the Properties Control window (General tab). 3.. 117 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Page Flip Actions drop-down menu) 5. 117). FIG. click on Page Flip to enable the editable field. you may need to also specify the target page. See the Page Flip Actions section on page 109. 2.

the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. Alternatively. Click the Add command button to access the Page Flip Actions drop-down list which allows you to select from a list of available page flip actions: Standard Page . Select a target popup page for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). TPDesign4 (v2. If dragged with the right mouse button. the drop will offer a list of all applicable page flip actions. dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. where you can set the type of page flip to apply to the selected button. Select a target page for the page flip.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. Page Flip Actions With a button selected in a Design View window.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. dropping a page will add a 'standard page' flip action. 118 Button Page Flip Actions dialog (Target page selection) 6. drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page.11 or higher) 109 . Select a target popup page for the page flip (to show when the button is touched). Hide Popup . Use the up and down arrows to re-arrange the order of the page flips if necessary. Show Popup . Drag & Drop To Set Page Flips TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab).Working With Buttons FIG. Repeat this process as desired to create multiple page flips on the button. and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. Multiple Standard page flips are allowed. By default. and specify the target page. TPD4 supports a shortcut for adding page flips: Simply select the target page or popup page for the flip in the Workspace window (Pages tab). drag it into a Design View window and drop it onto a button to create a flip to that page or popup page. Alternatively.This selection sets the page flip to go to the previous page (relative to the order of existing page flips) when the button is touched.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. and dropping a popup will add a 'show popup' flip action to that button. If dragged with the right mouse button. You can apply multiple page flips to any button. you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Window (General tab). Previous Page . you can also drag and drop a page or popup page from the Workspace window onto the Page Flip property in the Properties Control window (General tab). By default. click Page Flip in the Properties Control window (General tab) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog.

only adjusting the properties required for them to properly fit on the target popup page. this can cause color shifting on the button. Pasting Buttons You can paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or the Paste button in the main toolbar) a previously copied button or buttons onto: (1) a page or popup page name in the Workspace Navigator window . Copying/Pasting Buttons The Copy and Paste functions in TPD4 always work on the element (including buttons. Multiple Popup actions like Toggle popup.This selection sets the page flip to clear all popup pages when the button is touched. Select a target popup page group for the page flip (to hide when the button is touched). This allows the user start on page one. the pasted items will attempt to maintain their size. when copying buttons from a page to a popup page. the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette. Hide Popup Group . This means the last thing selected. 110 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .Working With Buttons Toggle Popup . Show Popup and Hide Popup for the same Popup Page are allowed on the same button. You can then paste the Channel Port number anywhere else in the Properties Control window (where the copied data is considered to be a valid entry). Use this option when you do not wish to return to the page that initiated the page flip when a subsequent previous page flip action is performed. bitmaps. if you have selected an item in the Properties Control window (let's say you've selected "Channel Port". and you perform a "Copy". Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project. If. which is not always necessarily a button displayed in the Design View windows.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of standard pages in your project. flip to page three. flip to page two. Select the page that you want to hide the popups on when the button is touched. Copying Buttons Copying a button or buttons from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired buttons in an active Design View window then either selecting Edit > Copy from the main menu or by clicking the Copy button in the main toolbar.This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup page groups in your project. If for example you had copied the value "410" from the Left (position) field in the Properties Control window. and not the associated button (even though it is selected in the Design View window). since it is not a valid Address Port number. Hide Popups on Page . you are not allowed to paste it to the Address Port field.Pages tab (no open Design View window required) or (2) the active Design View window. but does not retain the source page in the page flip stack (which is used to execute previous page flips).This selection populates the Target list box with a list of popup pages in your project. Hide All Popups . even individual button properties displayed in the Properties Control window) which has the current Edit Focus. Page Flip Forget .This selection flips to the page specified. For example. the location or dimensions of the copied buttons exceeds the boundaries of the target popup page. then you will have copied only the Channel Port entry in the Properties Control window. then with a previous page flip go directly back to page one. Select a target popup page for the page flip (to toggle hide/show when the button is touched).

and enter (type or select) a new value in the corresponding field. then clicking on the desired button. or left click the mouse in any box other than the current box to apply the change. Editing Multiple Selections Buttons may be acted upon individually by clicking the Selection Tool from the toolbar or selecting Edit > Selection Tool from the main menu. either press the Enter key. If the value is inappropriate for the selected object. or select Edit > Select All from the main menu. you will be notified via a message. Although you may select and retain the selection of buttons on multiple pages. using any of the following techniques: Hold the Shift key and left-click. and the previous value will be replaced in the box. you may only act on the selected buttons on one page / popup page at a time. You can also select multiple buttons. or by left-clicking on the background of the page or popup page. the Prev or Next button. TPDesign4 (v2. To select all available buttons on a page or popup page you may either use the Ctrl+A hotkey. You can de-select a button by either selecting another button.11 or higher) 111 .Working With Buttons Editing Button Properties Edit Button Properties via the Properties Window: select the button property that you wish to modify. Click and drag outside the boundaries of the desired buttons to perform a marquis selection. Once a property has been modified.

you can either set the item manually. The following button properties are supported for General buttons: General Buttons . string and text length = 4096 characters. FIG. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. or both. Depending on the item selected.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) . Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table. and are not associated with a specific functionality.Working With Buttons General Buttons General buttons are basic dual-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. select from a drop-down menu. 119 General Properties: Type (General button) Setting Properties: General Buttons Once you have created a General button. as opposed to other button types. which have specific functionalities. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 112 TPDesign4 (v2.

States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. and that support up to 256 states. Depending on the item selected.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style State Count Animate Time Up Animate Time Down Auto-Repeat Disabled Hidden Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. you can either set the item manually.11 or higher) 113 . 120 General Properties: Type (Multi-State General button) Setting Properties: Multi-State General Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State General button. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. FIG. select from a drop-down menu.Working With Buttons Multi-State General Buttons Multi-State General buttons are basic multi-state buttons that can be used for most touch panel functions. or both. string and text length = 4096 characters. Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State General buttons: Multi-State General Buttons .

Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). Select AutoAssign to automatically assign the level code to this button. • Range Low: • Range High: • Level Control Repeat (Relative Level Control only): Set the bottom of the level range (0-255). These options require the following additional parameters to be defined: Level Control Parameters • Level Port: • Level Code: • Level Control Value: Select or enter the port to which the Level code will be applied. if this value is set to 1000. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for relative level control. Relative or None): Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value. Set the time (in 1/10th-second increments) that it takes to ramp from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2).11 or higher) . Set the top of the level range (0-255). this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. For example. For Absolute level control.Working With Buttons Level Control Parameters The Level Control Type options (set in the Programming tab of the Properties Control Window) allow General and Multi-State General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time. this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). For Relative level control. this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. For relative level control. Select or enter the level code sent to the master on the selected port. • Range Time Up: • Range Time Down: 114 TPDesign4 (v2. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button.

121 General Properties: Type (Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Bargraph button. FIG. Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) 115 . you can either set the item manually. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/ edit general (non-state oriented) button properties.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Value Direction Slider Name Slider Color Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. select from a drop-down menu. To edit any of the properties in the table. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. string and text length = 4096 characters. or both. The following button properties are supported for Bargraph buttons: Bargraph General Buttons .Working With Buttons Bargraph Buttons Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels.

States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound 116 TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. string and text length = 4096 characters.Working With Buttons Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Multi-State Bargraph buttons are level monitors and adjustable level controls that can be configured to monitor or adjust audio outputs and lighting levels. or both. Programming and State button properties. The following button properties are supported for Multi-State Bargraph buttons: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons . and that (like Multi-State General buttons) support up to 256 states. Use multi-state buttons when you want to utilize animation effects. FIG. To edit any of the properties in the table.11 or higher) . 122 General Properties: Type (Multi-State Bargraph button) Setting Properties: Multi-State Bargraph Buttons Once you have created a Multi-State Bargraph button. Depending on the item selected.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style State Count Disabled Hidden Value Direction Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. Multi-State Bargraph buttons also allow you to create a custom bargraph slider (using an image icon). click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. select from a drop-down menu.

Working With Buttons Slider Types There are several slider types available for use with Bargraph buttons.range low) $$ .range low) $R . The following formatting codes will be replaced with the identified values: $P . Formatting Codes Formatting codes can be used in the Text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons. selectable via the General tab of the Properties Control window): FIG.adjusted level value (raw level value .$ character TPDesign4 (v2.range low $H .range high $A .11 or higher) 117 .range (range high .raw level value $L .level percentage $V . 123 Slider Types Slider types are not available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Select State 1 in the Properties Control Window (States tab). In the case of Bargraph buttons. that there is no slider indicated on the button (in the Design View window). move the icon into the position that you want to be the "start position" for the bargraph slider. 5. This is because multi-state bargraph buttons. 2. 124 Image and Text Positioning dialog 6.) to open the Image and Text Positioning dialog (FIG. 118 TPDesign4 (v2. In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. like multi-state General buttons. To create a custom slider: 1. FIG. Custom sliders on Multi-state Bargraph Buttons work on the panel basically the same as regular sliders.Working With Buttons Creating a Custom Slider Multi-State Bargraph buttons work differently than regular Bargraph buttons. Rather than assign a prepared slider. there are no slider-oriented settings to make in the Properties Control window. click the Browse button (. The start position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the bottom of the bargraph (representing the minimum level setting). Also note that unlike regular bargraph buttons. use up to 255 states to animate the button action. Create a Multi-State Bargraph button. Note that when you draw a Multi-State Bargraph button. 124). 3. In the Icon X Offset state property. you can animate an icon across the states to serve as a custom slider. You adjust a level.. Set the Icon Justification to Absolute. you touch the bargraph button and move the slider up and down (or side to side on a horizontal Bargraph button). 4.. or in the State Manager window. as on Multi-State General buttons. like you would for a normal Bargraph button. you'll be animating a change in levels as opposed to a push/release. Apply a Icon Slot assignment to State 1.11 or higher) .

125 shows the State Manager Window with 10 states: FIG. 126 State Manager Window (new Icon position for final State) 10. FIG. 125 State Manager Window (showing Multi-State Bargraph button with 10 states) Keep in mind that the more states used to animate the movement of the icon. When you close the Image and Text Positioning dialog. the size of the button that the icon will travel across) needed for the slider should be taken in to consideration as well. The end position for Multi-State Bargraph buttons is always the top of the bargraph (representing the maximum level setting). 7. Select the last State in the Properties Control Window (States tab). A "short" bargraph button would require less states to create a smooth motion than a "long" one (that for example spans the entire touch panel page).e. TPDesign4 (v2. 126): FIG. 9. Add States to the button (up to 255 total). but while regular bargraph buttons can be set as either horizontal or vertical. move the icon into the position that you want to be the "end position" for the bargraph slider. Generally. Ctrl+click to select just the first and last states. the icon’s new position in the last State is indicated in the State Manager window (FIG. you'll want to delete the "extra" state at the end of the sequence. Always begin the icon animation starting (at State 1) at the bottom position. In the State Manager window. The user will always press and drag the slider up and down to adjust the level. The range of motion (i. which does not contain the icon (the original State 2 setting). the smoother and more accurate the slider will be.Working With Buttons One key difference between regular and Multi-State Bargraph buttons is the way they work on the panel. 8.11 or higher) 119 . Multi-State Bargraph buttons are always oriented vertically. duplicating State 1 (containing the icon). or in the State Manager window. and ending at the top. The button action is the same (press the bargraph slider and drag to adjust the level). In the Image and Text Positioning dialog. Keep this in mind when setting up a custom slider.

128).11 or higher) . FIG. 127 State Manager Window (showing tweened Icon Position) To preview the custom slider in action. Touch Map images allow you to use irregular shapes for active bargraph buttons. you can also utilize the other tweeners in conjunction with the custom slider to create complex color transition effects. 120 TPDesign4 (v2. FIG. See the Working With Animation Effects section on page 223.Touch Map Click the browse button (. open the Button Preview window. If you select Touch Map as the Value Direction (General property)..Working With Buttons 11. The alpha values in the selected image represent the areas where touch will be registered. an additional state property is enabled (displayed directly below Value Direction in the Properties Control window) called Touch Map (FIG.) next to Touch Map to select an image to use as a Touch Map (via the Resource Manager). Right-click on either of the selected states and select Slot Position from the Tweeners sub-menu. Remember. 128 General Properties . Working With Touch Maps TPD4 supports Touch Maps for Multi-State Bargraph buttons. and the red-channel values represent the overall value to change the control to.. 127). and click and drag the cursor up and down within the button to move the slider up and down. The results of the tweening are displayed in the State Manager window (FIG.

FIG.Working With Buttons Joystick Buttons Joystick buttons are vertical and horizontal direction controllers that can be used for pan and tilt control (typically for camera operation).11 or higher) 121 . you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. as is reflected in the State tab of the Properties Control window. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually. Programming and State button properties. To edit any of the properties in the table. string and text length = 4096 characters. Setting Properties: Joystick Buttons Once you have created a Joystick button. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap Sound TPDesign4 (v2. 129 General Properties: Type (Joystick button) Because Joystick buttons don't work in the same way as the other button types (in that they don't generate pushes/releases). there is no On state associated with them. Joystick buttons only use the Off state. select from a drop-down menu. The following button properties are supported for Joystick buttons: Joystick Buttons . or both.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden Cursor Name Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Port Level Code Level Aux Level Function Range Low Range High Range Drag Increment Range Inverted Range Time Up Range Time Down String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. Depending on the item selected.

Programming and State button properties. FIG. Depending on the item selected. The following button properties are supported for Text Input buttons: Text Input Buttons . Setting Properties: Text Input Buttons Once you have created a Text Input button. States Properties Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Font Text Text Effect 122 TPDesign4 (v2. or both. string and text length = 4096 characters.Working With Buttons Text Input Buttons Text Input buttons are intended for user-input (using the on-screen keyboards) on the panel. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Touch Style Border Style Disabled Hidden Password Character Display Type Max Text Length Input Mask Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Note: Maximum command. To edit any of the properties in the table. select from a drop-down menu. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General.11 or higher) . 130 General Properties: Type (Text Input button) Text Input buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers.

Working With Buttons Input Mask Characters The following table lists the available input mask characters. Sets the overflow flag for this field. plus and minus signs not allowed). entry required). entry optional). Letter (A to Z. TPDesign4 (v2. and which characters each input mask allows in any given position (for use with the Input Mask property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Characters 0 9 # L ? A a & C Digit (0 to 9. Letter or digit (entry optional). Digit or space (entry not required. entry required. Only one range is allowed per field and the use of a range implies numeric entry only. Input Mask Ranges Input Mask Ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric values for a given field. Any character or a space (entry optional). plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed). plus and minus signs allowed). Letter (A to Z. Digit or space (entry not required. The following table lists the available Input Mask Next Field characters (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Next Field Characters { } Start Next Field List End Next Field List Input Mask Operators Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in various ways. Causes all characters to be converted to uppercase. Any character or a space (entry required).11 or higher) 123 . Letter or digit (entry required). The following table lists the available Input Marks Operators (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Operators < > ^ Causes all characters to be converted to lowercase. The following table lists the available input mask ranges (for use with the Input Mask state property for Text Input buttons): Input Mask Ranges [ ] | Start Range End Range Range Separator Input Mask Next Field Characters Input Mask Next Field Characters allow the user to specify a list of characters that caused the keyboard to advance the focus to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the test into the text input area.

Computer Control buttons only use one state: Off.Working With Buttons Computer Control Buttons Computer Control buttons provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. The following button properties are supported for Computer Control buttons: Computer Control Buttons . Setting Properties: Computer Control Buttons Once you have created a Computer Control button. States Properties Fill Color Text Color Overall Opacity 124 TPDesign4 (v2. select from a drop-down menu. you can either set the item manually.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Disabled Hidden Remote Host Remote Port Password Color Depth Compression Scale To Fit TakeNote Enabled Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. 800x600 or 1024x768). you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. or both. allowing you to control the PC via the Touch Panel interface (for remote control purposes). 131 General Properties: Type (Computer Control button) Computer Control buttons are constrained to one of three predefined sizes (640x480. To edit any of the properties in the table. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Computer Control buttons support password protection separate from any additional username/ password credentials that the user may require to access the remote system once the connection has been made. Computer Control buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. Depending on the item selected.11 or higher) . FIG. Programming and State button properties. string and text length = 4096 characters.

The following button properties are supported for TakeNote buttons: TakeNote Buttons . 132 General Properties: Type (TakeNote button) TakeNote buttons are not supported on R-4 remote controllers. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. To edit any of the properties in the table.11 or higher) 125 .Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Lock Button Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Border Style Disabled Hidden TakeNote Host TakeNote Port Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. allowing you to use a G4 panel to annotate to either a windows desktop or on other G4 panels. you can either set the item manually. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Depending on the item selected. string and text length = 4096 characters. or both. States Properties Draw Order Border Name Chameleon Image Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Video Fill Video Cropping Video Pass-Thru Streaming Source Bitmap Bitmap Justification Bitmap X Offset Bitmap Y Offset Scale Bitmap To Fit Icon Slot Icon Justification Icon X Offset Icon Y Offset Font Text Text Justification Text X Offset Text Y Offset Text Effect Word Wrap TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons TakeNote Buttons TakeNote buttons work in conjunction with G4 Computer Control to provide a remote desktop to an attached PC running a VNC server. FIG. select from a drop-down menu. Setting Properties: TakeNote Buttons Once you have created a TakeNote button. Programming and State button properties.

5. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG. border color and text color. Button Draw Tool FIG. 133). 7. This toolbar can either be free floating or docked. 126 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . until the Button Type selection is changed. The Drawing toolbar allows you to control certain new button creation properties for both the Off and the On state of a button. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. On the extreme left side of the toolbar. 133 Drawing toolbar The settings that are specified in this toolbar become the default settings for all new buttons. you can quickly create sets of buttons that are visually consistent. Click the down-arrow on the second drop-down menu (to the right of the Button Type drop-down) to select a Border Style for the button. until the Font and Font Size specifications are changed. but cannot be docked in a vertical fashion.Working With Buttons Setting Default New Button Parameters Use the Drawing toolbar to set the default new button parameters (FIG. This toolbar is normally at the top of your screen and provides you with a mechanism for controlling various elements of future button creation. Click the down-arrow on the first drop-down menu to the right of the State button to select the Type of button you want to create (default = general). This way. Of course. 133) to set the Text Color for the button. button fill color. this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. To set new button parameters: 1. until the Text Color setting is changed. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. 4. 133) to set the Border Color for the button. until the Border Style selection is changed. you will see a button that will allow you to toggle the default choices for both the Off and the On state of a button. 134). You can control the button type. 133) to set the Fill Color for the button. Select the Button Draw tool from the Selection/Draw toolbar (FIG. Click the down-arrow on the second palette button (see FIG. this selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. 134 Draw Tools (Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar) 2. font size. font. Use the next two drop-down menus to specify a Font and Font Size as the default text attributes for new buttons. These selections become the default text settings for all subsequent buttons. Click the down-arrow on the third palette button (see FIG. Buttons are always drawn in the Off State. Click the down-arrow on the first palette button (see FIG. 6. as the drop down lists contained on the toolbar do not support this type of docking. the Drawing toolbar becomes activated. 3. This selection becomes the default for all subsequent buttons. until the Border Color setting is changed. border family. When the Button Draw tool is selected. 8. until the Fill Color setting is changed. Again. until the settings are changed.

11 or higher) 127 . select equal spacing. You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). use these commands to place the selected button(s) to either the top or bottom layer on the page. Choose which Align tool to use based on the shape and size of the selected buttons. To distribute buttons evenly on the page. Top.When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. Increase. Position Assist toolbar FIG. 136 Position Assist toolbar Vertical Spacing tools Align: Left. then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. Bottom . and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). Decrease. relative to each other (not relative to the area of the page). TPDesign4 (v2.Use the Align commands to quickly align selected buttons on the page.Use these commands to control the horizontal spacing between selected buttons. 135 describes the tools in the Order Assist toolbar: Send To Back Send To Front Shift Up Shift Down FIG. select equal spacing.Use these commands to quickly center one or more selected buttons either Horizontally or Vertically on the page. use these commands to shift the selected button(s) up and down just one layer on the page (as opposed to placing them on just the top or bottom layer). Increase. Remove . 136 describes the tools in the Position Assist toolbar: Align tools Horizontal Spacing tools Center tools FIG. then increase or decrease spacing as necessary. Order Assist toolbar FIG. Vertical Spacing (Equal.When you have one or more buttons that overlap on the page. Horizontal Center. You must select at least two buttons to enable the Align options. and note that the first button you select becomes the controlling button (all other buttons are moved to align with the controlling button). Shift Up/Shift Down . and the desired design effect. Horizontal Spacing (Equal. Right. Remove) . You must have at least three buttons selected to enable these options. Vertical Center. 135 Order Assist toolbar Send to Front/Send To Back . Position Assist and Size Assist toolbars contain shortcuts to many layout and design control options for controlling various elements of existing button(s) size and position.Use these commands to control the vertical spacing between selected buttons. Center Horizontal/Vertical .Working With Buttons Using the Drawing Assist Features The Order Assist. To distribute buttons evenly on the page. Decrease.

and draw a circle that is smaller than 150 pixels in diameter (or not perfectly round). 137 describes the tools in the Size Assist toolbar: Make Same tools Make Ideal For Border Increase Height/Width for Border tools Size To Image Aspect Ratio FIG.85:1 Letterbox Video 1. All selected buttons are resized to match the width or height of the controlling button (the first button selected). the Increase/ Decrease Width commands will always adjust the width on the right side of the selected button(s). Oval and Diamond border types. and the Increase/Decrease Height command will always adjust the height on the bottom side of the selected button(s). As a design concept.Select a button that has either a bitmap or icon image assigned to it. and the selected border type.This tool allows you to set the aspect ratio (for use with video fills). then select the button(s) that you want to resize.11 or higher) . the Circle and Oval border types are more problematic in terms of potential image cropping than are rectangular borders (assuming the associated image is rectangular).35:1 Anamorphic Video Make Ideal For Border . Note that since all measurements in TPD4 are zero-based. For example. 137 Size Assist toolbar Make Same Width/Height/Size . if you create a button with the border "Circle 150".This command automatically resizes the selected button(s) to the smallest size possible that still accommodates the selected border. try to choose button border styles that accommodate and compliment the button image (if there is one). Aspect Ratio .Working With Buttons Size Assist toolbar FIG. Click this command to resize the button to become a perfect circle. Click these buttons to adjust the button width/height in increments specific to the selected border. 128 TPDesign4 (v2.Select a button that has the width or height that you want to match. or cropped by the border style). Note that the border uses some of the interior area of the button.These commands are like nudge controls for button width and height. Size To Image may appear to resize the button to be too small to display the entire image (because part of the image is hidden. Size To Image .85:1 Anamorphic Video 2. Click this button to select from the drop-down menu: 4:3 Video 16:9 Letterbox Video 16:9 Anamorphic Video 1. For example. Increase/Decrease Width/Height For Border . This option is typically for use with the Circle. the resulting button will not appear as a perfect circle.35:1 Letterbox Video 2. Depending on the size of the button. and click one of these commands. and click Size To Image to automatically resize the button to the same size as it's associated bitmap or icon.

left to right spacing: Aligns the left edge of the first selected button to the right edge of the next selected button. top edges to bottom: Aligns the top edges of selected buttons to the bottom edge of the button that was selected first.Working With Buttons Using the Alignment & Sizing dialog To access this dialog. bottom. TPDesign4 (v2. right to left spacing: Aligns the right edge of the first selected button to the left edge of the next selected button. Positive values offset the selections to the right. or along any edge (top.select the type of vertical alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). left edges to right: Aligns the left edges of selected buttons to the right edge of the button that was selected first. bottom edges to top: Aligns the bottom edges of selected buttons to the top edge of the button that was selected first. centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons.11 or higher) 129 . centers: Aligns the centers of all selected buttons. vertically (or both) along either the centers of the buttons.select the type of horizontal alignment to apply to the selected buttons: none: No alignment (default setting). left edges: Aligns the left edges of all selected buttons. 138). 138 Alignment & Sizing dialog The options in this dialog include: Alignment . All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. Vertical. negative values offset them to the left. FIG. Use the options in this dialog to align and/or resize the selected buttons.The horizontal alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. left or right).These options allow you to align the selected buttons horizontally. right edges to left: Aligns the right edges of selected buttons to the left edge of the button that was selected first. right edges: Aligns the right edges of all selected buttons. bottom edges: Aligns the bottom edges of all selected buttons. you must have more than one button selected (in a Design View window). Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 .the horizontal measurement of the selected panel in pixels). top edges: Aligns the top edges of all selected buttons. Offset . All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Select Layout > Alignment & Sizing to access this dialog (FIG. Horizontal . Default = 0.

130 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons top to bottom spacing: Aligns the top edge of the first selected button to the bottom edge of the next selected button. Button Preview is not available for Joystick buttons. Button Preview functions the same as for a General button with no text or graphics.The vertical alignment values may be offset either absolutely or incrementally. text and color settings on a Push and Release of the button. Make Same Width . bottom to top spacing: Aligns the bottom edge of the first selected button to the top edge of the next selected button. Click on the Push button. FIG. Double-click inside the title bar to dock the window. Default = 0.the vertical measurement of the selected panel in pixels). the Button Preview window is fully dockable.specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections width (positive values add pixels. Initially the button is shown in its Off state. Sizing .Resizes all selected buttons to match the height of the button that was selected first. negative values subtract). Note that the order in which the buttons are selected in the Design View window controls how several of these options work. To preview a button: 1.specify a number of pixels to add or subtract from the selections height (positive values add pixels.11 or higher) . height or both. In this case. Select the button that you want to preview. Select View > Button Preview to open the Button Preview window (FIG. Indicate the number of pixels to offset the alignment options (range = 0 . All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. 139 Button Preview window Like the other windows in TPD4. Change . 139). but initially it opens undocked.Resizes all selected buttons to match the width of the button that was selected first. 2. All selected buttons are aligned this way in the order in which they were selected. Change . Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally.These options allow you to resize the selected buttons to make them match in width. 3. negative values subtract). Specify whether to adjust the sizing values absolutely or incrementally. Button Preview for List Box Buttons is only supported for a selected child button in unmanaged mode. Offset . but will not have any data linkage. Make Same Height . The Button Preview window displays a preview of the selected button. border. Previewing a Button The Button Preview Window allows you to preview a button so you can check size.

140). 141 Address Code drop-down menu 5. 2. FIG. Click the plus (+) symbol next to Date Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG.Working With Buttons Creating a Date Button A Date Button is a button that displays the current date on the panel. but normally you would use the General button type. Create a new button. FIG. The button can be of any type. To create a date button: 1. 3. 141). 140 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu. In the Programming tab of the Properties window.11 or higher) 131 . 142). TPDesign4 (v2. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. It is a read-only (non-interactive) button.

etc). FIG. click the Address Port field to enable the drop-down menu.11 or higher) . 132 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Buttons FIG. To create a time button: 1. 143). 3.Date Display drop-down menu 6. Click the Address Code field to enable the drop-down menu (FIG. Creating a Time Button A Time Button is a button that displays the current time on the panel. 142 Address Code . Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. 141). It is a read-only (non-interactive) button. The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel. Create a new button. Select the desired display format (Weekday. 143 Address Port = 0-Setup Port 4. but normally you would use the General button type. 2. Select 0-setup port from the drop-down menu (FIG. The button can be of any type. yyyy-mm-dd. In the Programming tab of the Properties window. dd/mm/yyyy.

Standard or Standard AM/PM). Select the desired display format (24-hour. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 133 . Click the plus (+) symbol next to Time Display to expose a drop-down menu of time display formats to choose from (FIG. Time and Date buttons do not display any text when viewed in TPD4. 145). The time or date is only visible once the project is loaded on a touch panel. 145 Address Code . 144 Address Code drop-down menu 5. FIG.Working With Buttons FIG.Time Display drop-down menu 6.

11 or higher) .Working With Buttons 134 TPDesign4 (v2.

or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. which may be selected like any other button for editing. If you have selected any touch panel that is equipped with external pushbuttons. the only available option is "Default Configuration" (and cannot be changed). LED. Keypad with Transport Functions . This option allows you to select from multiple external button layouts. Copying/Converting External Controls Between Panels TPD4 supports copying and converting the properties for programmable external controls (external pushbuttons and LEDs) for NXD-CV5. The global. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. the configuration of the source external controls are copied to the destination controls according to the type of control (general. the External Button Options list is empty. which may be selected like any other button for editing. the options include: Default Configuration . and MVP-8400 panels.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4. You can edit external control properties on both a panel-wide basis and on a page specific buttonby-button basis. cursor left. Teletext Keypad with Transport Functions . If you have selected the MIO R-4 remote. Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). TPD4 supports copying and converting external controls between panels: When copying a page between panels. The choices available depend on the type of panel selected in the Panel Type drop-down: If you have selected a panel without external pushbuttons.for use with a MIO R-4 with transport keys.11 or higher) 135 .for use with a standard MIO R-4. cursor down. this selection cannot be modified once the panel project has been created. cursor up. or cursor select). Page specific external controls settings are accessed via each page's Design View (with the Page > Show External Controls option enabled). MVP-7500.e.Working With External Controls Working With External Controls Overview TPD4 supports editing the properties for programmable external controls for panels that feature external pushbuttons and LEDs (including R-4 remote controllers). NXD-CV7. Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. "<none>". As with the panel resolution. cursor right. panel-wide settings for external controls can be accessed and edited through the External Controls entry in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window. Teletext keypad . Double-click this entry to access a Design View Window representing the size and placement of the external buttons and LEDs. i. The global. External Button Options The first dialog in the New Project Wizard includes an option for selecting External Button Options. TPDesign4 (v2.for use with a Teletext MIO R-4 with transport keys.

cursor right. LED. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). 2. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. 136 TPDesign4 (v2. Depending on the item selected. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. To edit any of the properties in the table. you can either set the item manually. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Setting Global Properties for External LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons and LEDs). or when converting between panel types that both support external buttons. or both.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. select from a drop-down menu. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general external control properties. 1. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel.Working With External Controls When copying a page between panels. cursor down. Once you have selected an external button. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. Global settings are panel-wide settings that apply to the external controls regardless of the page currently showing on the panel. the configuration of the source panel's external controls are copied to the destination panel's controls according to the type of control (general. or cursor select. Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel.11 or higher) . cursor left. The following global button properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . 3. Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window). cursor up. Page-specific properties are external control properties that change according to the specific page showing on the panel. Global Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs TPD4 allows you to set Global or Page-Specific properties for external controls (for projects targeted at panel types that have external pushbuttons). click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls on the target panel. string and text length = 4096 characters. Setting Global Properties for External Pushbuttons Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls (pushbuttons and LEDs) are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window).

3. which may be selected like any other button to edit their properties. Override Global Settings . Double-click on the External Controls entry to display a Design View Window representing the layout of the external controls (buttons and LEDs) on the target panel. To edit any of the properties in the table. click on an item in the righthand column to activate the field. TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Double-click on a Page entry (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window) to display the selected page in a Design View Window. or both. you can either set the item manually. The following page-specific properties are supported for external Pushbuttons: External Pushbuttons . string and text length = 4096 characters.Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. Use the Selection Tool to pick the external control that you want to configure (in the Design View Window). The following global button properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs . or if its behavior is specific to this page. If set to Yes.Supported Properties General Properties Override Global Settings Name Disabled Password Protection Page Flip Programming Properties Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code Level Control Type String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output Note: Maximum command. you can use the General tab of the Properties Control window to set/edit general button properties. select from a drop-down menu.This option (Yes/No) determines if the button performs the global action defined for the button.11 or higher) 137 . 4. 1. Depending on the item selected. States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls. Page-Specific Properties for External Pushbuttons/LEDs Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External Pushbuttons Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with. Note that are no State properties to configure for external controls. Select Pages > Show External Controls to change the Design View to represent the layout of the external buttons on the target panel. Once you have selected an external control. the remainder of the external buttons properties will indicate their global values as read-only (default = No).Working With External Controls Global (panel-wide) settings for external controls are accessed through the new External Controls entry in the panel's tree (displayed in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator Window).

Working With External Controls Setting Page-Specific General Properties: External LEDs Page-specific settings for external controls (pushbuttons and associated LEDs) which may override any Global settings are set via the Design View of the page that you want to associate the external controls with.11 or higher) . 138 TPDesign4 (v2. The following page-specific properties are supported for external LEDs: External LEDs .Supported Properties General Properties Name Disabled Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code Channel Port Channel Code States Properties Note: There are no State properties to configure for external controls.

managed mode presents properties by column. Once in unmanaged mode the only way to put the list box back in the managed mode is by using the Undo feature. In many ways. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. in that they use Rows and Columns to organize the data to be displayed.11 or higher) 139 . Unmanaged Mode: You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. For example. the text that is displayed in a List Box button comes from a List Data Table. The List Box button is a special-purpose button type for G4 devices/panels which utilizes a collection of subordinate buttons to display either dynamic or static data as a scrollable list (referred to as a "list box view"). List Box buttons are set up like tables in TPD4. The List Data Table is the data source for list box buttons. not as individually customizable buttons.Managed and Unmanaged: Managed Mode: In managed mode TPD4 treats the List Box button as a Container for the Subordinate buttons. Subordinate buttons appear in a grid fashion. and make selections from the list. via options in the Edit List Tables dialog. The role of the subordinate buttons is to display the data in the list box view.Working With List Box Buttons Working With List Box Buttons Overview TPD4 supports adding "List Box" buttons to projects created from panel types that support List Box buttons. Each List Box button is associated to a List Data table. TPDesign4 (v2. The primary role of the (hidden) list box button is to retain the properties of the list box view. There are three main aspects to List Box buttons: the Container button. individual button properties are not accessible. and you can specify how the List Box button displays the data (via General and State Button Properties). Unlike other button types where you specify the text to be displayed on the button (via the Text button state property). Select the List Box Container to set button properties for the entire list box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). and every button is populated with data coming from the List Data Table associated with the List Box button. and can be defined statically or dynamically. but you cannot add or delete them. such as a MAX Home Theater server. The List Data Table provides the data to be displayed in the List Box button. since subordinate buttons only operate as a display of list data. List Data Tables are created in TPD4. Think of a table where each cell is a button. You can select subordinate buttons by the column to set button properties that affect only the affected column. the song titles displayed in the list box buttons are provided by a server. Subordinate buttons and the List Data table: The main List Box button is referred to as the Container. The List Box Container wraps around the Subordinate buttons which represent the display fields for data populated by the List Data Table. Strict alignment and spacing rules are forced both by the view and in the properties the user may edit. Instead. Note that you cannot select individual "cells" (or buttons). In this case. you can select. but do not have any visible properties on the panel. Subordinate buttons are created by adding columns and/or rows to the list box container button. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. List Box buttons are visible in TPD4. TPD4 supports two modes for List Box buttons . The data displayed in List Box buttons comes from an associated List Data Table. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. It also presents properties for the list box button and properties for each column. In unmanaged mode. Further. Every List Box button must be associated to a List Data Table. One example usage for List Box buttons might be to display a scrollable list of music playlists for the end-user to select and playback. List box buttons can be used to allow the end-user to view data in list form.

In managed mode. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button. its subordinate buttons are managed strictly via edits performed on the list box button or its columns. you can select. click and drag using the handle (the single vertical bar) at the far-left side of the toolbar.11 or higher) . and should be considered an advanced mode for seasoned programmers only. Select View>Toolbars>List Box Toolbar to show/hide this toolbar: Add Row: Click to add a row to the selected List Box Button. or fonts for subordinate buttons are done on a column-by-column basis. or modify their Z-Order. Delete Column: Click to delete the selected column from a selected List Box Button. Add Row Add Column Delete Column Delete Row FIG. G4 Devices That Support List Box Buttons At the time of this release. You also cannot access the channel port and code properties of the subordinate buttons. To create subordinate buttons. List Box button support is limited to the following G4 devices: MIO R-4 Remotes List Box Toolbar The List Box toolbar contains shortcuts to the Selection and Button Draw tools (FIG. You can choose to place a List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). 146). In unmanaged mode.Working With List Box Buttons The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. so they can be arranged within the application window. List Box Buttons: Managed / Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is in managed mode. To undock any toolbar. double-click anywhere inside the toolbar (but not on a toolbar button). you cannot individually select. add columns and/or rows to the list box button. borders. Changing any properties such as colors. To move the toolbar. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. or delete individual subordinate buttons. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. Delete Row: Click to delete the last row from a selected List Box Button. Add Column: Click to add a column to the selected List Box Button. To delete subordinate buttons. 146 List Box Toolbar All toolbars in TPD4 are dockable. remove columns and/or rows. 140 TPDesign4 (v2. create. you cannot move the subordinate buttons around individually. In managed mode. Double-click again to dock the toolbar.

147 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. 150): TPDesign4 (v2. Create a list box button by holding down the right mouse button on the view and dragging the mouse. You can select the container and change the border color to black. 149): FIG. This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. 146 on page 140). 147): List Box Draw Tool FIG. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. 2. 148 list box button with one subordinate button By default the list box container is created with a transparent background and a white border. This property is only visible in TPD4 and will not appear on the panel. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. This way you can see the container (FIG. 148): FIG. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar (see FIG. you will not see the container. 149 list box button .Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Managed Mode Creating List Box Buttons (Managed Mode) By default. The example below shows a List Box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. To create a list box button: 1.showing container 3. If the background color of the page is white. In managed mode you add subordinate buttons by adding columns or rows to the list box.11 or higher) 141 .

Click the Add Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). 151 List Box button 2. the Drawing Tools toolbar can be used to set the border type.11 or higher) . each button will have the same state properties (i. FIG. 151). The width of each button is equal to the Column Width (general) property of each column in the list box. The number of buttons added will be equal to the List Column (general) property.) as the button above it. Fill Color. Border Color etc. fill color and text color for the on and off states of the subordinate buttons. When a new row is added. when the List Box Button is created. 142 TPDesign4 (v2. 152). 152 List Box button . FIG.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Adding Rows 1. border color.e. Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG.1 Row Added The height of the row will be equal to the List Row Height (general) property of the list box container. 150 List Box button with 2 columns and 3 rows When the List Box Draw Tool is selected. This function adds a row to the bottom of the list box container (FIG. font.

the Column Display Order field will be reset to "empty". Select a List Box button in the Diagram Area (FIG. If only one row exists. the preferred row property should be set back to 1. A column of buttons will appear on the right-hand side of the list and will contain the number of buttons equal to the List Row (general) property. Click the Add Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar). the new column will have the same width as the selected column. FIG. This function adds a column to the righthand side of the list box container (FIG. Deleting Rows 1. If a column is deleted. If the preferred row is deleted. 154).1 Column Added The width of the last column is used for the new column. Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. 153 List Box button . If a column is selected. 2.2 Rows 2. Click the Delete Column toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the right-most column in the list box container. and is part of the Column Display Order field of the parent. this function is disabled. The maximum number of column allowed in a List Box Button is 20.Working With List Box Buttons Adding Columns 1. 2. this function is disabled. Deleting Columns 1. 154 List Box button . Click the Delete Row toolbar button (in the List Box toolbar) to delete the bottom-most row in the list box container.11 or higher) 143 . FIG. 153). Select the List Box button in the Diagram Area. After deletion the container will be resized. TPDesign4 (v2. If only one column exists.

Container Button Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container).11 or higher) . pasting and deleting all the subordinate buttons for you. FIG. Alternatively. TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button (FIG. 156): FIG. List Box Buttons . Copying and Pasting a List Box Cutting. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container.Container Button In Managed mode. copying and pasting a managed list box works only when the list box container is selected by itself or when the list box container is selected along with other non-subordinate buttons. The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. as shown below (FIG. you can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. 155 List Box Buttons . these features are no longer available. All you have to do is select the container.Container Button Selected 144 TPDesign4 (v2. 155).Working With List Box Buttons Cutting. TPD4 does not support copying and/or pasting individual columns of a managed list box. When one or more of the subordinate buttons are also selected. TPD4 takes care of copying. 156 List Box Button .

The other perspective is based on columns of the list box. Depending on the item selected. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. you can either set the item manually.11 or higher) 145 . However. 157): FIG. Instead. the following Properties will appear in the Properties window. 158). only the Off state is indicated. 157 List Box Button . The following button properties are supported for List Box Container buttons: If you select the List Box Container.Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons Once you have created a List Box button.Container Button Selected 2. since List Box Container buttons do not support multiple states. Column Properties In Managed mode. border type. To edit any of the properties in the table. TPDesign4 (v2. When a List Box Container is selected. fill color etc (FIG. 158 List Box Button . The List Box button that contains all the subordinate buttons (called the List Box Container button) presents properties that deal with the list box as a whole. Programming and State button properties. select from a drop-down menu. you select columns of the list box to change properties for all the buttons in that column such as button width. List Box button columns do support multiple states. Managed mode will not allow you to select or move buttons outside of the container. FIG. you can use the Properties Control window to set/edit General. properties are split into two perspectives: 1. If you select a List Box Button Column. or both. additional state properties are supported.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Properties vs. These properties are viewed by selecting the list box Container (FIG.

146 TPDesign4 (v2. you can either set the item manually. or both. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the container button.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Container Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table. Select the Container to set button properties for the entire button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). The (red) handles indicate that the entire button is selected. Click on the outside edge of the List Box button to select the Container. you can use the General. 159 List Box Button . 1. Programming. 159: FIG. select from a drop-down menu. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field.11 or higher) . as shown in FIG. Depending on the item selected.Container Button Selected 2.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Left Top Width Height Above Popups Hidden List Table Port List Table Address Column Display Order Column Sort Order List Table Wrap List Row List Column List Row Height List Preferred Row List Preferred Row Height List Column Padding List Row Padding List Offset Enabled List Managed Programming Properties Address Port Address Code States Properties Border Color Fill Color Overall Opacity Setting List Box Container Button Properties Once you have created a List Box button.

if the list box's 1st 2nd and 3rd columns are assigned to columns 3. the placement of subordinate buttons in a list box is automatic and controlled by the location of the list box container and laid out in a grid fashion. Rows are added to the bottom of a list box and columns are added to the right-hand side of a list box. TPDesign4 (v2.Subordinate Buttons List box buttons and subordinate buttons have a special kind of relationship to keep track of which buttons belong to the list box button. Each subordinate button's Channel Port must be set to the High Port of the list box button. The string is a comma-delimited list of List Table Column Values. For example.Working With List Box Buttons There are additional properties that can be applied to a selected column within the Container button. The Channel Code of each subordinate button is set in sequential order starting with 1000 from left to right.11 or higher) 147 .4. 4 and 1. When a row or column is added. top to bottom.1 (FIG. The subordinate button's Row and Column property is set to their row/column position. See the Setting List Box Button Column Properties section on page 149 for details. The Z-Order of all subordinate buttons must follow list box button container and continue in sequential order from left to right.Subordinate Buttons Subordinate Button Placement In managed mode. then this property would be set to 3. The list box button's Row and Column properties are set to the total number of rows/columns. 160): FIG. The List Box Button's Address Port and Code must be set to an Address Port/Code of a List Data Table. the list box container is resized automatically to fit the new region of subordinate buttons added. List Box Buttons . 160 List Box Buttons . The list Box Button's Data Display property is a string surrounded by parenthesis. top to bottom.

Depending on the item selected.Drag and Drop Capability Full drag and drop capability is supported for Subordinate List Box buttons: You can drag a column property of a list box and drop it on another column of a list box. 148 TPDesign4 (v2. You can select individual columns within the Container button to set button properties at the column level. You can also drag and drop one to two states in the State Manager window on a column of a List Box. Click inside the Container to select a column.Middle Column Selected Setting Properties: List Box Columns Once you have created a List Box button. The (blue) handles indicate that a single column is selected. and States tabs of the Properties Window to set/edit button properties for the columns. Programming. The list box column will highlight when dragged on top of the column in the Design View and when dropped the property will change to the value dragged from the properties window. you can either set the item manually. select the Container to set button properties for the Container List Box button (affecting all subordinate buttons within the container). 161 List Box Button . Alternatively. you can use the General. click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. as shown below (FIG. 161): FIG.11 or higher) . List Box button columns support multiple states.Working With List Box Buttons Subordinate Buttons .Columns In Managed mode. List Box Buttons . To edit any of the properties in the table. TPD4 treats a List Box button as a Container for the subordinate buttons that constitute the columns and/or rows of the List Box button. or both. select from a drop-down menu.

you can use the General. you can set button properties that apply specifically to the selected column. or both.11 or higher) 149 . Font Text Text Justification Text Effect Word Wrap Marquee Direction Marquee Repeat Setting List Box Button Column Properties Once you have created a List Box button. you can either set the item manually. Properties applied to a column will affect all buttons in that column. States tabs of the Properties Control window to set/edit button properties for a selected column (within the List Box button container). List Box buttons consist of a container and subordinate buttons that are created with Columns and Rows. To edit any of the properties in the table. There are additional properties that can be applied to the List Box button container. Managed list boxes Scale Bitmap To Fit do not have any programming Icon Justification properties available. Depending on the item selected. If you select a column within the container (as opposed to the List Box button container itself). Programming.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Columns . click on an item in the right-hand column to activate the field. See the Setting Properties: List Box Container Buttons section on page 145 for details. TPDesign4 (v2. select from a drop-down menu.Supported Properties General Properties Type Name Description Width Above Popups Border Style Programming Properties Feedback Address Port Address Code String Output Port String Output Command Port Command Output States Properties Draw Order Border Name Border Color Fill Color Text Color Text Effect Color Overall Opacity Note: All of the above are available only for Bitmap Justification unmanaged list boxes.

Only certain button properties are available to edit in unmanaged mode: List Box Buttons . You can choose to place a selected List Box button in unmanaged mode by selecting Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). The Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Container/Subordinate buttons cannot be changed.Editable Properties Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • List Table Port • List Table Address • List Display • Column Sort Order • List Filter Column • List Selectable • List Table Wrap • List Preferred Row Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button General Properties • Name • Lock Button Name • Description • Left • Top • Width • Height • Border Style 150 TPDesign4 (v2. the only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is via Edit > Undo. In unmanaged mode. move and edit the properties of the individual subordinate buttons. all of the subordinate buttons will be deleted as well. This logic is present for managed list boxes. The use of Unmanaged mode is typically limited to special circumstances where moving or modifying individual subordinate buttons is absolutely necessary. and individual subordinate buttons can be selected. individual (or multiple selection) subordinate buttons can not be deleted. you can select.Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons: Unmanaged Mode When a List Box button is created. moved and resized. When a list box button is in Unmanaged mode the subordinate buttons are no longer managed by the List Box Container button.11 or higher) . When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. When a List Box button is put into Unmanaged mode: The Container. but you cannot add or delete them. the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence. this functionality will carry over to unmanaged list boxes. In other words.Unmanaged Mode . However. Note that once a List Box button has been moved to unmanaged mode. it always defaults to Managed mode. Rows and Columns cannot be removed nor added. By removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. If the Container is deleted.

Working With List Box Buttons List Box Buttons . Rows cannot be removed nor added. Parent and individual child buttons can be moved and resized.Editable Properties (Cont.) Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Container button Programming Properties • Address Port • Address Code • Channel Port • Channel Code Editable Button Properties of an unmanaged List Box Subordinate button Programming Properties • Feedback • Address Port • Address Code • String Output Port • String Output • Command Port • Command Output State Properties: Off only • Border Color • Fill Color • Overall Opacity State Properties: Off only • Draw Order • Border Name • Border Color • Fill Color • Text Color • Text Effect Color • Overall Opacity • Bitmap Justification • Scale Bitmap To Fit • Icon Justification • Font • Text Justification • Text Effect • Word Wrap • Marquee Direction • Marquee Repeat Rules for Unmanaged List Box Buttons The following rules apply to List Box Buttons in Unmanaged Mode: Must be constructed from a Managed List Box (create a Managed List Box Button and change it to Unmanaged mode via the Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox) option). Individual (or multiple selection) child buttons can not be deleted. This logic is present for managed list boxes. Changing Z-Order of an unmanaged list box Parent/Child is not available. When changing the Z-Order of a non-list box button. The only way to get the unmanaged list box back to a managed state is to use the Undo feature. In other words. the Z-Order of the unmanaged list box must remain in order without gaps in the sequence.11 or higher) 151 . Columns cannot be removed nor added. If the user tries to delete one or more list box child buttons. Parent and individual child buttons can be selected. the Z-Order can only be placed in front of or behind the entire list box collection. a message box is given stating the reason it can not be deleted.Unmanaged Mode . The parent can be deleted -> all children will be deleted as well. Unmanaged transition is one-way. By TPDesign4 (v2.

163): FIG. Select the List Box Draw Tool from the Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar (FIG. List Box buttons are in managed mode when first created. The Channel Port/Code of a child can not be changed via properties. 164 List Box Button With 2 Columns and 3 Rows 4. 163 list box button with one subordinate button 3. To create a list box button: 1.11 or higher) . This will create a list box button with one subordinate button (FIG. The example below shows a list box button with two columns and three rows (FIG. Select the List Box Container button and click the Add Column or Add Row buttons from the List Box Toolbar. 162): List Box Draw Tool FIG.Working With List Box Buttons removing the check for whether the list box is managed or not. this functionality should carry over to unmanaged list boxes. 162 Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar Use the List Box Button draw tool to draw list box buttons on the design view as you would any other button type. 164): FIG. Creating List Box Buttons (Unmanaged Mode) By default. Select Button > Make Unmanaged (Listbox). 152 TPDesign4 (v2. State properties of individual unmanaged list box button can be changed. The High Port of a parent can not be changed via properties. 2. Create a list box button by right clicking on the view and dragging the mouse.

This allows you to change the overall width of the list box. 166 Right center handle enabled for resizing When a single column is selected (not including the last column) resizing is limited to the width of the selected column and the next column to the right. up to the number of rows present in the list box. The program displays a warning message concerning the rules concerning unmanaged mode: Once set. If the last column is selected. 6. When two or more columns are selected. the other rows. Use the corner resize handles to do a combination what the center handles do by resizing one of the corners. resizing maintains the size ratio of the preferred row vs. If Preferred Row is 0. If the List Preferred Row is set to a non-zero value (i.Resizing If the change in size specified by the drag is not equally divisible by the number of rows. 165 List Box Buttons . List Box Buttons . FIG. the next column to the right will resize to reflect the change. the remainder is dropped. the change in size is split evenly between each row by adding/subtracting the change in size to the Row Height and Preferred Row Height properties of the Container (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons 5. plus the offset of the parent if the List Offset Enabled (General) property is set to "yes". Click Yes to convert the List Box Button to unmanaged mode. After resizing the column.e. the remainder is applied to the Preferred Row Height. the List Box cannot be set back to managed mode except through the Undo feature. 165). In unmanaged mode you can resize and move individual subordinate buttons of the list box but you cannot add nor delete rows and columns. only the right center handle is enabled for resizing (FIG. When a List Box Column is selected. the maximum width allowed per column is the amount of width from the right-hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup divided by the TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 153 . 1). FIG. The minimum height for each row is 4 pixels. 166).Resizing When a List Box Container is resized by dragging the center handles. resizing is limited to the size of the last column plus the width left on the right hand side of the list box to the right edge of the page or popup.

it is either behind or on top of the entire list box). Z-Order placement remains managed by the list box. Press again for an ascending re-sort. Using the Drawing Toolbar With List Box Buttons When the List Box Draw Tool is selected.Move list to end of page. List Box Buttons .e. the colors are defined via the Drawing Tools Toolbar. Even though you can individually select buttons in unmanaged mode. 167 Drawing toolbar When you draw a List Box button with the List Box Draw Tool. 154 TPDesign4 (v2. the Drawing toolbar (FIG. send-to-back.Sort the specified column.Working With List Box Buttons number columns selected. When you add columns and rows (with the List Box Button Container selected). Home . you can use the Drawing Tools Toolbar to specify the border type. For unmanaged list boxes. deleted.Move list to top of page. Button Type Border Type Font Toggle On/Off State properties Font Size Border Color Fill Color Text Color FIG.Move list down one entry. the width of the new column is defined based on the last column in the list box. Page Down .Z-Order In order for a list box to function correctly on a panel.). font. These buttons are referred to as List Box Navigation buttons. End . the Z-Order (or State Draw order) of the subordinate buttons must follow the list box container's Z-Order in row-column sequential order. the properties (including width) of the new column are taken from the selected column. a button separate from the list box cannot be behind some of the subordinate buttons of the list box and on top of the rest of the subordinate buttons . Only experienced programmers who fully understand list box construction and the logic of Z-Order placement should use the list box in unmanaged mode.Move list up one entry. A managed list box's Z-Order cannot be interrupted by another buttons Z-Order (i.Move list up one page. 167) can be used to set the border. fill and text color for the List Box button's subordinate buttons. the specified column is sorted alpha-numerically in descending order. or when the list box layout is changed (bring-to-front. border color. Down .11 or higher) . etc. when the List Box Button is created. the minimum allowed is 4 pixels. Up .Navigation Buttons General buttons can be used to provide a means for the user to control a List Box button. Page Up . Here are the actions that a list box navigation button can perform (selectable via the Channel Code property). Sort Column (1-20) . fill color and text color for the On and Off states of the subordinate buttons. pasted. When resized in this way. When resizing the width of a column. If you select a column.Move list down one page. List Box Buttons . the new width is applied from right-to-left until the maximum width is met. For managed list boxes the Z-Order is managed for you when rows and/or columns are added. then click the Add Column button (in the List Box Toolbar). On first press. at the time that the button is created. you can manipulate each subordinate button of an unmanaged list box.

3. The smaller cyan buttons. 168 illustrates a List Box (in white).11 or higher) 155 . one above and one below the yellow button could be set to scroll the list box up and down: 6. 168 List Box with Navigation Buttons Creating List Box Navigation Buttons 1. If you haven't renamed any of the List Box buttons that have been added to this project. The third button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 3". 5. TPDesign4 (v2. "List Box 2". the three large cyan button in the figure above could be used to sort columns of the list box. Add a general button to the page and set the Channel Port to the List Box and set the Channel Code to the desired function. See the SystemGenerated Project File Names section on page 30 for details. five navigation buttons (in cyan) and a scroll bar (in yellow):. Alternatively you could leave these buttons out and program the external buttons (R4) to move the list up and down.Programming Tab . The second button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 2". they will be listed as "List Box 1".assuming that at least one List Box button is defined in the project).Working With List Box Buttons FIG. All three button's Channel Port should be set to the List Box (via the Properties Control . The first button's Channel Code would be set to "Sort Column 1". Set the top button's Channel Code to "Up" and the bottom button's Channel Code to "Down". Set both button's Channel Port to the List Box. For example. 7. 4. 2. etc. FIG.

Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Navigation Scroll Bar One option for List Box Navigation Buttons is to link a single bargraph button to a Listbox for navigating the list data up and down. 169): FIG. 169 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar .Level Code set to Scroll (option 2) Both state fill colors for On and Off are set to white. 170 List Box Navigation Scroll Bar . 156 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . 170): FIG. Now you have two visual options: The first is depicted below (FIG. Again.Level Code set to Scroll (option1) The Off state fill color is set to white and the On state fill color is set to green. The size of the list is not represented. These bargraphs depict position only. the user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list. Set the Level Port of the bargraph to the list box and set the Level Code to "Scroll". The second option (shown below) uses the slider property to indicate position (FIG. The user can drag the bargraph at runtime to scroll the list up and down.

To set these buttons up as a list box scroll bar set the button properties as follows: Button bg1 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: bottom mask Off Button State: Fill color set to Transparent On Button State: Fill color set to yellow TPDesign4 (v2. bg2 and bg3: FIG.Working With List Box Buttons Creating a List Box Feedback Scroll Bar The yellow button in FIG. 172 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar . 171 List Box Feedback Scroll Bar Scroll Bar Components FIG.Scroll Bar Components Buttons bg1 and bg2 are called Mask buttons. 172 shows that the yellow bargraph is actually made up of 3 bargraph buttons labeled bg1. They mask portions of button bg3 to visually indicate slider position and size. 171 serves as visual feedback to indicate the list size and position.11 or higher) 157 . It does not have any navigation capability: FIG.

Move up one entry Down . Up .Move down one page Home . This separates the data from the view so that List Data Table can be created statically or dynamically: TPD4 presents a list table view to create and define a static List Data Table. It is up to you to make sure a column exists in the table when defining a "Sort Column #".Move up one page Page Down . a panel without a touch overlay.Move down one entry Page Up . the button will sort the list box based on this column selection. List Data Tables are created via options in the Edit List Table dialog (FIG.Working With List Box Buttons Button bg2 properties: Level Port: set to List Box Level Code: top mask Off Button State: Fill color set to yellow On Button State: Fill color set to Transparent Button bg3 is not connected to the list box. edit and delete List Data Tables in support of List Box buttons. It is located behind buttons bg1 and bg2 and it's color will show through the transparent parts of bg1 and bg2 to represent the slider of the scroll bar.Enter the number of the column to use for alpha-numeric sorting (1-20). Once applied to a Navigation Button. supplied by the List Data Table). Once created. List Data Tables provide the information that is displayed on List Box Buttons. TPD4 will save the "List" or "Selection" version of "Up. such as the MAX AVP). the table can be designated for a list box through a property of the List Box Button. Down.no navigation command will be associated with this button. It could have been left out leaving the background color to show through as the slider. 173). List Data Table TPD4 supports the ability to create." automatically..11 or higher) . Since the purpose of List Box Buttons is to present data.. a list data table is used to manage the data of a List Box Button and can be designated through a property of the List Box Button. based on whether the PPF says the panel type supports "Selection" (i. The Sort Column entries contain the column titles (up to 20 columns.. Button bg3 is not really needed. and it's associated dialogs: 158 TPDesign4 (v2.e. TPD4 displays these list values regardless of the panel type.Move to bottom of page Sort Column (1-20) .Move to Top of page End . Navigation Buttons . However. You can also designate dynamic List Data Table data for a List Box Button that is created at runtime by the panel firmware.Channel Code Values Channel Code values that can be applied to Navigation buttons (via the Channel Code Programming property) include: none .

173 Edit List Table dialog List Data Table Properties The following list data table properties are editable: Table Name .11 or higher) 159 . Table Type . TPDesign4 (v2. the information displayed on the device is on the master and not the device. Opposed to static data.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Static List Box Data A static list box populates button information based on data stored on the panel. Therefore. Table Address Code . Table Address Port .The Address Port property is an integer value representing the port of the list data table.The Address Code property is an integer value representing the address code of the list data table. the device cannot display current state information provided by the master. the device will resume the last known static table event should power be cycled. Dynamic List data must be included in the NetLinx code running on the NetLinx Master in order to be available for use on List Box Buttons. Dynamic List Box Data Dynamic List Box data populates button information based upon communications between the panel and a NetLinx Master.Select either a static or a dynamic table type. no raw data will be entered by the user. Conversely. Note that unlike Dynamic List Box data. A dynamic table type is updated dynamically from the master with data.The Name is a character value used to identify the list table data.

Click OK to save your changes and proceed to the Column Types dialog (FIG. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. Address: Assign a Port and Address for the table. 2. 4. with data defined in NetLinx Code. so that the data in the List Data Table is displayed in the List Box button: 1. See the Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 163. Creating a Static List Data Table To create a Static List Data Table and associate it to a List Box Button. 174). See the Working With Function Codes section on page 207 for more information on Ports and Addresses. 175). Click New to open the Create New Table dialog (FIG. Select Panel > Edit List Tables (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. where you will specify basic properties for the new table. This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: 160 TPDesign4 (v2. Dynamic List Box Data. Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. however. as well as a List Data Table. time or temperature. with enough rows and columns to accommodate the data that you will enter into the List Data Table. date. If you haven't already done so. which populates the associated List Box Button with the data entered into a List Data Table via the Edit List Tables dialog. 174 Create New Table dialog Name of Table: Type a unique name for the table. Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button. Port: Assign a Port and Address for the table. 3.11 or higher) . create a new List Box button.Working With List Box Buttons Dynamic tables are great for creating parameters for displaying changing options. Number of Rows: Enter the number of rows to include in the table. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. See Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 171. 173 on page 159). if the device loses power it will not be able to display the last known states. i. which populates the List Box Button dynamically. Number of Columns: Enter the number of columns to include in the table..e. FIG. There are two variations on this concept: Static List Box Data.

Click OK to save your changes and return to the Edit List Tables dialog. Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu. 5.The column will contain a variable length text value.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. 176). This column is hidden from the user on the display and is used as navigation. resize the table. Page Flip . TPDesign4 (v2. Note that the Table Data display reflects the columns/rows and column names that you specified. Bitmap .The column will display valid page names that will be activated as page flips. At this point.The column will display bitmap images from a table of bitmap references. to assign a specific type to each column. As you create more new tables.The column will display icons from a table of icon references.Click to delete one or more selected rows from the table. each one is added to the Tables list. Also note that the table you just created is listed in the Tables list box (left side of the dialog). Icon . The following are the available column types to select from: Text . 6.Click to add a row to the table.This column will contain a port/channel code combination that is sent to the master upon activation of a particular row.11 or higher) 161 . Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order.Click to add a column to the table. Add Column . This option invokes the Add List Table Column dialog (FIG. You can select any table from the list to edit its properties. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column. Delete Row . use the command buttons along the top of this dialog to add/delete rows and columns from the active table. and specify a Port and Address to the table: Add Row . Use the options in this dialog to assign a name and type to each column in the table. 175 Column Types dialog Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table. Port/Channel Code .

162 TPDesign4 (v2. This option invokes the Change Port/Addr dialog. Edit the cell data as desired: When you click inside a particular cell: If column is of the type "Text". channel/variable text. and code parameters to one or more selected buttons. If the column is of the type "Bitmap". Power Assign .Click to open the List Table Power Assign dialog.Click to delete the column that currently has focus. you will be able to select a bitmap that has already been defined in the project.Click to expand each column by equal amounts. If the type is of the type "Channel Code".Assign to columns that will invoke a page flip when selected. 8. Icon . then a drop-down list of available pages is displayed. 176 Add List Table Column This dialog displays the number of columns indicated in the Create New Table dialog: Column: Displays the number associated with each column in the table.Click to resize the table to fit inside the Table Data window. Port/Addr . Channel Code . 7. Use the Table Port and Table Address fields to specify the port/address combination. then you will need to enter a channel port/code combination value. the user will be able to enter data.11 or higher) . Expand Columns .Click to shrink each column by equal amounts. Bitmap . Click OK to return to the Edit List Tables dialog. Name: Use these text fields to enter a unique name for each column.Assign to columns that will be used to display channel code information. Click the Column button to sort the columns in descending/ascending order.Assign to columns that will be used to display icons.Assign to columns that will be used to display bitmaps. Rename Column .Assign to columns that will be used to display text. Delete Column . Page Flip . Use the options in this dialog to set button-level actions.Click to assign a unique Port and Address combination for the table.Working With List Box Buttons FIG. Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the minimum allowed width. Fit Table . Type: Click inside these fields to access the Type drop-down menu. to assign a specific type to each column. Shrink Columns . The column type options include: Text (default) . Note that this option is disabled once the table reaches the maximum allowed width.This option allows you to rename the column label at the top of a column. If the column is of the type "Page Flip".

) button.11 or higher) 163 . FIG. you will be able to select an icon that has already been defined in the project. Attaching a Static List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a list Box Button.. Once a table is selected. 177 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3. In the General tab of the Properties Control Window. 177). Now you will attach the List Data Table to a List Box Button . Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (.Working With List Box Buttons If the column is of the type "Icon". It is this association that allows the data in the List Data Table to be displayed on the List Box Button. TPDesign4 (v2. 9. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.see Attaching a List Data Table to a List Box Button section on page 160. 1. In the Design View window. 2. 4. click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields. the Table Port and Table Address fields are automatically updated with that table's port/address assignments.. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. select one or more rows and click and drag them to another spot in the table. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. This dialog lists all Static List Data Tables in your project. Select the table that you want to attach to the selected List Box Button. as well as a Static List Data Table. select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. To move rows.

Creating a Dynamic List Data Table Dynamic List Data is provided to the associated List Box Button by the NetLinx Code running on the NetLinx Master that the panel is connected to. The program will prompt you to verify this action before the table deleted.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column.4. Use double-quotes to surround fields in which commas are needed. 1 . 173 on page 159). in the Tables list.0. column data information. ^LDA Adds a new row to an existing data list. • data2 = variable. Click OK to proceed. The number of data fields is limited only to the number of columns in the data list. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.Entry5.<primary data>.Anything for Lunch'" Adds a text row to the data list located at address 1. Primary data is required. Best of. 0 . Syntax: "'^LDA-<list address>.<data2>. Click the Delete command button. 164 TPDesign4 (v2. Use Data List Commands to define List Data in your NetLinx Code. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1. Attach the Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button There are two types of List Box Commands that can be used to define List Box Data in your NetLinx Code: Data List Commands Command Structure List View Data List Commands Data List Commands ^LDN Creates a new data list.. List box commands contain comma-delimited fields..Meatloaf.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode.. 2. Unique list addresses and names are handled programmatically. but you can use commas within the fields.Best of. "'^LDA-1.<list name>'" Variables: • list port = port where data resides • list address = address where data resides • column count = the number of data columns (includes hidden columns) • list name = User specified name for the data list Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.11 or higher) . Syntax: "'^LDN-<list port>.Working With List Box Buttons Deleting a List Data Table To delete a List Data Table from your project: 1. The primary data is set as Entry5. Select Panel > Edit List Tables to open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. 2. Meatloaf.my songs'" Creates a data list of 4 columns named "my songs" and places it at port 5. Select the table that you want to delete. "'^LDN-5. and Anything for Love are all cells within the new row. 1.<uniflag>. 3.<column count>. 4. address 1.<list address>.No unicode.

0. "'^LDC-1'" Clears all rows in data list located at address 1. TPDesign4 (v2.Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont..Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.<type>. 3 . Syntax: "'^LDT-<list address>.0'" Sets the column type for the data list located at address 1. Syntax: "'^LDC-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.) ^LDR Removes a row from an existing data list Syntax: "'^LDR-<list address>. "'^LDR-1. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166). 0 .1. the first column is Text. Syntax: "'^LDD-<list address>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.11 or higher) 165 .<column>. "'^LDT-1.<type>. "'^LDD-1'" Deletes the data list located at address 1. Column is the index of the first type to set.0. Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.No unicode.Channel.<primary data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • uniflag = indicates unicode.. ^LDD Deletes the data list. 1 .Entry5'" Removes the text row Entry5 from an existing data list at address 1.0.Page Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.Text. the second and third columns are also Text. The column type starts at column 1.'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number • type = subsequent columns.<uniflag>. additional types sent are set in order. ^LDC Clears all rows in a given list.. ^LDT Sets the column type for a data list. 0 . 4 .

) ^LDL Modifies the data in a single column field.<uniflag>.Music'" The field located in column 1.Uses unicode • primary data = the "key" data column. in the row with the primary data "Entry5" and in the data list located at the address of 1 is a text value of Music.<primary data>. When a backslash is parsed.11 or higher) . to escape another backslash (commas do not need to be escaped). Double quotes must be the first non-space character after the previous delimiter (. "'^LDL-1. 0 .No unicode. Data List Command Rules The following rules apply to several of the Data List Commands. as indicated in the Data List Commands table: Leading and trailing spaces are ignored before and after opening and closing double quotes. • new cell data = data information for a single field or "cell" Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. The information in this column provides each row with its uniqueness.) and the last nonspace character before the following delimiter (or end of command). then use the backslash to escape the double quote literal.1. 166 TPDesign4 (v2.<new cell data>'" Variables: • list address = address where data resides • column = the starting column number.Entry5. Syntax: "'^LDL-<list address>.<column>. Within double quotes. numbering starts at 1 • uniflag = indicates unicode. Any data field that has a double quote literal as its first character MUST use double quotes to delimit the field. Note: Data List Command Rules apply (see the Data List Command Rules section on page 166).Working With List Box Buttons Data List Commands (Cont. 1 . the next character is read as a literal value and the backslash is discarded. This can be used to load a data list that has long text fields. This is to allow double quote literals within the string bounded by double quotes. There are 2 cases in which you would use the backslash to escape a double quote literal within the field. the backslash (\) is used as an escape character.0.

tells the view which of the possible orderings to use. TPDesign4 (v2. Syntax: "'^LVO-<view address>. it results in a reverse sort. set the data list displayed.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View Command Structure List View ^LVO Filter sort.<list address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • list port = port where list resides • list address = address where data resides Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. When used on a reverse sorted list.Sort Bit 0x0002 . so that the 3 bit positions may be combined. "'^LVL-5. the reverse bit should not be used alone.2.<sort>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • sort: Bit 0x0001 .Filter Reverse bit (0x0002) reverses the list from whatever order it is currently in. When used on a sorted list.1'" Sets the data list viewed to the information located at port 2. it results in a forward sorted list. Syntax: "'^LVL-<view address>. In most cases.<list port>. address 1 and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5. "'^LVO-1.11 or higher) 167 . ^LVL Data list.Reverse Bit 0x0040 . Note that the <sort> field is a bitmask. Possible values for the sort field: 0 = None 1 = Forward Sort 2 = Reverse the current list ordering (may or may not be sorted) 3 = Reverse Sort 4 = Filter 5 = Forward Sort + Filter 6 = Reverse current + filter 7 = Reverse sort + filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. but should be used in combination with the sort bit (0x0003) such that it always results in a reverse sorted list.7'" Displays the data list according to the view definitions located at address 1 and filters and reverse sorts the list.

"'^LVC-3.. "'^LVP-5. display a new position.'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the starting column number Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. sets the table column each view column displays. ^LVS Sort. ^LVC Column display order.<column>.<column>.) ^LVP Set position.. numbering starts at 1 Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Syntax: "'^LVM-<view address>. then column 2 and then column 1.<column>.5. 168 TPDesign4 (v2.<index>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • index = the row number in sequential order. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3.<column>..1'" Sets the column display order to column 5 first..-4'" Shifts the display -4 and displays the list according to the view definitions located at address 2.3'" Sets the display position starting at the third row and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 5.numeric display shift Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.2.2. display a new position. Syntax: "'^LVS-<view address>. sets column order for sorting. Update must be called for changes to take effect. Syntax: "'^LVC-<view address>. Syntax: "'^LVP-<view address>. ^LVM Move.1'" Sets the column sort order to column 5 first. "'^LVS-3.<offset>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • offset = + / .11 or higher) ..'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • column = the column number to display Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVM-2. The data list is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 3.5. then column 2 and then column 1.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont..

Smith'" • Filters list based on column 2 such that only those rows whose column 2 contains Smith are displayed.5] { PUSH: { //Deletes any existing data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. or list data changes.0. • Filter is case sensitive. See Listbox Commands for more information on Listbox commands. Update must be called for changes to take effect.3'" //Adds rows to the data list at address 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.) ^LVF Filter. "'^LDN-1.11 or higher) 169 . Setting column to 1 or data to none makes the filtered ordering the same as sorted ordering. this will update the view to any sort. ^LVU Update.0. Note: This must be called after changes to list data.<uniflag>.0.<column>. "'LVF-1. 1 .Uses unicode • column = the starting column number.1. • The data is displayed according to the view definitions located at address 1. "'^LDA-1.0.0. Dynamic List Box buttons require the same List Box navigation buttons as static tables do. 0 . "10.my music'" //Specifies column types for the data list at address 1 starting at column 1 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'LVU-3'" Updates the data list and displays it according to the view definitions located at address 3.Working With List Box Buttons Command Structure List View (Cont.1. numbering starts at 1 • search data = the data on which to filter Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.5.0.1"'" TPDesign4 (v2. "'^LDD-1'" //Creates new 5-column data list at port 1. DEFINE_DEVICE Keypad = 11001:1:4 Keypad2 = 11001:2:4 KeypadMusic = 11001:10:4 DEFINE_EVENT BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. sets what column to use and what string to compare.No unicode.The Shins.01.<search data>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition • uniflag = indicates unicode.2. address 1 named "my music" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDT-1. Syntax: "'^LVF-<view address>. Dynamic List box Table Example The following is an example of a dynamic List Box table as it appears in NetLinx code. Chutes Too Narrow. filter. Kissing the Lipless. Syntax: "'^LVU-<view address>'" Variables: • view address = the address of the view definition Example: SEND_COMMAND Keypad.

3"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.The Shins. Chutes Too Narrow. "10.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Chutes Too Narrow. The 1 indicates forward sort. "10. Chutes Too Narrow.3] 170 TPDesign4 (v2.7] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2.0.9"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.10"'" //Sets the column number (4) to display in the view with address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. Chutes Too Narrow. "10. The 1 indicates forward sort.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 4 which contains titles) SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by Track number instead of title BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. Young Pilgrim. SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Turn a Square.The Shins.11 or higher) .5"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.The Shins.7"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.07. Those to Come. "'^LVS-2.0. "'^LVU-2'" } } BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Saint Simon. "10. "'^LDA-1. "'^LDA-1.2"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. Pink Bullets. "10.05.4'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.0. Chutes Too Narrow.0.1] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.The Shins. "10.The Shins.Working With List Box Buttons SEND_COMMAND Keypad.2] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. "'^LVC-2. Gone for Good.03. "'^LDA-1. "Mine's Not a High Horse".4"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVO-2.06.8"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad.04. "'^LVU-2'" } } //Sort the list by title instead of Track number BUTTON_EVENT[Keypad. Chutes Too Narrow.10. So Says I.0.0. "'^LDA-1.The Shins.0.6] { PUSH: { //Set the sort order for view address 2. "'^LDA-1.08.6"'" SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LDA-1. "10. Fighting in a Sack. Chutes Too Narrow.0.02. "10. Chutes Too Narrow.1'" //Updates the view at address 2 SEND_COMMAND Keypad.09.0. "10.The Shins. "'^LDA-1.The Shins. SEND_COMMAND Keypad.1'" //Set the column of the list on which to base the sort of the data displayed //at view address 2 (in this case column 1 which contains track numbers) SEND_COMMAND Keypad. "'^LVO-2. "'^LDA-1.The Shins. "'^LVS-2. Chutes Too Narrow.

9] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.']'" Attaching a Dynamic List Data Table to a List Box Button Once you have created a List Box Button.11 or higher) 171 . click inside either the List Table Port or the List Table Address fields.itoa(BUTTON.INPUT.0.) button.10] { PUSH: { SEND_COMMAND Keypad2.5] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. you are ready to associate the List Data Table to the List Box Button. Clicking inside these fields enables the browse (. FIG. select the List Box Button that you want to associate with a List Data Table. 4.. It is this association that allows the data in the List Data to be displayed on the List Box Button. In the General tab of the Properties Window.Working With List Box Buttons BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic..CHANNEL). Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Enter the Table Port and Table Address of the dynamic List Table.4] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. 1. "'^TXT-1.[Track '. and defined List Data in your NetLinx Code (with Data List Commands).7] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. Click this button to access the Attach Table To List Box dialog (FIG. 178 Attach Table To List Box dialog 3.8] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic. 178). 2. In the Design View window. TPDesign4 (v2.6] BUTTON_EVENT[KeypadMusic.

This opens the Change/Port Addr dialog (FIG. via the List Table Power Assign dialog. 179 Change/Port Addr dialog 4. 2.Working With List Box Buttons Changing Port and Address Assignments for a List Data Table 1. 164). You can use the Power Assign feature in the Edit List Tables dialog to quickly assign Port and Channel information for multiple columns in the List Data Table. Click the Port/Addr command button. showing the current Port/Address assignments for the selected table. 5.11 or higher) . Open the Edit List Tables dialog (FIG. 173 on page 159). FIG. 3. or click the toolbar button). Enter the new Port and Address assignments for this List Data Table in the Table Port and Table Address fields at the bottom of this dialog. Click OK to save the changes and close this dialog. Select a List Data Table (in the Tables list). 172 TPDesign4 (v2. via Panel > Edit List Tables.

11 or higher) 173 .Working With List Box Buttons TPDesign4 (v2.

11 or higher) .Working With List Box Buttons 174 TPDesign4 (v2.

Select View > Properties (or click the toolbar button) to display the Properties Window. and the original value is left unchanged. General and State properties can also be copied and pasted to a Design View using standard copy/paste menu and keyboard mechanisms. the value is copied to the new location. the cursor will change to indicate any fields that cannot accept the selected value. The selected property or state is automatically applied to all states of the drop target (whether a button or the page itself). the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates the number of buttons selected. TPDesign4 (v2. Another feature of the Properties window (all tabs) is that you can click on any value in the right column. 180). With an item selected. and drag it to another field. The Properties Window contains three tabs: General. 180 Properties Window Drag and Drop Support Properties from the General tab and states from the States tab can be dragged and dropped onto the Design View (to Buttons on the main Page. or the Page itself). Click the down arrow next to this field to view a list of all buttons on the active page. FIG. If one or more buttons are selected in the Workspace.Working With Properties Working With Properties Overview The Properties Window is typically located on the right side of the screen (although you may move it anywhere you like) and is used to view/edit page. popup page and button properties. and if the selected value is out of the acceptable range for a target field.11 or higher) 175 . When you release the mouse button. and the button type is general. Programming and States (FIG. and to view/edit the states information associated with each element in your project. the selected button is named "pause". Also note that the button name and type are displayed in the text box above the tabs (in the example below. Selecting a button from this list is the same as selecting it in a Design View window: the edit focus shifts to the selected button. Note that the title bar of the Properties Control window indicates which element of the workspace is currently selected. and the Properties window reflects the properties of the newly selected button. TPD4 alerts you with an error dialog.

All modifications are always done on the button with the edit focus. When you have multiple buttons selected. Also note that while you have multiple buttons selected. If the Apply To All button is not depressed. To make state-oriented changes across multiple states. This Apply To All button works on multiple button selections. but not on multiple states for a single button. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. the Prev or Next buttons will activate on the Properties Control window. the Prev or Next buttons are unavailable and every selected button has the edit focus. Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. 182). Use the Prev and Next buttons to cycle through the selected buttons to view each button's properties in the Properties Control window. To make changes that affect all states on a button at once. 181). FIG. All modifications are always on the button with the edit focus. use the All States option in the States tab (located directly above the other listed states for the selected button). only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. located at the bottom of the Properties Control window (next to the Apply to All button) are activated only when more than one button is selected on a page. Using the Prev and Next buttons The Prev and Next buttons. You may also notice that one or more (if not all) of the property values in the grid are blank. FIG. Hold down the Shift key and click to select multiple buttons.Working With Properties Using the Apply To All option The Apply To All button is located at the bottom of the Properties Window (FIG. 181 Apply To All button Use the Apply to All option to set button properties to edit multiple buttons simultaneously. and you select more than one button to act on. you will see a message that states that the value was only applied to those buttons for which it was valid. 182 Prev and Next buttons These buttons allow you to quickly edit the selected buttons individually. only one of them has the edit focus at any given time. The button represented in the Properties Control window is the one with edit focus. select the states that you want to edit and they will appear listed in the States tab of the Properties Control window. In the event that a value is appropriate for one (or more) buttons but inappropriate for others. provided that the change can be applied to them all. If the Apply To All button is depressed and you select more than one button to act on. Typing in or changing a value in any property box will immediately affect all selected buttons. The only values that will display in the grid while the Apply To All button is depressed are those values that are common among all selected items.11 or higher) . and the Apply To All button is not depressed (FIG. 176 TPDesign4 (v2.

With the Selection tool (FIG. click the checkboxes to select the Properties of the selected Button. 185). 184 Property Painter dialog 3. Select Grab Properties Tool from the Edit menu. Page or Popup Page: 1. In the Property Painter dialog. Page or Popup Page. Page or Popup Page that you want to grab. FIG. 183). or click the toolbar button to activate the Grab Properties tool (FIG. Click Grab Selected to grab (copy) the selected Properties. select another Button.11 or higher) 177 . 183 Grab Properties Tool 2. The following example shows the Property Painter dialog invoked as a result of selecting a General-type button (FIG. The set of selected properties (but not their values) may be named and saved for later use by entering a name in the Property Set text box. and paint (copy) them onto another Button. 5. Page or Popup Page that is clicked on. See Saving a Properties Set.Working With Properties Working With The Property Painter The Grab Properties and Paint Properties tools work together with the Property Painter dialog to allow you to grab (copy) the properties of a selected Button. 185 Selection Tool TPDesign4 (v2. Page or Popup Page in the Design View. FIG. FIG. 184). 4. Click on a Button or Page in a Design View window to take a snapshot of the properties and values of the Button. the Design View context menu. This action invokes the Property Painter dialog (also accessible via the View menu).

178 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) . 6. 186). 186 Property Painter dialog Saving a Properties Set Use the Property Set feature in the Property Painter dialog to save a set of Properties (but not their values) that can be recalled later. FIG. Click Paint Selected to apply the properties that were "grabbed" from the first item to the selected item(s) (FIG.Working With Properties Hold the Shift key and left-click to apply the properties to multiple selected Buttons.

Column 2 on the List Box Button will display column 4 from the List Data Table. you could enter (without quotes) "3 4 5 2 1" to populate the List Box Button as follows: Column 1 on the List Box Button will display column 3 from the List Data Table. Auto-Repeat Select wether to apply auto-repeat to the button. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. using a List Data Table that contains 5 columns. This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. The options are high-color (16-bit) or true color (24-bit). 187 Column Display Order For example. Animate Time Up The time intervals between states as the button animates from the Off to the On state. and select the desired style from the drop-down list There are several types of border styles to choose from. FIG. Border Style To change the Border Style for the selected button. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Column 3 on the List Box Button will display column 5 from the List Data Table. Animate Time Down The timer intervals between states as the button animates from the On to the Off state. click Border Style. Auto-repeat causes the button to constantly cycle through its states (Yes/No. Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. default = No). These properties are editable via the General tab of the Properties Window: Above Popups This option allows you the selected button(s) on a Main page to always remain on top of any popup pages (Yes/No. and they all can all be assigned to both popup pages and buttons. Column Display Order Enter a string of space-delimited integers to specify the order in which the columns in the List Data Table are displayed in the List Box button. Default = high-color (16-bit) This setting should match that of the host PC. from left to right. TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 179 . default = No). Color Depth Select the color depth to be applied to the button. This option is not available for buttons on a popup page. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2). This property is available for Multi-State buttons only. This value is in 1/100th second increments (default = 2).Working With Properties General Properties All General properties (including Page.

This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. If the button is set as Disabled (select Yes from the drop-down). Column 5 on the List Box Button will display column 1 from the List Data Table. where you can type the description.. where you can type the description. 180 TPDesign4 (v2. when a List Data Table is assigned. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. Group Use this field to add the selected Popup Page to a specific Popup Page Group. To add a group. with a space between each number) "3 1 5". if the user wishes to sort the table based on column 1.Working With Properties Column 4 on the List Box Button will display column 2 from the List Data Table. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. Display Type Click to select the display type to be invoked by this Text Input button (single line or multiple lines). and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. This property is enabled only for List Box Buttons. then column 1. when a List Data Table is assigned. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. the value would be "1".) button to select a color from the Colors dialog. Description Use this text field to enter a general or functional description for this button. Compression Select wether to compress the image on the button (Yes/No..) button to open the Enter Text dialog. and a List Table Address and Port is assigned. This will create a corresponding folder under the Popup Pages folder in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). For example. Disabled Indicates how the selected button will be rendered. One or more columns can be specified. To place a popup page in a particular popup group. the button will be rendered by the panel in a subdued state (default = No). Column Sort Order Specifies the column sort order for the list table data before populating the list box control. type any value in the Group field. and finally column 5. The value is a space delimited string of integers representing columns in the List Data Table. Click the browse (. simply drag the desired popup pages into the desired group folder. Click the down arrow to select from the list of available cursor types. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only.. default = No). The default is single line.) button to open the Enter Text dialog.. This property is available for Popup Pages only.. the value would be (without quotes. Multiple column sorting is useful when a column contains duplicates or more than one cell is empty. Cursor Name Select the desired visual style for the joystick cursor. Click the browse (..11 or higher) . If however the user wishes the table data to be sorted by column 3. Cursor Color Specify a color for the Joystick cursor. Click the browse (.

9999). This property is available for Popup Pages only. A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows to be displayed as the literal character. enter any character other than those shown in the topics above. in pixels. This property is available for Popup Pages only. If you have selected a left or right slide effect (including slide/fade effects).9999). An input mask allows you to force the user to enter the correct type of characters (numbers vs. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect (including slide/fade effects). these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. to change or force character case. to create multiple logical fields that act as a single field. you can set the Y position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . and/or fill the field from the right or the left. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. In some cases.Working With Properties Height Size values. you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. Hide Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the selected Hide effect. the Hide Effect X Pos. characters). including spaces and symbols. For example. depending on the page design and graphics. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). If the button is set as Hidden (select Yes from the drop-down). You can edit these fields to apply specific dimension info for the button. Input Mask This field allows you apply a mask to user input on the panel. the button will disappear when transferred to the panel (default = No).11 or higher) 181 . to specify a range of characters / numbers for each field. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. Depending on the Slide Hide Effect selected. suggest a proper format with fixed characters. \A is displayed as just A. measured in 1/10th-second increments. To define a literal. TPDesign4 (v2. to be invoked when the popup is closed (hidden). The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). the Hide Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Hide Effect. Hide Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. or Hide Effect Y Pos. you can set the X position for the start of the hide effect (range = 0 . to set the input as required or optional. Hide Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. Hidden Indicates wether or not the selected button is displayed on the panel. The Height rows indicate the vertical dimensions of the selected button.

11 or higher) . 182 TPDesign4 (v2. A list box column contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same width. one subordinate button is created automatically. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page.Working With Properties Left Position values. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. At creation. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Port number of a data table (static or dynamic). This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. List Display A string formatted as a space-delimited list of table column numbers in a List Box Button that the columns of the List Data Table are assigned to. This property is available for List Box buttons only. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. The maximum number of columns that can be set/created is 10. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. List Column Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between columns of buttons. List Column An integer value representing the total number of columns in the List Box button. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). The width of the first column is determined at creation by the width of the list box control. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). List Table Port An integer value representing the port of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. The number of subordinate buttons in a column depends on the number of rows defined for the list box. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. and the minimum is 1. and only when a List Table Port is assigned. in pixels. to open the Attach Table To List Box dialog. justified vertically.

This button property is available for List Box buttons only. If the user presses the scroll bar down button. List Managed This display-only field indicates wether the selected List Box Button is in Managed or Unmanaged mode. When set to no. In this way. List Table Wrap specifies that the list box will "wrap around" and start at the beginning again if the user presses the next page button when the list is at the end of the table data. The options in this dialog allow you to select a static table that has already been created for in the project. TPDesign4 (v2. This dialog will populate both the "List Table Port" and "List Table Address" properties when finished. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. The same goes for scrolling up. Scrolling past the beginning would wrap back around to the end of the list.11 or higher) 183 . This property is enabled only when a List Table Address and Port are assigned. the next page of data will show up in the list box. You may alternatively enter the port/address manually (in the Table Port and Table Address text fields in the dialog). This button property is available for List Box buttons only.Working With Properties List Table Address An integer value representing the address of the List Data Table that the List Box button is attached to. List Offset Enabled A flag (yes/no) indicating whether an offset of five pixels is applied to the List Box Container all the way around the subordinate buttons of the list box (default = on). If set to "no" (default setting). therefore scrolling would go no further than the beginning or end of the table data. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. beginning and end limits are present for the list box. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. List Table Wrap This property specifies a behavior for a list box when attached to two or more pages of table data. the subordinate buttons will completely cover the list box container (unless List Row Padding and/or List Column Padding is set to a value greater than 0). A page of table data is simply how much of the table data that can fit on the list box. the list becomes cyclical. When set to "yes". to open the Attach Table To List Box Dialog. It is used so that the List Box Container can be selected via the Design View. List Filter Column This property sets the column order for filtering data. The other way is to press the Browse button (click inside this field to enable). This button property is available for List Box buttons only. There are two ways to define this property: One is to edit the property directly by typing the Table Address number of a data table (static or dynamic).

The number of subordinate buttons in a row depends on the number of columns defined for the list box. This is useful for Panels like the R4 where the screen is very small. So even though a column's state has marquee enabled. it can have a different height specification than all the other rows through the Preferred Row Height property. In unmanaged mode this property is visible (but still read-only) for the unmanaged subordinate buttons. List Selectable This property is a value representing the current selection type: single or multi. This button property is available for List Box buttons in Managed Mode only. and the minimum is 1. List Row An integer value representing the total number of rows in the List Box button. This property is present only when the List Box button is in Managed Mode. This property is read-only and cannot be edited. List Preferred Row Height An integer value indicating the height of the preferred row in the list box. and the Preferred Row is greater than zero "0". If a row is specified (greater than 0) then the row has some special properties. A list box row contains one or more subordinate buttons of the same height. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. List Row Height An integer value indicating the height (in pixels) of all the rows in the list box (i. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. List Row Padding An integer value indicating the number of pixels between rows of buttons. Zero "0" disables the preferred row functionality. only the cell in the preferred row implements the marquee feature on the panel. one subordinate button is created automatically. by enabling preferred row all marquee state properties (Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat) defined for each column are now exclusive to the preferred row. First.Working With Properties List Preferred Row An integer value designating a particular row in the list box as the preferred row. justified horizontally. 184 TPDesign4 (v2. Only the preferred row can have a separate height specification. The height of one row bigger than the rest is needed for easy thumb access via the touch screen. This property is present only when the List Box is in Managed Mode. Second. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. This button property is available for List Box Container buttons only.e. The List Preferred Row value has the range from 0 to Row Count (default = 0).11 or higher) . All other rows are specified the same height. This way you can keep track of which row the button is identified with. Marquee state properties are column-based properties. The maximum number of rows that can be set/created is 50. the height of all the buttons) excluding the preferred row. At creation. This button property is available for List Box buttons only. The height of the first row is determined at creation by the width of the list box control.

click Name in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the text field. When new buttons are created. etc). and you cannot apply the Job name (set in the New Project Wizard) to a page. Button/Popup 2. This button property is available for Text Input buttons only. page and popup page. Click the browse button (. password 1.Working With Properties Lock Button Name This option controls how the name of the selected button is managed by the program (Yes/No. "Button 1 : general". where you can type the new name. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. S See the Page Flips section on page 107 for details. by default the buttons are automatically given a sequential two-part name composed of the button number (relative to the number of buttons already created in the Project) and button type. password 3.) to open the Button Page Flip Actions dialog. "Button 2 : multi-state general". Modal This setting (Yes/No) controls the user's ability to press a button outside the boundaries of the popup page when the popup page is visible. Password Character Type a single character to be used as the password to access this Text Input button on the panel. See the Generated Button Names section on page 99 for details. Button/Popup 3 etc. Name To give the button a specific name other than the default Button/Popup 1. The range is 0-2000 (default = 0). Default = 5900. TPDesign4 (v2. separated by a colon (i.. password 2.e. Password The password supplied by the designer.11 or higher) 185 . Remote Host The IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. default = No). This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. Page Flip Use this option to assign a page flip (type and target page) to the selected button(s).. This password must match the password entered into the PC remote desktop server. use this drop-down list to select which of four possible passwords to apply to the selection (none. Password Protection This option allows you to apply password protection to the selected button(s). This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. or password 4). This button property is available for Text Input buttons only.. Max Text Length Use this field to specify the maximum number of characters allowed to be entered via this button. You can set up to four passwords per panel. Remote Port The port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed. You must use a unique name for each button.

states are removed from the end of the set. 186 TPDesign4 (v2. scaling is disabled. option may become available: This property is available for Popup Pages only. If the count is decreased. you can set the Y position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . Show Effect This property allows you to apply a transition effect to the popup page. default = No). you may decide to start the slide at some other point than the absolute left edge of the page. to be invoked when the popup is opened (shown). This feature allows the state count to be changed via Edit > Find & Replace and with the Paint Properties tool. the popup page will always appear at the position established during popup page design each time it is displayed. If you have selected a left or right slide effect. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only. depending on the page design and graphics. The default is 0 (the left edge of the page). Slider Name Select the desired visual style for the bargraph slider from the list of Slider types. In some cases. By default. If you have selected a top or bottom slide effect.. To change the state count for the selected button. This property is available for Popup Pages only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Use this option to synchronize your popup page transition effects. State Count This field indicates the number of states currently associated with the selected button. Slider Color Select a color to apply to the bargraph slider.9999). This property is available for Bargraph buttons only.Working With Properties Reset Pos. This property is available for Popup Pages only. Scale To Fit Select wether to automatically scale the image to fit the button (Yes/No.. This property is available for Multi-State (General and Bargraph) buttons only. Show Effect X/Y Pos Measured in pixels. If the state count is increased. This might be desirable if the popup page contains a button which provides the end user with the ability to move the popup page at will. Click the browse button (. either the Show Effect X Pos. The default setting is 0 (top edge of the page). This property is available for Bargraph buttons only.9999). new states are added to the end of the set as a duplicate of the last existing state. Depending on the Slide Show Effect selected. the Show Effect X/Y Pos (position) fields allow you to specify the starting point on the page for the selected Slide Show Effect.11 or higher) .) to open the Colors dialog. measured in 1/10th-second increments. Show Effect Time This property allows you to specify the total amount of time it will take to execute the Fade Hide effect. click inside the text field and enter the desired number. or Show Effect Y Pos. you can set the X position for the start of the slide transition effect (range = 0 . On Show If this option is turned on.

For example. in 1/10th second increments. Popup Page Timeout specifies how long a popup page will remain open and active without a button press (default = 0). Active Touch requires total transparency on the button in order to work. Touch Map Click the browse button (.Working With Properties TakeNote Enabled Select wether to enable TakeNote functionality on the selected Computer Control button (Yes/No. The Left and Top rows indicate the position of the selected button. TakeNote Port Enter the port to be used on the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button (default = 1541). For example. Note that if you select the button and manually move it around on the page. by using transparencies you could create a button that appears to be round (although the actual shape of the button is rectangular). This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. Active Touch will not work.) to select an image to use as the Touch Map image. Pass through: This style allows the user to press "through" one button to press another button underneath. in pixels. Touching the transparent areas of the button does not active the button. TPDesign4 (v2. Bounding box: This touch style forces the panel to respond to a press anywhere within the rectangular boundaries of the button (regardless of transparencies or border styles). if you created a totally transparent button with no border and an icon. You can edit these fields to apply specific positioning info for the button. Timeout This property allows you to specify the Popup Page Timeout. these values constantly update to indicate the button's current position. in which case you may not the button to respond if the user presses outside of the circular border. Top Left/Top . Touch Style This selection drop-down allows you to set a "touch style" for the selected button(s). Touch style describes the way buttons behave when pressed. TakeNote Host Enter the IP or DNS resolvable address of the PC whose desktop is to be displayed on this TakeNote button.. This button property is available for TakeNote buttons only. in terms of the shape and border style used. If Overall Opacity is set to any other value (for partial transparency). If there is no other button underneath the pass through button. only the icon would respond to a press. and only if the Value Direction is set to Touch Map.. To make a button totally transparent. This button property is available for Multi-State Bargraph buttons only. This property is available for Popup Pages only. This button property is available for Computer Control buttons only.Position values.11 or higher) 187 . only the border will respond to a press. Similarly. Areas of the button that are totally transparent will not respond to a press. Active touch: This touch style limits the active touch area to the visible area of the button. relative to the upper-left corner of the Design View window. the user simply presses the page (with no resulting action). default = No). if a transparent button has a visible border but no icon. set the Overall Opacity (state) setting to 0. via the Select Resource dialog.

Horizontal. This property indicates the horizontal width in pixels of every button in the column. Note that if you select the button and manually resize it on the page. Value Direction Click the down arrow to select the orientation of the bargraph. 188 TPDesign4 (v2. the options are Vertical or Horizontal. This property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons only.Working With Properties Type The Type (button type) defaults to the button type that was set when the button was created. Width Size value. click Type in the Properties Control Window (General tab) to activate the button type drop-down menu.11 or higher) . To change a selected button's type. For non-multi state Bargraph buttons. containing a list of all available button types. You can edit this field to apply specific dimension info for the button. the options are Vertical. For Multi State Bargraph buttons. these values constantly update to indicate the current dimensions. or Touch Map.

only while the button is being pressed. momentary. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project.11 or higher) 189 .the button will change states (Off to On) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event inverted channel . Command Port Select or enter the port to which the command string output will be applied. Channel Code Select or enter the channel code sent to the master on the selected port. Enter the command output and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). TPDesign4 (v2. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality.the button will change states. Click the browse button (. or none). The combination of Channel Port and Channel Code must be unique. 1. Channel Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's channel code will be applied.Working With Properties Programing Properties All Programming properties (including Page.. you can click on Channel Code to open the Basic Codes options. Address Port Select or enter the port to which the selected button's address code will be associated. Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. none . If the Channel Port is set to 0 = Setup Port.the button will always display the Off state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) channel .the button will always display the On state (and will not indicate a Push/Release) momentary . and only if a Level Code has been assigned. 2. blink . blink. to expand the Advanced Codes menu to show the available functions. Command Output Specify the command string sent to the master on button push. The combination of Address Port and Address Code must be unique. Click the '+' sign beside Computer Control. inverted channel. then click on Advanced Codes to access the advanced codes menu.. These properties are editable via the Programming tab of the Properties Window: Address Code Select or enter the address code sent to the master on the selected port.the button will change states (On to Off) on a Push/Release to indicate a channel event always on .the button will "blink" (switch between On and Off states) on a Push/Release Level Aux This (read-only) field indicates the auxiliary level sent to the Master on the selected port.) to open the Enter Text dialog. Feedback Select the type of feedback to associate with this button (channel. always on.

Relative or None). if this value is set to 1000. Active Centering: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. this value can be entered as a positive integer (to raise the relative level setting) or a negative integer (to lower the relative level setting). Select Auto-Assign to automatically assign a level code to this button. Level Port Select or enter the port to which the Level Code will be applied. Select the desired level function: Display Only: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button that only displays level information (but cannot be used to control levels).11 or higher) . the user can hold the button down for one second to cause the level to raise or lower repeatedly (according to the specified Level Control Value) without having to press the button each time.Working With Properties Level Code Select or enter the level code sent to the Master on the selected port (none. These codes cannot be re-assigned to other pages or buttons in the panel project. Drag: This option creates an active bargraph or joystick button that responds to a relative touch distance on the button after the initial touch. Level Function This option is only available for Bargraph. Level Control Type These options allow General buttons to directly control a level without the need for NetLinx code. 2 or auto-assign). When set to Drag. 190 TPDesign4 (v2. Range Aux Inverted If set to Yes. Level Control Value For Absolute level control. Select 0 (Setup port) or 1 as the level port for this button. Select a level control type for the selected button (Absolute. the user can touch anywhere inside the joystick button and move the level (according to the Range Drag Increment setting). For example. Active: This option creates a bargraph or joystick button for controlling levels according the other button parameters set here. to allow for glide-point style controls. These options require additional Level Control parameters to be defined. Relative: The button increments or decrements the current level value by a fixed amount. For relative level control. this value determines the amount of adjustment relative to the current level resulting from this button. this value determines the level value that will be recalled by this button. The NXP-PLV (PosiTrack Video Touch Panel) uses a set of reserved channel and level codes that are reserved for hardware functionality. Level Control Repeat Time This value determines the repeat time (in 1/1000th-second increments) for Relative level control. Drag Centering: This option creates an active drag bargraph or joystick button that returns to it's center position when released. This button property is available for Joystick buttons only. For Relative level control. only the Level Aux range is inverted (default = No). Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons. 1. Absolute: The button acts like a preset and sets the level to the desired value.

Working With Properties

Range Drag Increment
This field allows you to specify the amount of change that will be registered by one full drag across the control, to allow for fine/coarse adjustments. This property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only, and only if Drag is selected as the Level Function.

Range Low
Set the bottom of the level range (0-255).

Range High
Set the top of the level range (0-255).

Range Inverted
If set to Yes, the range is inverted, so that the top of the level range is 0 and the bottom of the range is 255 on both the X and Y axis (default = No). This button property is available for Bargraph, Multi-State Bargraph and Joystick buttons only.

Range Time Up
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the bottom to the top of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

Range Time Down
Specify the amount of time (in 1/10th seconds) it will take for the bargraph to go from the top to the bottom of the specified range (default = 2). This button property is available for General buttons, if a Level Control Type (other than "none") has been selected. This button property is available for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons, and only if one of a specific set of Level Functions was selected. These are: Active Active Centering Drag Drag Centering It is not applicable if the Level Function property is set to "display only".

String Output
Specify the output string sent to the master on button push, on the specified String Output Port.

1. Click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog. 2. Enter the output string and click OK (or Cancel to exit without saving). String Output Port
Select or enter the port to which the String Output will be applied.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

191

Working With Properties

State Properties
All State properties (including Page, Popup Page and Button properties) are listed below. These properties are editable via the States tab of the Properties Window:

Bitmap
To apply an image file as the background image to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image file from among those imported into the project. If pairs of image resources exist that end in *off/*on, *f/*n, *0/*1, *1/*2 (case insensitive), and the first in the pair is applied to the Off state of a General button, the second will be automatically applied to the On state to make it easier to set up images on a General button.

Bitmap Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Bitmap X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Bitmap Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the bitmap (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button, for each state. This property is available only if the Bitmap Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Border Color
To change the border color for the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Border Name
To change the Border Name for the selected button, click Border Name, and select the desired border from the drop-down list. If a Border Style was specified (in the General tab), then the borders listed here are limited to those contained in the selected Border Style. If no Border Style was specified (none), then all border names are available in the provided list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Chameleon Image
This field allows you to apply a Chameleon Image to the selected state(s). This property is only available only if the Border Name has been set to None. Chameleon Images can be used to create special effects such animated glow and drop-shadows. Click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select an image to apply as a Chameleon Image.

192

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Draw Order
This field allows you to specify the order in which the elements of a button, page or popup page are drawn. By default, the draw order is: 1) fill, 2) bitmap,3) icon, 4) text, 5) border. Click the browse button (...) to access the State Draw Order dialog to change the draw order. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Fill Color
To change the fill color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For bargraph buttons, the preview image in the State Manager works differently than for the other button types. For bargraph buttons, the on and off states are used to indicate a level setting rather than a push/release. As a result, the button image in the Design View window will indicate the bargraph button as it will appear on the touch panel, but the thumbnails in the State Manager window indicate each state as a separate preview image. For example, the bargraph button shown below uses yellow as the On state fill color, and green as the Off state fill color. In the State Manager window you would see the On state (yellow) and the Off state (green) as individual thumbnails. The Button Preview window works differently for bargraph buttons than for the other button types. Rather than using the Push button to view the different states, click and drag on the slider with your mouse cursor (in the Button Preview window) to preview the feedback. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Font
To change the font used for text on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Font dialog, where you can select a Font, Style and Size for the button text. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the icon (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Icon Slot
To apply an icon to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a slot assignment (icon) to apply.

Icon X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

Icon Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the icon (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is only available only if the Icon Justification State property has been set to Absolute.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

193

Working With Properties

Marquee Direction
This field allows you to specify the direction in which marquee text will move. By default, this property is set to Disabled. Click inside the field to activate the down arrow, to select from the other marquee direction options: The marquee direction options include: Disabled - When this property is set to Disabled, the text on the button will not be treated as marquee text. Scroll left - Text scrolls horizontally to the left. Scroll right - Text scrolls horizontally to the right. Ping-pong - Text "bounces" back and forth horizontally between the left and right boundaries of the button area. Scroll up - Text scrolls vertically upward. Scroll down - Text scrolls vertically downward. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Marquee Repeat
This field allows you to specify whether the marquee text element on a button will appear to repeat the text string once it has moved all the characters beyond the boundaries of the button. The movement of marquee text is specified by the Marquee Direction button state property. By default, this property is set to No. To enable repeat marquee text, click inside the field to activate the down arrow to change to Yes. Both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes.

Overall Opacity
Use this field to specify the level of opacity for the selected button (0 - 255, where 0 is totally transparent, and 255 is totally opaque). The default is 255. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Scale Bitmap To Fit
This property is available only if the Bitmap selected for this button/state is a dynamic image. Note that this option is available only for Dynamo Dynamic Images (not for Dynamo Resource Images) This option scales the Dynamo Dynamic Image down to fit the container button, popup or page. It will not scale Dynamo Dynamic Images up to fit. To automatically scale the dynamic image (down only) to fit the button, click the down-arrow and select Scale To Fit (default = No). The options available for Scale Bitmap To Fit depend on the panel type associated with your project: No - The Dynamo Resource image will not be scaled at all, and the image will be arbitrarily centered on the container button, popup or page. If the Dynamo Resource image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. This is the default setting. Use the Bitmap Justification State property to position the dynamic image bitmap within the button borders. 2x - This option doubles the size of the Dynamo Resource image. Note that this option is only available for Dynamo Resource Images (not for Dynamo Dynamic Images). See the AMX Touch Panels that Support Dynamo Resource Images section on page 6. If the resulting image is larger than it's container, the image will be cropped on all sides by equal amounts. Scale To Fit - This option automatically resizes the Dynamo Dynamic image, maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.

194

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Sound
To change or apply a new sound file to the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Select Resource dialog, where you can select a sound file (WAV or MP3) from among those imported into the project.

Streaming Source
Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is available only if Streaming Video is selected as the Video Fill). Streaming Video is only available as a Video Fill option if the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video.

Text
To change or enter the text to be displayed on the selected state(s), click the browse button (...) to open the Enter Text dialog, where you can type the new button text. Use the Preview Using Font option to view the text as it will appear in the selected font, style and size (on by default). Unicode characters may be entered via the Enter Text dialog only (not through in-place editing in the States tab of the Properties Control window). When Unicode text is input, the name of the button will not match it's Off state text. Formatting codes can be used in the state text for Bargraph and Multi-State Bargraph buttons.

Text Color
To change the text color for the selected state, click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in a selected column.

Text Effect
Text effects are graphic effects that can applied to button/page/popup text (for example, the Glow effect applies a neon glow or halo effect to the text on the selected button/state(s). Each text effect is available in several variations ((i.e. Small, Medium, Large or XtraLarge). To apply a text effect to the button text, click the browse button (...) to access the Text Effect sub-menu. This sub-menu presents all available text effects, sorted by type. Click the + symbol next to any effect type in the sub-menu to see all of the variations on that effect. Once you have selected a text effect, use the Text Effect Color field to specify a color for the effect. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Effect Color
If you have selected to apply a text effect, use this field to specify the color of the selected effect. Click the browse button (...) to open the Colors dialog. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Text Justification
To set or reset the justification setting for the button text (on the selected state(s)), click the down-arrow and select an option from the list. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column

Text X Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

195

Working With Properties

Text Y Offset
To apply an X and/or Y offset to the text (on the selected state(s)), enter the value for the desired offset (in pixels) in these text fields. Alternatively, you can click the browse button (...) to open the Image/Text Positioning dialog where you can make several alignment adjustments to the bitmap, icon and text elements of the button. This property is available only if the Text Justification State property has been set to Absolute).

Video Cropping
Use this field to specify the number of scan lines to be removed from both the top and bottom of the video signal. For best results, set the video button's aspect ratio to match the video input aspect ratio. This property is only available if the Video Fill State property is set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video.

Video Fill
Click the down arrow to select from a drop-down list of video formats that are supported by the touch panel specified in your project. Video-capable Modero panels support Composite video, and Enhanced Modero panels support Composite, Component/RGB and Streaming video formats. If you have specified the NXP-TPI4, click the down-arrow to select from the list of available video slots on the TPI4 (video slot 1,2,3 or 4) to use as the source for this video fill. If you select Streaming Video as the Video Fill, then the Streaming Source state property is made available. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream. This property is only available for video-capable panels. See the Video Capabilities for Modero Panels section on page 5 and the Video Capabilities for Enhanced Modero Panels section on page 5 for details.

Video Touch Pass-Thru
Select Yes from the drop-down menu to enable video pass-thru (disabled by default). This property is enabled only if the Video Fill State property has been set to either Composite Video or Component/RGB Video. Video pass-thru allows you to pass touch/control information from a touch input device (touch panel, mouse or keyboard) through a NXP-TPI/4 to a controlled device with video-out capabilities. This feature is also used in conjunction with the MPS (mouse pass-thru) and KPS (keyboard passthru) commands.

Word Wrap
Use this option to enable the wrapping of text strings that are too long to be displayed across the page on one line. Click the down-arrow and select Yes or No from the drop-down list (default = No). Note that both Marquee Direction and Marquee Repeat are disabled if Word Wrap is set to Yes. For List Box buttons, this property applies to all the buttons in the selected column.

Using the All States Option
Use the All States option (in the States tab of the Properties Control window) to apply any changes you make to all states on the selected button. Note that if you have multiple buttons selected (Shift+click to select multiple buttons a page), the All States option only affects states for the button that has Edit Focus. The button with edit focus would be the last one selected, and is indicated by having red-colored square handles (as opposed to the black squares that indicate that a button is selected, but does not currently have edit focus).

196

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

When the first instance of the criteria is found. border style. which allows you to search for any button property value either within the currently open Page. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Select Select All to close the Find dialog and select every button that meets the criteria. Open the Find dialog (FIG. To select all General button properties. and state count (among many others). you can perform a search based on button type.11 or higher) 197 . Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. You can include any General or State button property as search criteria. In the Search Criteria table. in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. the Find In Page dialog is compressed to only show the buttons that satisfy the search criteria. To search for button properties: 1. FIG. 188 Find dialog 2. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page. Select Find Next to continue the search. You can specify to search for any General or State button property. For example. select either Entire Panel or Current Page.Working With Properties Searching For Button Properties Select Edit > Find (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find dialog. based on the specified criteria and scope. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. In the Search Scope area. and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. or any combination of search criteria. 188). The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. TPDesign4 (v2. 4. click in the checkbox next to the General heading. use the Find Next button to search the current page only. 3. select the button properties to use as the search criteria. to select all State-oriented button properties. name. If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel. or across the entire Project. the Select All button is disabled. click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

Working With Properties

When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

Searching and Replacing Button Properties
Select Edit > Find & Replace (or click the toolbar button) to access the Find and Replace dialog, which allows you to find (and optionally replace) any button property value with another value of your choosing. You can specify the scope of the search to either the currently open Page only, or across the entire Project (FIG. 189).

FIG. 189 Find and Replace dialog,

To search and replace button properties:

1. Open the Find & Replace dialog (see above). 2. In the Search Criteria table, select the button properties to use as the search criteria. You can include any
General or State button property as search criteria. General and State properties are separated into two sections (labeled as General and States). Scroll down to view all of the available button properties that can be used as search criteria. Click the minus symbol (-) next to the General and States headings to collapse the sections. Click the plus symbol (+) to expand the views. To select all General button properties, click in the checkbox next to the General heading; to select all State-oriented button properties, click in the checkbox next to the States heading.

3. In the Search Scope area, select either Entire Panel or Current Page.
If the scope of the search is set to Entire Panel, the Select All button is disabled, in which case you can use the Find Next button to cycle through the pages that contain buttons whose values match the search criteria. If the scope of the search is set to Current Page, use the Find Next to search the current page only, based on the specified criteria and scope.

4. In the Replace Values table, select the button properties to use as the replace values. The Replace Values
do not necessarily have to match the Search Criteria (although they may). It is also possible to replace multiple values or establish multiple search criteria. For example, to change the Border Style on one or more buttons, select Border Style in the Search Criteria table, then select the particular border style to search for from the drop-down list. Then, select

198

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Properties

Border Style in the Replace Values table, and select the desired replacement border style from the dropdown list. Repeat this process for as many other button properties as needed.

5. When the first instance of the criteria is found, the Find In Page dialog is displayed, listing the buttons
that satisfy the search criteria, and the first button found that satisfies the search criteria is selected in the Design View. Select Find Next to continue the search. Select Replace All to close the Find dialog select every button that meets the criteria. The program informs you of the number of buttons affected by this change. All replace actions support full Undo / Redo capabilities. The program will inform you if no buttons are found that match the search criteria. When you select a General as well as a State-oriented search criteria, only buttons that match the General criteria, and within that set, the states that match the State criteria will be candidates for the replace operation. For example, if you set the search criteria to include both the Glow-S border style (a General property) and yellow as the Fill Color (a State property), only those buttons with a Border Style of Glow-S are candidates, and within that set of candidates, only those states whose Fill Color is set to yellow satisfy the search criteria.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

199

Working With Properties

200

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Working With States
Overview
All G4 panel entities (Pages, popup pages and buttons) have at least one state. Pages and popup pages have only one state. General, Bargraph and Text Input buttons have only two states (on/off). Joystick buttons only use one state (Off). Multi-State General and Multi-State Bargraph buttons can have up to 256 states. States start at 1. The ability to set the State Properties (including border name, border color, fill color, text color, video fill, bitmap, bitmap justification, icon assignment, icon justification, font, text, text justification, word wrap preference and sound) is provided at the state level, via the States tab of the Properties Window.

State Manager Window
The State Manager window allows you to view and modify individual states. The State Manager window supports full Cut, Copy, Delete, Insert, Replace and Paste as well as drag and drop capabilities (FIG. 190).

FIG. 190 State Manager window - showing a multi-state button (6 states)

The State Manager context window (open via right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager) support allows the user to Add single or multiple states, Replace states, Insert single or multiple states and Remove states. For Multi-State General buttons the different states are used to animate a button from Off to On (Range Time Up) and back again to Off (Range Time Down). When the button is turned on it will display all the assigned states from first to last with a specified time interval between each state's display. When the button is turned back off, the states will be displayed in reverse order. The interstate time intervals are user definable in 1/10th second increments. A zero entry will automatically advance / retreat to the ending / beginning state without displaying any intervening states. For Multi-State Bargraph buttons, the level will directly reflect the displayed state. You can set an allowable range within a bargraph that has states. Anything outside of that range will not be represented by a state. For buttons with multiple states, Send Commands can set the state number, provided it is not a level type button.

State Manager Context Menu
Right mouse click on any thumbnail in the State Manager window to open the State Manager context menu, which includes options to add single or multiple states, replace states, insert single or multiple states, and remove states. Use Ctrl+click to select multiple individual button states. Use Shift+click to select a range of states (between two selections). Use Ctrl+A to select all button states.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

201

Working With States

The items in this context menu include: Size - This option sets the size of the button thumbnail views as they appear in the State Manager window. Add States - This option opens the Add States dialog, which allows you to add multiple states to the selected button (up to a total of 255 states). Insert States - This option opens the Insert States dialog, which allows you to insert multiple states to the selected button. This option inserts the specified number of states directly after the selected (highlighted) state. Quick Input - Click to open the Quick Input sub-menu, where you can specify how to use the Quick Input feature (Current Property, Text or Disabled). Use Quick Input to make fast edits to various page and button elements and properties. Cut/Copy/Paste - Use these options to either cut, copy or paste a selected button state to/from clipboard memory. Replace - Use this option to replace the selected button state with the contents of clipboard memory. Delete - Use this option to delete the selected button state(s) from the button. Select All - This option selects all states associated with the selected button. Reverse States - This option reverses the order of states selected in the State Manager window. The selected states do no have to be contiguous. Set As Display State - This option sets the state that is currently being displayed in the Design View as the display state for the button. Image/Text Positioning - This option opens the Text/Image Position dialog, which allows you to specify the position of images and/or text on the selected button state(s). Animation Wizard - This option launches the Animation Wizard. The Animation Wizard guides you through the process of creating an animated button. Tweeners - Click to open the Tweeners sub-menu where you can select from several types of tweeners to use (for animation purposes).

Adding States To a Button
There are three ways in which new states can be added to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types): Duplicating an Existing State on the Button Adding States From the Clipboard Adding States Through Drag-and-Drop

Duplicating an Existing State on the Button
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by duplicating an existing state on the button:

1. If the new states are to be added to the end of the collection (in the State Manager window), right-click to
open the State Manager Context Menu, and select Add States.

2. If the new states are to be inserted elsewhere in the collection, first select the state prior to which the new
states will be created, then right-click to open the State Manager Context Menu and select Insert States.

3. The Add States dialog (or the Insert States dialog if you selected Insert States) is displayed (FIG. 191).

FIG. 191 Add States dialog & Insert States dialogs

202

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Use these dialogs to specify the number of states to be created, and which existing state to duplicate (which will be highlighted in the State Manager as the state number is changed).

4. When the desired number of states and the state to duplicate have been chosen, press OK and the new
states will be added to the collection in the desired location. Otherwise, press Cancel to exit the dialog without creating any states.

Adding States From the Clipboard
One way to add new states to a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button is by pasting states from the clipboard. Pasting states from the clipboard offers more power and flexibility than single state duplication. States may be copied from another button, page, or popup page, or even from a different panel:

1. First select the button, page, or popup page whose states will be copied. 2. In the State Manager window, select the source states. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add
states to the selection. Left-click + Shift to select a range of states.

3. When the source states have been selected, copy them to the clipboard (Ctrl-C). 4. With the source states copied to the clipboard, select the Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph button to
which the states in the clipboard should be copied (in the State Manager). Select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. To add the copied states to the end of the series, ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (or select the last state in the series).

5. Paste the states from the clipboard (Ctrl-V).
When copying states from another button or from a popup page, the pasted state's border style may be modified to ensure that it is an acceptable style in the button's border family.

Drag & Drop To Add States
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to add copies of states within the same button is to use drag-anddrop:

1. First select the source state(s). Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add multiple states to the
selection. Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to select a range of states.

2. With the source states selected, press and hold the right mouse button while over one of the selected
states. While continuing to press the right mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be copied (FIG. 192).

FIG. 192 Drag & Drop To Add States

If the states are to be added to the end of the collection, drag the source states beyond the last state. If they are to be added elsewhere in the collection, drag the source states either over the state prior to which the new states will be inserted, or over the space between state thumbnails where the new states will be inserted.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

203

Working With States

3. Release the right mouse button and select Insert copy... from the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 193).

FIG. 193 Drag & Drop To Add States (Insert Copy...selected)

4. The new States are added according to the option selected in the drag-and-drop menu (FIG. 194):

FIG. 194 Drag & Drop To Add States (States copied before State 3)

Setting the Maximum Active State For a Button
You can set the maximum active state on a multi-state button by selecting the last state in a sequence (in the State Manager window) and selecting the States > Set As Max Active State option. The state tagged as the max active state will be the last one included in the multi-state sequence. All states beyond the max active state are ignored when the button is pushed. Note that the states that occur after the max active state in the sequence are displayed with crosshatching across the labels on the thumbnails in the State Manager window, to indicate which states will not be included in the multi-state sequence.

Removing States From A Button
States can be removed from a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button (the number of states is fixed for the other button types) by either deleting them from the collection, or by cutting them to the clipboard. Multi-General or Multi-Bargraph buttons must have at least two states. Actions that would cause the number of states to drop below two are not allowed.

Deleting States 1. Select the states to be deleted. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection.
Hold down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Delete the selected states by selecting the Edit > Delete, State Manager Context Menu > Delete, or the
Del key.

204

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With States

Cutting States To the Clipboard 1. Select the states to be cut. Hold down the Ctrl key while left-clicking to add states to the selection. Hold
down the Shift key while left-clicking to add a range of states to the selection.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard by selecting Edit > Cut, State Manager Context Menu > Cut, or
the Ctrl-X keyboard accelerator.

Changing the Order Of States On A Button
Changing the order of states in a Multi-State General or Multi-State Bargraph button can be accomplished either through the clipboard or by drag-and-drop:

Reordering States Through the Clipboard 1. In the State Manager window, select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Cut the selected states to the clipboard (Ctrl-X). 3. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection: a. Ensure that no states are currently selected in the State Manager (click anywhere outside of a state
thumbnail, or press ESC).

b. Then, paste the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Paste, State Manager Context Menu >
Paste, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

4. If the states are to be moved elsewhere in the collection: a. Left-click to select the state prior to which the new states will be inserted. b. Then insert the states from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Insert, State Manager Context Menu >
Insert, or the Ctrl-V keyboard accelerator.

Reordering States Through Drag-and-Drop
A simplified alternative to using the clipboard to reorder states is to use drag-and-drop.

1. Select the states to be moved.
Ctrl + click to select multiple states individually. Shift + click to select a range of states.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button while over one of the selected states. While continuing to press the
left mouse button, move the mouse to the location where the states will be moved. If the states are to be moved to the end of the collection, drag the states beyond the last state. If they are to be moved elsewhere in the collection, drag the states over the space between state thumbnails where they will be moved.

3. Release the left mouse button (the same operation can also be performed with a right mouse button dragand-drop, selecting "Move…" from the drag-and-drop menu).

Copying/Pasting States From a Page, Popup Page or Button
Copying a State to the Clipboard
Copying a state from a page or popup page is possible by selecting the desired states in the State Manager then either clicking Edit > Copy from the main menu or clicking on the Copy button from the main toolbar. You may also right click and select copy from the context menu.

Pasting a State from the Clipboard
You may paste (by either clicking Edit > Paste from the main menu or by clicking the Paste toolbar button) a previously copied state onto a corresponding state in the State Manager (for the page or popup page).

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

205

Working With States

Pasting a state on the panel name in the Panel Navigator (which is for pages or popup pages only), on the folder named Pages (which is for pages only), on the folder named Popup Pages (which is for popup pages only) is not allowed.

Draw Order (Z-Order)
Z-Order, or "Draw Order" refers to the order in which the various visual elements of a Page, Popup Page or Button are drawn on the screen. The element at the top of the Z-Order overlaps all other elements. The top of the Z-Order is like the top layer in a multi-layer drawing. The element at the bottom of the Z-Order is overlapped by all other elements. The bottom of the ZOrder is like the bottom layer in a multi-layer drawing. By default, the state draw order is:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

fill bitmap icon text border

You can change the draw order via the options in the State Draw Order dialog.

Changing the Draw Order for Selected States
Use the State Draw Order dialog to specify the draw order for selected states:

1. Select a button, page or popup page. 2. Click the Browse button (...) in the Draw Order State property to access the State Draw Order dialog
(FIG. 195).

FIG. 195 State Draw Order dialog

3. Select an element in the list, and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the element up or
down in the list.

4. Repeat with the other elements in the list to rearrange the order as desired. 5. Click OK to close the dialog.
Note that the new draw order is indicated in the Draw Order state property.

206

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

Working With Function Codes

Working With Function Codes
Overview
In terms of designing buttons that interact with and control the various devices on the control system, TPD4 uses a concept that is familiar to TPDesign3 users, but which has a new name in TPD4: Function Codes. Function Codes were known as Channel Codes and Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. In TPD4, the term Function Codes refers to all three of the code types that can be assigned to buttons: Channel Codes: Displayed in the upper-left corner of the button, the channel codes indicate the port number and the channel code associated with the button. The channel codes represent communication out of the panel to the master controller. Address Codes: Displayed in the lower-right corner of the button, address codes in TPD4 are similar to the Variable Text Codes in TPDesign3. The address code represents communication from the master controller to the panel, causing the panel to do something (i.e. indicate feedback, display a text string, etc). Level Codes: Displayed in the lower-left corner of the button, level codes represent bi-directional communication between the panel and the master controller (i.e. the panel can cause a change in a level setting, and a changed level setting generates feedback on the panel). Each function code is a two-part number separated by a colon: Port Number:Channel/Address/Level Number (depending on which function code you are looking at). In the example below, the button function code assignments all indicate port 1 and channel/level/address 1 (FIG. 196).

FIG. 196 Button Function Code Assignments

The easiest way to handle function codes is to create and finalize your touch panel pages and buttons (with function codes) before generating the supporting Axcess or NetLinx program code. That way, in case you have to change any aspect of the project (i.e. add/remove controlled equipment, test strings, graphics, etc), you can update the function code assignments in TPD4, rather than having to re-write your code. There are several key differences in the way Function Codes work in TPD4 relative to the way they worked in TPDesign3: "Devices" in TPDesign3 are known as "Ports" in TPD4 (the maximum number of available ports in TPD4 is 100). Where there was a maximum number of 255 channel codes per device in TPDesign3, you can assign up to 4000 codes per port in TPD4. Unlike TPDesign3, TPD4 lets you to assign Address and Channel Codes directly to a page.

TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher)

207

197). Alternatively.11 or higher) . as well as the current state of buttons in the Design View window via the View > Display Function Codes option (or the toolbar button). The maximum number of level codes per port is 600. press the F7 key to toggle the function codes.Working With Function Codes Show/Hide Function Codes You can choose to display function codes. 197 Function Code Map 208 TPDesign4 (v2. Function Codes . The maximum number of ports in TPD4 is 100. Function Code Map Click the Function Maps tab (at the bottom of the Workspace Navigator window) to view the Function Code Map (FIG.Limitations The maximum number of channel codes per port is 4000. If Display Function Codes is enabled. they will also be included in printed output. The maximum number of address codes per port is 4000. FIG.

e. battery. If codes have been assigned to any of the panel's sensors (light.Setup Port Setting the Address. and within Port by Code. While you can (in-place) edit the Channel. A double-click action on the item will open the associated page (or popup page) and place the edit focus on that item. Channel or Level port to the setup port ("0") provides a list of predefined actions.Working With Function Codes The Function Code Map is a representation of the Channel codes. Setting the Address. These can only be edited via the Programming tab of the Properties Control window.11 or higher) 209 . Address Codes. Address and Level codes via these folders. Level Codes). 0. they will now appear in the Function Map and can be modified there just like button function codes. and/or cradle). Address codes. This list is sorted by Port. For example. Channel Codes. you cannot drag and drop an Address Code (regardless of the port folder that contains it) into any port folder contained in either the Channel or Level folders. String Outputs and Command Outputs utilized in the panel file. TPDesign4 (v2. Some of the actions may be hardware dependent. Level codes. motion. Neither String or Command Outputs support any type of drag and drop operations. ensure that the codes selected apply to your particular panel type. you cannot edit String or Command Outputs the same way. displayed in a hierarchical tree format in the Function Map tab of the Workspace Navigator window. Selecting an item in the tree and then left clicking again will provide an in-place edit of the code value. You can use the Function Code Map to delete codes as well as drag and drop items from one port to another. Select Panel > Verify Function Codes to automatically verify the active project's Function Code Map. that code will be ignored. within the primary folder the selected item belongs to (i. and fix any problems that are found. In the event that an inappropriate code is selected for a given panel type. Channel or Level port to the setup port provides a list of predefined actions. Therefore.

Clear Channels First One powerful feature of Power Assign is the ability to clear the various function codes from the buttons. FIG. one can assign channel / address codes to every button in the set with significantly fewer mouse clicks and keystrokes than would otherwise be possible. Once you ensure that the desired button or buttons have been selected. Power Assign works only at the button level. 2. 198 Power Assign dialog One valuable use of this feature is to establish a contiguous range of channel / address codes on a set of buttons. Select Button > Power Assign (or press F8) to open the Power Assign dialog (FIG. Assign Codes Next assign new function codes: 1. this may be what you want to have happen. Address or Level. Finally. you need to understand the nuances of some of the options involved: 210 TPDesign4 (v2. by following the instructions below and utilizing the Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment options. or on a group of selected buttons. To use take full advantage of Power Assign. Click Assign. then: 1. then by holding down the CTRL key. 198). left-click on the button in the set that should receive the first channel / address code. 2. and does not affect pages or popup pages. they will show up as used when Power Assign does its' checks. The Power Assign feature can operate on a single button. and any of the buttons in the group you are assigning already have codes assigned. select Assign. and other properties that depend on button type. 3. Address or Level.11 or higher) . Under Function Code Type.Working With Function Codes Using Power Assign One of the big time-eating factors of creating a touch panel file is correctly setting up the channel. In some cases. address and level function codes for any given button. but usually you'll want to clear them before assigning. select Clear. select each of the remaining buttons in the set in the order in which you want the channel / address codes to be assigned. all you need to do is bring up the Power Assign dialog. Click Assign. To accomplish this. Under Function Code Action. Under Function Code Type. It is good practice to clear the function codes before any Assign Codes operations. select Channel. Use Power Assign to streamline this process. Under Function Code Action. If you don't clear the codes first. 3. select Channel.

Here's the setup you would use: 1. First. Wrap Within Port ID (Power Assign) Since touch panels support more than one port.11 or higher) 211 . click Channel under Function Code Type. as in a numeric keypad. One can also simply undo the action if desired. and click Assign again. Since the selection is retained after any operation. address. if the order is important to you. TPDesign4 (v2. In this case the values will be subject to whether or not you've set the Begin Assignment At checkbox. In either of these cases. with no breaks between them. check the Wrap Within Port ID option. The Begin Assignment At function is particularly useful for setting up things like numeric keypads. and level codes (in addition to the currently displayed state) in the corners of the buttons. Look for a clear range of channel and address codes large enough. While initially somewhat confusing. you're not limited to 256 channel and address codes. If you don't care what channels are assigned. if you make a mistake. open the Power Assign dialog. Address. things like SYSTEM_CALLS are based upon all the channels coming from a single device (port). One nice thing about the Power Assign palette is that it retains its settings after use. 3. Since MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE works on a particular port. Check Begin Assignment At and Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment. it's easy to click Clear Codes and hit the assign button again. just like the standard Auto Assign. and make a note of the start channel. This will visually display the channel. Another thing that comes into play with being able to use multiple ports is that you may need to confine certain ranges of channel codes to a single port to take advantage of the DEFINE_MUTUALLY_EXCLUSIVE channel grouping in the code. If the channels are split across ports. 2.Working With Function Codes Begin Assignment At (Power Assign) When Begin Assignment At is selected (in the Power Assign dialog) you can specify the starting value of the Port and Function (Channel. Remember that Power Assign processes the function code assignments based on the order in the selection so. If you don't check the Begin Assignment At option. and TPD4 will find the next available free channels. use CTRL-select to select the buttons in the order you want to assign the channels. which ensures that all channel codes assigned fall within a single port. and click Assign. click Address under Function Code Type. the assign operation begins at the first available channel. Next. Then supply the port and channel code values. Next. one must ensure that the group of buttons is entirely within a single port. the feedback part of the System Call won't work. since the order is important. uncheck this option. since you might be using offset math in your code to process the button pushes. an immense amount of power is available in the options within the floating Power Assign dialog. In these cases. or Level) code. which is handy when you need both the channel and address codes to have the same numeric values. where you need the channel codes to begin at a specific value. skipping used channels and continuing on until all available channels have been assigned. Ensure Contiguous Code Assignment (Power Assign) This is used when the channel codes have to be in order. make sure to create the selection using CTRL-Select. However. You can visually verify that the desired action was accomplished by ensuring that the Display Function & State Overlay option is selected from the View menu. use the Functions tab of the Workspace Navigator and click back and forth between the channel and address options.

Working With Function Codes 212 TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) .

Brightness and Opacity. and text (pages. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors that can be applied to fills (pages. Brightness and Opacity) values numerically. plus Hue. FIG. you might see some slight variation in some colors if you switch from the RGB Color palette to Palette Index. a Microsoft® formatted palette file. Palettes are saved as part of the panel file.11 or higher) 213 . click on the Border Color. popup page or button. Every color element that is not assigned either directly via an RGBA selection or the named color table will reference this palette and be affected by any changes made to it. There are several ways to open the Colors dialog: When setting new button parameters. RGB Color: a full-feature RGB palette that allows you specify RGB (plus Hue.Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors and Palettes Working With Colors A key feature of TPD4 is it's ability to utilize the full 32-bit RGB color palette. which allows you to specify RGB (Red. since TPD4 tries to match the color exactly. Because the RGB Color palette supports more colors than the Palette Index. and buttons). 199). TPD4 also allows you to save or load custom palettes. 199 Colors dialog . then click More Colors. Additionally. Fill Color or Text Color toolbar icons to open the base palette. any variation that occurs in the translation is extremely subtle. Click to select an existing page. Blue and Green) values. popup pages. TPD4 supports the importing of either a JASC® formatted palette file. Saturation. Color assignments are made through the Colors dialog. The Colors dialog supports three ways to select colors from the RGB color palette: 1. In most cases. or a custom palette file previously saved from within the application. Saturation. transparencies (popup pages and buttons). and click on Fill Color in the States tab of the Properties Control Window. The RGB palette offers millions of possible colors (FIG. or by dragging the cursor around the palette.RGB Color TPDesign4 (v2. popup pages and buttons).

and include the transparent color in position 255 (FIG. These Base 88 colors are identical to those provided in previous versions of TPDesign3. The Palette Index offers a maximum of 255 colors (FIG. 200). Color Name: a named color selection dialog based on the Base 88 color scheme.11 or higher) . Palette Index: a default palette that provides the Base 88 colors (which the can be modified if desired). 201 Colors dialog . 200 Colors dialog . FIG.Palette Index 3. FIG.Color Name 214 TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Colors and Palettes 2. 201).

Creating New Palette Entries 1. For example. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create and save custom palettes. this can cause color shifting on the button. Depending on the differences between the palette in the button's source project and the palette in the target project. When you copy a button from one project into another project that is using a different palette. Custom Palettes can be saved as *. so once imported. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder). Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . the pasted button will use the palette that is currently active in the project that the button is copied into (as opposed to the palette that was used to create the button). Working With Palettes TPD4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project.one color scheme for each season. without having to edit the buttons directly. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Use the options in the Edit Palettes dialog to create custom palettes and save them as *. FIG. 202 Edit Palettes dialog TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Colors and Palettes Neither JASC nor Microsoft palette files support transparency in the same manner that TPD4 utilizes transparency. which can then be imported/exported for use in other TPD4 projects. and named palette entries. Working With Multiple Color Palettes TPDesign4 supports multiple color palettes to allow easy switching between color schemes.PAL files.11 or higher) 215 . 202).PAL files that can then be imported/exported for use in other projects. custom palettes cannot be reopened in another graphics package.

Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. 202 on page 215). 2. 216 TPDesign4 (v2. Repeat steps 3 . Select the palette that you want to add a new palette entry (color) to. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. 202 on page 215). the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Enter a description of the new palette entry in the Name text field. Click the Rename button to open the Rename dialog (FIG. By default. This is optional. To edit an existing palette entry. 2. 2. Renaming Palettes 1. 5. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of this dialog). Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Select a palette entry: To add a new palette entry to the palette. 6. opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. Red/Blue/Green. 3.11 or higher) . 3. opacity (and/or Hex value) to specify the color that you want to add to the palette. and each palette entry is represented by an index number (1-256). select a slot with no color assignment. 3. Select the palette that you want to rename from the palette selection drop-down list. 4. To add palette entries (colors) to this palette. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. 4. as indicated in the palette selection drop-down list in the upper-left corner of this dialog. 203 Rename dialog 4. use the cursor in the Color Value chart. Creating Custom Palettes 1. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. 5. in the upper-left corner of this dialog. in the palette selection drop-down list. Click the New button to clear the palette index of all entries. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list.5 to add as many additional colors to this palette as needed. By default. the palette that is currently being used for the active Project is selected. Each color that is listed in the palette is considered to be a palette entry. 203 on page 216). the new palette is titled Unnamed. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color (and color name if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. FIG. 6. but highly recommended since this is the name that will appear with the color in the palette when the view option is set to details. select an existing color. in conjunction with the Hue/Sat/Bright. Click on the Commit button to add the selected color and color name (if applicable) to the selected slot in the palette. This is optional. The index numbers correlate to the slot in the palette that this color occupies. By default. Enter the new name for this palette in the text field and select OK.Working With Colors and Palettes By default. Note that it is tagged as (active) in the drop-down list. Use the cursor in the Color Value chart. Red/Blue/Green.

2. you must select the Set Active button at the top of the dialog. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Use this feature to save and distribute custom palettes that can be imported back into TPD4 via the Import option: 1. Copying Palettes Use the Copy and Paste buttons at the top of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste entire palettes: 1. Select the palette that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). 202 on page 215). Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG.PAL file. in the upper-left corner of the dialog. select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to access the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. the copied color will overwrite the original. Changing the Active Palette To select a different palette to use. 202 on page 215). Use this dialog to locate and select the desired *. Click the New button to open a new (empty palette) or select an existing one from the drop-down list. 202 on page 215). Use this dialog to save the palette to a specified directory. Importing Palette Files You can import palette (*. 2. 4. Click the Copy button. Click the Import button to access the Open dialog. 6.Working With Colors and Palettes 5. 2. 5. 3.PAL) files for use in other projects via the Export option in the Edit Palettes dialog. 202 on page 215). and select from the listing of available palettes in the palette selection drop-down list. Select the palette that contains the color(s) that you want to copy from the palette selection drop-down list (in the upper-left corner of the dialog). 4. If you desire to make the imported palette the active palette.11 or higher) 217 . Click the Paste button to paste the contents of the source palette into the new (target) palette. If you select a slot that already has a palette entry. 202 on page 215). 2. Select the slot that you want to paste the copied palette entry into and click Paste Entry. 4. as a *.PAL file. Select Panel > Edit Palettes (or click the toolbar button) to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. Click to select the palette entry that you want to copy. Note that the new name overwrites the previous name (removing the previous name from the list). Alternatively. Select Panel > Edit Palettes to open the Edit Palettes dialog (FIG. you could open an existing palette and paste over the existing palette entries. Exporting Palette Files You can export palette (*. 3. Click Open to import the selected palette file and close the Open dialog. Click the Export button to access the Save As dialog. TPDesign4 (v2. 3.PAL) files for use in your project via the Import option in the Edit Palettes dialog: 1. Click the Copy Entry button. Copying Palette Entries Use the Copy Entry and Paste Entry buttons at the bottom of the Edit Palettes dialog to copy and paste individual palette entries (colors): 1. The new name of the palette is indicated in the palette selection drop-down list.

without having to edit the buttons directly.TPT). However. Color Schemes allow you to apply different color schemes to an entire template (in G4 PanelBuilder). 218 TPDesign4 (v2. Using custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPDesign4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Custom palettes are created in TPDesign4. and saved as part of the TPD4 project. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. TPDesign4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements. the buttons in the project must use the border types that come with TPD4 (as opposed to a custom image that defines the button's look). Refer to the Paint online help for instructions on using Microsoft® Paint. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette).one color scheme for each design. In order to utilize Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. Custom palettes can be used to enable the Color Schemes feature in the G4 PanelBuilder application.11 or higher) . you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . Using the Microsoft® Paint Utility Program Select Tools > Paint to launch the Microsoft Paint Utility program.Working With Colors and Palettes Using Custom Palettes to Enable Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder TPDesign4 supports creating and saving multiple custom color palettes within a project. the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click. These preview images are used to display the color schemes that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. While it is not an enforced requirement. You can also use Chameleon Images in conjunction with custom palettes to further enhance the use of Color schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. the Color Schemes feature is applied via the Project menu in G4 PanelBuilder. For example. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template. in order for the project to actually make use of multiple palettes in G4 PanelBuilder.

Select (or a create) a Page in your project. Streaming Source is available as a video fill option. The Video Fill options available will depend on the video capabilities of the panel type selected (FIG.11 or higher) 219 . TPD4 supports video fills directly to the page/popup page. Streaming Video Fills If the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video (NXD/NXT-1200VG. be sure to click on the page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Page. Popup Page or Button. 2. 3. and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. The NXP-TPI/4 and TPI-PRO accommodate up to four video source inputs. 204 State Properties: Video Fill options If you are working with an existing page with buttons. If Streaming Source is selected from the drop-down list of Video Fill options (in the States tab of the Properties Window).States Tab. popup page or button. NXD/NXT-1500VG. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources. Enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream in the Streaming Source field. you can assign a "video fill" to a page. 204).Working With Video Fills Working With Video Fills Overview If you are designing a project targeted at a video-capable panel. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Page. To apply a video fill to a Page: 1. TPI-PRO and TPI-PRO-DVI accommodate up to 4 video source inputs. The NXP-TPI/4. and not a button on the page. In the Properties Control window . FIG. then Streaming Source is added to the list of state properties. Displaying a Video Source on a Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. TPDesign4 (v2. without having to create a page-size button (as was the case in TPDesign3). and you can select any available video source (1-4) as the source for a video fill. and NXD/NXT-1700VG only).

If you are working with an existing Popup Page with buttons.11 or higher) . In the Properties Control window . To apply a video fill to a Button: 1. and not a button on the Popup Page. In the Properties Control window . Popup Page or Button. be sure to consider all of the button states when applying the video fill. Select (or a create) a Popup Page in your project. 2. Alternatively. Select (or a create) a Button in your project. 3. you can use Ctrl+A to select all states in the State Manager window. To apply the video fill across all states.States Tab. Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the Popup Page. be sure to click on the popup page (not on a button) to bring up the State Properties for the Popup Page.Working With Video Fills Displaying a Video Source on a Popup Page TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. To apply a video fill to a Popup Page: 1. 3. Since this is a state-oriented setting.States Tab. 220 TPDesign4 (v2. Displaying a Video Source on a Button TPD4 allows you to assign a video source as the background image on a Page. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4). use the All States option in the Properties Control window (States tab). Select a video source from the list to apply the video fill to the button. click Video Fill to activate the drop-down list of available video sources (Source 1-4). 2. Popup Page or Button.

Working With Video Fills TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 221 .

11 or higher) .Working With Video Fills 222 TPDesign4 (v2.

or via the Import button on the Resource Manager dialog (see the Importing Image Files Into Your Project section on page 54 for details). This opens the Select Resource dialog. Note: If you select a General (two-state) button to use with the animation wizard. all of which are available to be used as "frames" in an animation.jpg.11 or higher) 223 . Also. the images that you use to create the animation must be named in sequence (i. To create a simple button animation using the Animation Wizard: 1. where you can select which images to include in the animation.Select Type (Step 1 of 6).e. the wizard will allow you to add the necessary number of states to the button to accommodate the animation sequence (and automatically change the button type to Multi-State General). and set the sequence of the images. The Animation Wizard automates most of the process and makes the task easy.. would be a very tedious and time-intensive process. cool_button_spin02.jpg. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . make sure the numbering convention used for the files is consistent (i.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. This however. etc. Animation Wizard . You can create an animation sequence for a multi-state button manually.e. cool_button_spin01. cool_button_spin03. In order for images to appear in the Sequence drop down for selection..jpg. Use this dialog to specify the images to be included in the animation. It guides you through the steps of generating an animation sequence that can be applied to a multi-state button to apply impressive visual effects to your buttons.jpg. Select Button > Animation Wizard to start the wizard.Working With Animation Effects Working With Animation Effects Overview TPD4 utilizes three main concepts for supporting animation effects in your projects: Animation Wizard Tweening Chameleon Images Using the Animation Wizard The Animation Wizard is a powerful tool included with TPD4. TPDesign4 (v2. or Shift+click to select the range of files between two selections. don't mix "1" and "01" or "001"). and there are no other options in this dropdown list until at least one sequence has been created. and set the sequence of the images. through the File > Import Resources option. 2.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. Multi-state buttons can have up to 256 states. Select Bitmap to use bitmaps in the animation.). cool_button_spin04. The Sequence selection is set to "[custom]" by default.Select Type (Step 1 of 6) Use the radio buttons in this dialog to specify the type of animation to create (Bitmap or Icon). Once you import a series of images with identical names except for a post-fixed numeric indicator. Animation Wizard . Select Icon to use icons in the animation. click the Add button. by creating a series of states and applying a different bitmap or icon to each state and treating each state as an individual frame. it makes things easier if you take naming into consideration before importing the files. Select Chameleon Image to use (32-bit PNG) chameleon images in the animation. Although you can edit the sequence of the images in the animation manually. This opens the first of six dialogs: Animation Wizard . Ctrl+click to select multiple files. Note that the only images that are available to choose from are those that have been imported into the project. To add the images that will comprise the animation sequence. they will be available via this drop-down list.

the animation sequence will have more than two frames. and the original GIF animation can be simulated. 4. you shouldn't have to modify the sequence at all.Working With Animation Effects You can bring existing animated GIF files into your project via a third-party application (for example JASC® 's Animation Shop which comes bundles with Paint Shop Pro . there are also many freeware applications available). Use the Move Left and Move Right buttons to re-arrange the image sequence (if necessary). Use the Add and Remove buttons to add/remove selected images from the sequence (if necessary). The image files you selected now appear in alpha-numeric order in the preview window of this dialog. Select the desired position option from the drop-down list.11 or higher) . these files can be imported into your TPD4 project. The general concept is that you start with an existing animated GIF image. Use the options in the lower-half of this dialog to specify the positioning of the animated image relative to the button containing it. you'll have to add at least eight states to the button (one frame per button state). Animation Wizard . 5. If you are applying an animation that is bigger than the containing button. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . if you create a multi-state button. the first state). Once extracted.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) dialog. So. use the X and Y fields to indicate the desired position. use the radio buttons to indicate how to handle them (Leave Alone or Remove). Animation Wizard . you will have to save the frames out to a supported file type. Use the radio buttons in the top-half of the dialog to specify wether to scale the button to fit the animated image. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . Lets say that your sequence has ten frames.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) Use this dialog to specify the size and position of the animation relative to the button that will contain it. Click OK in the Select Resource dialog to return to the Animation Wizard . This dialog tells you two important pieces of information: the size of the animated image.Assign Frames (Step 4 of 6) Use this dialog to create enough states to accommodate the number of frames in the animation sequence. 3. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . Note that since TPD4 does not support the (proprietary) . 0. and the number of states available on the button to which the animation is to be applied. and open the Animation Wizard before adding any states. If you select Absolute. or to simply apply the animation to the button at its current size. you have only two states on the button. meaning that the upper-left corner of each page is represented by the X-Y value of 0. Obviously. and the size of the button that will contain it. for a ten-frame animation.Create Sequence (Step 2 of 6) dialog. 224 TPDesign4 (v2. Use the first field to indicate which state to start the animation on (default = 1. a warning message is displayed along the bottom of the dialog. and the animated image will be clipped (cropped) to fit in the button.GIF file type. All position (X-Y) values in TPD4 are zero-based (measured in pixels). If button states exist beyond the end of the animation. For example.Size & Position (Step 3 of 6) dialog. Use the next field to indicate which of the existing states to duplicate. and save each frame in the animation out as an individual image file (resulting in a series of image files).version 7 or higher. if more states are required for the animation. If the images were named consecutively.Appearance (Step 5 of 6) dialog. The options in this dialog allow you to automatically detect the number of frames in the animation sequence.

So. and click Push). to make a button fade completely in/out on a page. it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. TPD4 supports multi-state buttons. many other animation effects can be achieved via the Tweening tools of TPD4. also definable in 1/10th second increments. Click Finish to generate the animation. Animation Wizard . you would have to create the button without borders. When the multi-state button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. The starting state for the animation. the states will be displayed in reverse order.Working With Animation Effects Animation Wizard . 6. and the animation type (Bitmap or Icon). If creating a icon animation. and is definable in 1/10th second increments.11 or higher) 225 . tweening also generates very smooth color transition effects that would be difficult or impossible to do any other way. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). Provided you are not creating an image-based animation. The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. "tweening" is the process of altering the display properties of intermediate frames between two images to give the appearance that the first image evolves smoothly into the second image. Note that the animation is indicated in the State Manager window. including: The number of states to be added to the button. Tweening is a common concept in all sorts of animation software.Finish (Step 6 of 6) dialog. these options default to leave both border an fill color alone (Leave alone). these options default to no border (Set to "none") and transparent fill (Set to "transparent"). A listing of each state and the image file associated with it. Tweening Short for in-betweening. This is called "Animate Time Up".Finish (Step 6 of 6) This dialog lists the actions to be taken to generate the button animation. In TPD4. Since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4.Appearance (Step 5 of 6) Use this dialog to specify how treat the Button Border Style. When the button is turned back Off. you might say that you have 256 frames available for the animation. if you create a multi-state button with 256 states. This is called "Animate Time Down". The position of the animation on the button. Use the Button Preview window to view the animation (select View > Button Preview. each state of a multi-state button can be thought of as an individual frame. the tweening process greatly simplifies the process of generating each state individually by automatically creating a gradual transition across all states based on the state properties of the first and last states. and which state to duplicate. Click Next to proceed to the Animation Wizard . Remember. TPDesign4 (v2. If creating a bitmap animation. the number of frames in the animation. and Button Fill Color on the resulting button. Beyond simplifying the process of creating motion animations. which can have up to 256 states which are used to animate a button push from Off to On and back again to Off.

The Animate Time Up and Animate Time Down values are set in the General tab of the Properties Control window. Select (or create a new) multi-state button with at least three states (FIG. but change the opacity on one of them to zero (via the Colors dialog. To create a color transition effect: The following steps apply to all three button color attributes (Border Color. Border Color. An opacity setting of zero makes the button totally transparent. Apply a color (Fill Color. FIG. leave the colors the same for the first and last states. also definable in 1/10th second increments.11 or higher) . When the button is turned back Off. you would have to create the button without a border assignment. The color tweeners can be used individually. Ctrl+click to select two states in the State Manager window that are separated by at least one state (do not select the intermediate states). it is also possible to use tweening to make buttons fade in and out on the page. or in combinations to create smooth fades from one color to another when the button is pressed. This is called "Animate Time Up". 3. 205 Multi-State Button (4 States) 2. set to RGB colors). The color tweener(s) will generate a transition effect that fades the first color into the second (FIG. An opacity setting of 255 (max) makes the button totally opaque.Working With Animation Effects Creating Color Transition Effects Use the Border Color. 206). Note that the more states you use. This is called "Animate Time Down". 205). 206 Multi-State Button (4 States) To create a fade effect. the smoother the transitions will appear. However. When used in combination with TPD4's ability to handle RGB colors (including the opacity setting). Fill Color. Note that to make buttons fade in/out completely. and is definable in 1/10th second increments. Fill Color and Text Color tweeners to easily apply color transition effects to multi-state buttons. since transparent borders are not supported in this version of TPD4. 226 TPDesign4 (v2. the states will be displayed in reverse order. Text Color and Text Effect Color): 1. these effects can be made to be very subtle and smooth. 207). With 256 states available to use as "frames" in a tweened animation. FIG. When the button is turned On it will display all the assigned states from first to last within a specified time interval. Text Effect Color or any combination) to the last state that is different from that of the first state (FIG. Text Color. most color transition effects don't require that many frames to produce a very smooth fade.

7. The Icon Position tweener allows you to cause an icon to move around the button area when it is pressed. Add an icon to the button (via the Icon field in the Properties Control window . place the icon in its end position in the animation via the Image/ Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). 5. 8. Creating Animated Bitmap Effects Use the Icon Position and Bitmap Position tweeners to apply animated bitmap effects to multi-state buttons. 3. The results are displayed immediately in the State Manager window (FIG. Select (or create a new) multi-state button. 5.States tab). 4. 6. Set the Icon Justification property to Absolute. TPDesign4 (v2. and you should not select the intermediate states). Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). The Bitmap Position tweener allows you to cause a bitmap to move around the button area when it is pressed. and select Tweeners from the context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu.Working With Animation Effects FIG.11 or higher) 227 . Select one or more of the color tweeners to apply effects. 208 Multi-State Button (4 States) Use the All Colors Tweener to tween all colors applied to the button. the TPD4 tweening tools are not limited to one tween effect per multi-stage button press. Move the icon into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). 4. However. Animated bitmap effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eyecatching visual effects. 208). FIG. Experiment with applying multiple color tweens to the same button. and with different combinations of tweeners. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the icon start and end positions in the State Manager window. Right-click on one of the highlighted states in the State Manager window. In the last state included in the tween. To create animated bitmap effects with an icon: 1. 2. Duplicate the state that the tweening should begin across all states to be included in the tween. They must be separated by at least one stage. 207 Multi-State Button (4 States) The most basic type of color transition effect starts at the first state (or frame) and ends at the last.

All Colors . and Text positions applied to two selected button states all at once. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute. In order to apply motion tweening to an icon. Icon Position . 3. Move the text into it's starting position for the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). 2.This option tweens the Text Effect Color (only) between two selected button states. Overall Opacity . The only difference is that you will select and apply a bitmap rather than an icon to the button. Animated text effects can be used alone or in conjunction with the other tweeners to create all sorts of eye-catching visual effects. bitmap or text.Working With Animation Effects To create animated bitmap effects with a bitmap image. 5. To create animated text effects: 1. the justification for the icon. Note that depending on the elements of the selected buttons. and move it to its end position in the animation via the Image/Text Positioning dialog (select Image/Text Positioning from the State Manager context menu). They must be separated by at least one stage. The options in this menu include: Border Color .This option tweens the Fill color (only) between two selected button states. Add text to the button (via the Text field in the Properties Control window . The Text Position tweener will generate a motion effect that moves the text across the button. Ctrl+click to select just the two states containing the text start and end positions in the State Manager window. the Bitmap Position option is only available if the selected buttons use a bitmap. Text Color . bitmap or text. Text. This menu allows you to select a type of tweener to use in creating animations on multi-state buttons. Copy the text from the first state to the last state to be tweened. and you should not select the intermediate states). Text Position . the justification for the icon. Text Effect Color .This option tweens the Border. Set the Text Justification property to Absolute. follow the steps outlined above.States tab).This option will tween the Bitmap.This option tweens the position of a bitmap applied to two selected button states.This option tweens the Border color (only) between two selected button states. All Positions . 6. Bitmap Position . Insert at least one state (tweeners require at least three states to work). In order to apply tweening to an icon.This option tweens the Text color (only) between two selected button states. Select (or create a new) multi-state button. Fill Color .This option tweens the Overall Opacity (only) between two selected button states. bitmap or text must be set to Absolute.11 or higher) . 228 TPDesign4 (v2. some of these options may not be available. 7. The text position tweener allows you to have the button text move around the button area when it is pressed. Creating Animated Text Effects Use the Text Position tweener to apply animated text effects to multi-state buttons. For example. Icon.This option tweens the position of text applied to two selected button states. Fill. 4. Tweeners sub-menu Select Tweeners from the States Menu or the State Manager context menu to open the Tweeners sub-menu. and Text Effect colors between two selected states all at once.This option tweens the position of an icon applied to two selected button states.

then the Chameleon Image property becomes available. when used in conjunction with custom palettes. Chameleon Images TPD4 supports a button state property called Chameleon Image. To access AMX Tech Notes. That is. the image to be used is one that either was created or was selected specifically with the concept of colorizable regions that could be changed to suit different design needs. TPDesign4 (v2. set the image properties to RGB Color and 8 Bits/Channel. In other words. while virtually any PNG file could be applied as a chameleon image. Note that chameleon images are not necessarily different from any other PNG image file. glow and drop-shadow effects. Requirements for Chameleon Images Chameleon images can be applied to buttons to create animated highlighting. Refer to the Chameleon Images. can add highlighting and shadow effects to convincingly create an illusion of depth.Working With Animation Effects Text Size . if the Fill and/or Border colors are changed. when applied to a button/state. The Green channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Border Color. chameleon images can also take advantage of TPD4's tweening tools to easily create color transition effects. PNG images consist of four separate color channels (Alpha. The basic requirements that allow an image file to be recognized as a chameleon image in TPD4 are: It is a PNG image file It uses RGB color (8 bits/channel) It has an alpha channel defined In order for a chameleon image to be applied to buttons or popup pages. A chameleon image is a PNG image file that.11 or higher) 229 . When creating an image to be used as a Chameleon image in TPD4. This file can be viewed in G4 PanelPreview or on an actual G4 panel. For an example of a chameleon image. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder help topic for details. it is an image that can have its colors changed on the panel itself (at runtime). One possible benefit of using chameleon images is that. The position-oriented tweener options only work when the selected elements are set to use absolute positioning. Ideally. and chameleon images use the button/state's Fill and Border color assignments to determine the colors used in the image as follows: The Alpha channel of the Chameleon image defines the overall shape mask for the state. As a result. the Border Name state property must be set to none. Green and Blue). some images make more sense and would give better results than others. chameleon images may also use a companion bitmap which. The Chameleon Image state property is available for all button types except Text Input. you must be logged into www. when placed on top (via the Draw Order state property). refer to the "Chameleon Demo" TPD4 file attached to Tech Note TN733 to provide an example of chameleon images. then the colors used in the chameleon image will change accordingly. When the border name is set to none. When used with multi-state buttons.amx. The Red channel defines the area that will be filled with the state's Fill Color. Furthermore. The Blue channel is not used. Computer Control and TakeNote buttons. Red.com as a dealer. uses the Fill and Border colors assigned to the button/state to determine the colors in the image.This option tweens the size of text applied to two selected button states. they enable the ability to create multiple color schemes that can be applied to a single template in the G4 PanelBuilder application.

In a Design View window. 209 Working With Chameleon Images Working With Chameleon Images . Green and Alpha) that comprise 32-bit images to define separate colorizable regions (FIG. Working With Chameleon Images Chameleon Images utilize the 4 color channels (Red. It has been applied to a button as the Chameleon Image (via the Chameleon Image state property). create or select a button to which you wish to apply the chameleon image. When creating an image to be used as a chameleon image. Export the image as a PNG file. 230 TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Computer Control or TakeNote button types. the PNG file must be saved with RGB colors (32-bit). The Blue color channel is not used for chameleon buttons. Keep in mind that the Chameleon Image state property is not available for Text Input. only PNGs accommodate transparency as a color. 4. Import the image file into TPD4 (via the Import button on the Images tab of the Resource Manager dialog). Use the alpha channel to define the overall desired shape of the button (see Working with Transparent Backgrounds for more information). since in TPD4. FIG. keep in mind that the Red and Green color channels will be replaced by the colors specified as the Fill and Border colors in TPD4 for each state of the button.Working With Animation Effects The characteristics that define any image as a chameleon image are: 1. for the purpose of illustrating the basic concepts used: 1. Using an image editing program to create an image to use as the chameleon image: Only PNG image files can be used as chameleon images. 3.Example Here's an example of creating a simple chameleon image. It meets the technical requirements for a chameleon image. 209). The exported file must be a 32-bit RGB Color (8 Bits/Channel) file in order to be interpreted correctly by TPD4 as a chameleon image. For the transparent color to be interpreted correctly by TPD4. 2. Blue.11 or higher) .

any portion of the image that exists on the Green color channel now matches the color specified in the Border Color state property. The project must include at least one custom palette (in addition to the default palette). the primary benefits of these features are realized in the G4 PanelBuilder application (via the Project > Color Schemes feature). depending on what elements (Bitmaps. TPDesign4 (v2. note that any portion of the image that exists on the Red color channel now matches the color specified in the Fill Color state property. you can use the Fill Color and Border Color Tweening tools to quickly create color transition effects for each of the color channels (FIG.one color scheme for each design. Custom Palettes and G4 PanelBuilder Chameleon images can be used in conjunction with custom palettes to create G4 PanelBuilder template files that.Fill and Border colors tweened In fact. 210): FIG. click the browse button (. Chameleon Images. Chameleon images utilize the 4 color channels that comprise 32-bit PNG images to define separate colorizable regions. Not all TPD4 projects support the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder. Similarly. The Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder allow you to apply different "color skins" to a single template. For example. you could create a single template file with four different color palettes that would allow you to use the same template to quickly produce four different variations on the design . and saved as part of the TPD4 project. Select the chameleon image (in the Image tab) and click OK to apply it to the selected button. Custom palettes are created in TPD4.Working With Animation Effects 5. In order to utilize Chameleon Images and Color Schemes in G4 PanelBuilder. Now that the image has been applied as a chameleon image. the Chameleon images can by used in conjunction with any of the other Tweening tools. 211): FIG. 6. There are also several requirements for images to allow them to be recognized as chameleon images by TPD4. However. set the button's Border Name to None. TPD4 is also required to export the project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. 210 Chameleon Image . Since the Fill and Border colors are in turn associated with a particular color palette (which is saved as part of the TPD4 project).. the Chameleon Image property becomes available (directly beneath Border Name). the colors used to render the chameleon image will change if and when a different color palette is applied to the template in the G4 PanelBuilder application. Text) make up your button. 211 Chameleon Image ..TPT). In the States tab of the Properties Window. Icons. A few examples of color changes resulting from changing the Fill and Border colors for the button/state with the chameleon image (FIG. In the Chameleon Image property. are capable of switching from one color scheme to another without having to edit the buttons directly.) to access the Resource Manager dialog. the TPD4 project must meet several requirements before being exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template file (via the File > Export as G4 PanelBuilder Template option): The project must utilize at least one chameleon image (meaning that a chameleon image has been applied to at least one button in the project). Note that at this point. Using chameleon images coupled with custom palettes to create Color Schemes requires the use of both TPD4 and G4 PanelBuilder: Chameleon images are imported and applied to buttons (or popup pages) in TPD4.Fill and Border colors Since chameleon buttons rely on the Border and Fill color settings.11 or higher) 231 . when opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application.

232 TPDesign4 (v2. Note that if the exported project does not meet these requirements. When a valid TPD4 project file is exported as a G4 PanelBuilder template.11 or higher) . These preview images are used to display the color options that are available for this template in G4 PanelBuilder. the Color Schemes feature in G4 PanelBuilder will be disabled for this template.Working With Animation Effects The project must include one preview image for each of the custom palettes that are included. and then opened in the G4 PanelBuilder application. the Project > Color Schemes option (in the G4 PanelBuilder application) allows you to apply different color schemes to the template with a single click.

all file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. without opening the file in TPD4. Secure NetLinx Connections If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. the files themselves are routed to the panels. Once they are entered here. Receive From Panel: Receives a project file from a Master. Send File To Panel: Sends a selected project file to a specified Master. 212).3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. To access the Connection Settings dialog. 3. or select an existing configuration from the drop-down list and click Properties to edit those saved settings. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect (FIG. You'll have to be aware of the security settings on the target Master before trying to connect.TP4) file to a specified Master. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Masters that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings. and select New to create a new communication configuration. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. you must enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. 4. via the User Name and Password fields in the Connection Settings dialog. There are three types of file transfer operations in TPD4 (both accessible via the Transfer menu): Send To Panel: Sends the currently open project (*.File Transfer Operations File Transfer Operations Overview In TPD4. While all file transfer operations to touch panels are managed by the Master. You can save the User Name/Password combination as part of the communication configuration for that Master. 2. where they will reside (touch panel files never reside on the Master). 212 Connection Settings dialog (Authentication enabled) TPDesign4 (v2. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 1. FIG.11 or higher) 233 .

Connection drop-down list 234 TPDesign4 (v2. The status bar reflects the status of the connection as follows (FIG. Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. and select the desired configuration from the Connection drop-down list (FIG. If a User Name/Password is specified for a Master that does not require authentication. 214). 215 Connect dialog . they will be ignored. To recall a saved communication configuration. 213): not connected connected to an unsecured master connected to a secured but unencrypted master connected to a secured and encrypted master FIG. 213 Connection Status (indicated in the Status Bar) Working With Communications Configurations Saving and Recalling Communication Configurations Connection information is maintained separate from the transfer itself. if the correct User Name/Password combination is not entered (or if the entries are incorrect). so it does not need to be established/ dropped each time a transfer is performed. the connection will fail and TPD4 will display an error message indicating why the connection was denied. Use the Connect dialog to define and save one or more connection settings (FIG.File Transfer Operations When attempting to connect to a secured NetLinx Master. See the Connecting to a NetLinx Master section on page 235 for details on establishing a new connection. 215). 214 Connect dialog Anytime you establish a new communication connection configuration (via the New button in the Connect dialog). FIG. the program requires you to enter a name for the configuration (in the Name field of the Connection Settings dialog). select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog.11 or higher) . The configuration you specify under that name can then be accessed via the Connection drop-down list in the Connect dialog. FIG.

Serial or Modem. 2. 1. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via TCP/IP These steps describe establishing TCP/IP communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time.11 or higher) 235 . you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Specify the User Name and Password for NetLinx Master that require authentication in the Connection Settings dialog. 212 on page 233). select a configuration (in the Connect dialog) and click the Delete button. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. 2. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Do not change this number. Therefore. Once these steps have been completed. TPDesign4 (v2. Select Transfer > Connect to access this dialog. In the Connect dialog. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. you will first establish communication between the PC running TPD4 and the NetLinx Master to which the target panels are connected. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field).File Transfer Operations To delete a saved configuration. 4. file transfer operations are routed through the NetLinx Master to which the panels are connected. The Connect dialog allows you to set up communications. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. There are three possible ways to connect to a NetLinx Master: TCP/IP. and save multiple connection configurations for easy access.TCP/IP selected as Transport 5. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. without having to re-configure. as opposed to connecting directly to the panels. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. click New to establish a new connection. Select Transfer > Connect (or click the toolbar button) to open the Connect dialog. Enter the IP Address of the target NetLinx Master in the IP Address/DNS Name field. 7. 3. 6. Edit the communication settings for the selected configuration as needed. and click OK to save your changes and return to the Connect dialog. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. 3. 216 Connection Settings dialog . Select the configuration that you want to edit from the Connection drop-down list. Editing the Settings on an Existing Communication Configuration 1. in order to transfer touch panel files for use on G4compatible panels. FIG. Click the Edit button to invoke the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. 212 on page 233). Connecting to a NetLinx Master Typically. 216). In the Connection Settings dialog. 4. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default).

This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. 8. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. 9. 3. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. 217). Press the Connect button to establish the connection. Data Bits. without having to re-configure. 212 on page 233). Parity. In the Connection Settings dialog. 6. 217 Connection Settings dialog . you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. 2. Baud Rate. 1. 8. 7. 4. Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Serial Port These steps describe establishing serial communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog. In the Connect dialog. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. click New to establish a new connection. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. Once they are entered here. 236 TPDesign4 (v2. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). Once they are entered here.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.File Transfer Operations Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. FIG. Once these steps have been completed. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled.11 or higher) .3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters.Serial selected as Transport 5. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG. Stop Bits and Flow control) as needed. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port.

Click OK to save these settings and return to the Connect dialog. In the Connection Settings dialog. 7. Refer to the NetLinx Studio (v2. Stop Bits.11 or higher) 237 . 2. you will prompted to enter a User Name and Password in order to establish a connection. Once they are entered here. you will have defined a named communication configuration that will then be included in the Connection list (in the Connect dialog). 218 Connection Settings dialog . FIG. enter a unique name for the connection configuration that are you setting up (in the Name field). 3. 5. Press the Connect button to establish the connection. Then the communication configuration can be easily reused by simply selecting it from the drop-down list in the Connect dialog. 6. Data Bits. without having to re-configure. click New to establish a new connection. Parity.3 or higher) online help for details on enabling authentication on NetLinx Masters. 218). Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list (FIG. TPDesign4 (v2. you will be able to establish this connection (by selecting it by name in the Connect dialog) without having to type the authentication information each time you connect. If the target NetLinx Master has authentication enabled. Once these steps have been completed. 212 on page 233). In the Connect dialog. Enter the User Name/Password combination to save them as part of this configuration. The invokes the Connection Settings dialog (FIG.Modem selected as Transport 4. Flow control and Phone #) as needed. Click the Connection requires authentication checkbox to enable the User and Password text fields. Baud Rate. 1. This allows you to recall the configuration you specify later. Configure the Settings parameters (COM Port.File Transfer Operations Connecting to a NetLinx Master via Modem These steps describe establishing modem communication with a NetLinx Master for the first time.

Serial and Modem. In order to transfer touch panel files. To use TCP/IP as the transport type: 1. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed.01 or higher. Panel File Transfers via TCP/IP In TPD4. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). 214 on page 234). where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). enter a name for this communication configuration. There are three ways to connect and upload Panel files: TCP/IP. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. the panel files are routed to the panels. Do not change this number. Use the Send File To Panel option to send a project file without having to open it in TPD4. Serial and Modem. so they do not need to be established/dropped each time a transfer is performed. via the Connect dialog. the panel files are routed to the panels.11 or higher) . While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the TCP/IP connection. d. Earlier versions of the firmware and TPD4 software are incompatible with G4 panels. 238 TPDesign4 (v2. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Otherwise. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. In the Name field. In TPD4. In TPD4. If you are not already connected to the Master. If you have already established a TCP/IP communication configuration. There are three transport types available to transfer touch panel files: TCP/IP. Verify the TPD4 program being used is Version 1. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. Select TCP/IP from the Transport drop-down list. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Configure the TCP/IP connection (IP Address/DNS Name of the target/source device). Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. To transfer to a G4 panel. you must first establish communication between the PC and the NetLinx Master. c. via the Connect dialog. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected.File Transfer Operations Transferring Touch Panel Files to/from a NetLinx Master Sending a Panel File To a NetLinx Master Select Transfer > Send To Panel (or Transfer > Send File To Panel) to send a panel file to a NetLinx Master with a G4-compatible panel (or panels) on its bus. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. the Connect dialog is invoked (FIG. e. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. The IP Port should always be set to 1319 (default). select it from the dropdown list. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. This is the name that will b. Use the Connect dialog to define and save connection settings. Connections are maintained separate from the transfer itself. verify that the NetLinx Master Firmware is build 85 or later. In order to transfer touch panel files. the panel files are routed to the panels. Receiving a Panel File From a NetLinx Master Use the Transfer > Receive From Panel option (or click the toolbar button) to connect to a Master and upload a panel file from a compatible G4 touch panel on that Master's bus.

indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. displaying an online device tree. the Connect dialog is invoked. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. enter a name for this communication configuration. In the Name field. 4. Once communication is established. Parity.38400 Data Bits . disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. 5. Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. (firmware) Version.8 Parity . and Manufacturer. displaying an online device tree. TPDesign4 (v2. 3. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. Stop Bits and Flow Control). Configure the selected serial (COM port) connection (Baud Rate.File Transfer Operations 3. Data Bits. To use Serial as the transport type: 1. the panel files are routed to the panels. select it from the drop-down list.none Stop Bits . Panel File Transfers via Serial Port In TPD4.none These settings must match those of the selected COM port. Description. and connection status of both NetLinx Master and Modero panel. Once communication is established. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). Device #. create and save a serial communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a. Otherwise. c. If you encounter a transfer error. b.1 Flow Control .11 or higher) 239 . d. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. verify the IP Address. Panel ID. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. If you have already established a serial communication configuration. If you are not already connected to the Master. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). See the Transfer Options section on page 241. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. Select Serial from the Transport drop-down list. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the serial connection.

11 or higher) . and Manufacturer. If you have already established a modem communication configuration. Once communication is established. (firmware) Version.1 Flow Control . Stop Bits. the Connect dialog is invoked. Otherwise. Click Connect in the Connect dialog to establish the modem connection. To use Modem as the transport type: 1. either the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog is invoked (depending on wether you selected Send to Panel or Receive From Panel from the Transfer menu). Click OK to save the configuration and close the Connection Settings dialog 2. d. select it from the dropdown list. where they will reside (panel files never reside on the Master). Flow Control and Phone Number). Select Transfer > Send to Panel or Receive From Panel. Description. The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. Description.8 Parity . c. displaying an online device tree.none These settings must match those of the Modem. Parity. In the Name field. See the Transfer Options section on page 241. file transfer operations are always routed through the Master to which the target/source touch panels are connected. Data Bits. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options. Device #. The suggested settings are: Baud Rate . and Manufacturer. To refresh the Online Devices Tree. While the Master manages all file transfers to and from the panels. indicating all devices connected to the Master that are currently online (according to the Filter setting). 4. Device #.38400 Data Bits . 240 TPDesign4 (v2. Configure the selected modem connection (Baud Rate. b. Note: Modem transfer is the slowest method of transferring TPD4 panel files to the target device. the panel files are routed to the panels. 5. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer. If you are not already connected to the Master. Select Modem from the Transport drop-down list. (firmware) Version. enter a name for this communication configuration.none Stop Bits . To refresh the Online Devices Tree. This method can range in speed but on average communicates at 3 Kbps.File Transfer Operations The online device tree lists the online devices by System #. This is the name that will appear in the drop-down list of the Connect dialog. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. 3. Panel File Transfers via Modem In TPD4. disconnect and reconnect via the commands in the Transfer menu. create and save a modem communication configuration via the Connection Settings dialog: a.

Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 2. to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. or in your panel file on your PC (for uploads) are not included in the transfer. Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. 5. Set the System Number to 0 (zero). Any bitmaps. TPDesign4 (v2. 4. and is not necessary in most cases.File Transfer Operations 4. which reduces the transfer time by only replacing those panel files that have been updated (relative to the files already loaded in the panel). In this situation. Normal transfer (all panel files): This option sends all panel files. Click Send or Receive to begin the transfer Transfer Options Smart transfer (updated panel files only): Select to utilize the Smart Transfer feature. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 3. Full clean transfer (all panel & system graphic files): Select this option to automatically wipe out any existing project files resident in the target panel before loading the new panel file. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP file transfers: 1. sound files and fonts that all already resident on the target panel. 3. Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via TCP/IP. since any existing panel files on the target panel will be wiped out anyway. you don't need to use the Full Clean option. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. Select Ethernet as the Master Connection. If you are simply sending a panel file to a panel. The Full Clean option adds considerable time to the transfer. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. On the Touch Panel. 8. press and hold the Setup Access button (on the front panel. you can use your PC's Ethernet connection to connect directly to the panel. 6. See the Transfer Options section on page 241.11 or higher) 241 . Select the Master URL / IP input box and enter the IP address of your PC (displayed in the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog). Open received panel (uploads only): Select this option to automatically open the panel file once it is received. since it involves sending many more files. 7. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via TCP/IP: 1. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). 5. 2. Select URL as the Connection Mode. Clear from status queue when complete: This option (enabled by default) clears each transfer from the Transfer Status Window when complete. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. Use the Options checkboxes in the Send to Panel or Receive From Panel dialog to enable/disable the transfer options.

2. 10. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. Verify that an Ethernet cable is connected from either the rear (NXT models) or side (NXD models) of the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs. listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. Once you have entered the IP address of the PC (acting as a Virtual NetLinx Master). 4. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless TCP/IP Transfers. the panel should appear in the online device tree. which displays the Host Name and IP address for your PC. Once you can see the device online. After several seconds. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via TCP/IP) 1. 3. a. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the panel. 3. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). Write down the IP address.11 or higher) . Click the Properties button to access the Virtual NetLinx Master Properties dialog. Enter this IP address as the Master's URL/IP on the System Connection Setup page on the touch panel. To receive files from the panel.File Transfer Operations 9. Once you can see the panel online. 2. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. 3. you may transfer the files. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master TCP/IP Transfers 1. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. b. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Verify the green Ethernet LED (on the rear Ethernet port) is illuminated (indicating a proper connection). 242 TPDesign4 (v2.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear/side of the touch panel. 5. 2. press the Reboot button on the System Connection Setup page to reboot the panel. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window.

Power up the Panel without the USB cable connected to the panel. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel. This is done via the Virtual NetLinx Master connection in the Connect dialog (Transfer > Connect). listed as Virtual NetLinx Master. In this situation.File Transfer Operations Receiving Files From The Panel 1. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the Reboot button to reboot the 7. This feature is primarily intended for use by graphic designers. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 2. for situations where the target panel is not connected to a NetLinx Master. Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers TPD4 supports direct connection to G4 panels via USB.11 or higher) 243 . Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Installing the AMX USB Driver for G4 Touch Panels After installation of TPD4. apply power to the touch panel and verify that it is connected to the LAN via the TCP/IP connector on the rear (or side) of the panel (G4 panels only). to allow them to create panel files and then test them on a panel without necessarily having access to a Master. you can use your PC's USB connection to connect directly to the panel. 3. 2. in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialog TPDesign4 (v2. After installation is complete. 4. 6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the password (the default password is 1988). The OS will complain about the fact that the driver you are installing/updating does not have a digital signature. accepting all the default prompts. There are three basic steps to Virtual NetLinx Master USB file transfers: 1. 2. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the touch screen) for 3 seconds to access the Setup page. Configuring the Touch Panel for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers If it is not already powered up and connected. 7. When the Install Driver dialog does appear. Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices (you should see the AMX USB LAN LINK device in the list). If the Install Driver dialog doesn't appear automatically. you are ready to connect to the USB port of the G4 panel. select the Properties button and then the Update 6. After several seconds. 5. select to continue the installation. You should see an USB icon show up in the System Tray. 2. Driver button. panel. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection Setup page. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. Select USB as the Master Connection (this selection causes all other fields in the Master Connection section become read-only). Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page. the panel should appear in the online device tree. To configure the panel for Virtual NetLinx Master transfers via USB: 1. 5. 3. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 3. please follow the steps below to ensure a valid USB connection to the G4 panels: 1. 4. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. using your PC as a Virtual NetLinx Master. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. This is acceptable. 3. click on the Next buttons.

Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. 2. Click the Receive button to initiate the transfer. To receive files from the panel. Select Transfer > Receive from Panel to open the Receive from Panel dialog. Normal Transfer or Full Clean) as desired. Once you can see the panel online. The panel should appear in the list of Online Devices. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. Transferring Files Using a Virtual NetLinx Master USB Connection Once you have configured both the touch panel and TPD4 for Masterless USB Transfers. The progress of the transfer is indicated in the Status column of the Transfer Status Window. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. select Transfer > Receive From Panel. you may transfer panel files.File Transfer Operations Once you can see the device online. Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send to Panel dialog. you may transfer panel files to and from the G4 device without the need for an intermediate NetLinx master. Configuring TPD4 for Virtual NetLinx Master USB Transfers 1.5 power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear or side (depending on the model) of the touch panel. 2. 2. then connect to the panel. Select <Virtual NetLinx Master>[] from the Connection drop-down list. 3. Allow several seconds after the panel is rebooted for it to appear in the Online Device list in the Send To Panel or Receive From Panel dialogs. 2. Click the Send button to initiate the transfer. Select Transfer > Connect to open the Connect dialog (or click the toolbar button). Use a (type-A) USB cable to connect the panel to an available USB port on your PC. First plug the USB cable into the PC. 3. The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 devices to directly connect to TPDesign4 instead of a physical NetLinx master for transfers. 3. Connect the terminal end of the PSN6. Select any Options (Smart Transfer. you are ready to transfer files to/from the panel without the need for an intermediate master: Sending Files To the Panel 1.11 or higher) . Select Transfer > Send to Panel to open the Send To Panel dialog. 244 TPDesign4 (v2. Powering Up and Connecting the Panel (via USB) 1. Receiving Files From The Panel 1.

When the MVP-5200i device is connected to the computer. FIG. To enter a static IP address for the connection. It is necessary to supply a static IP address for this LAN connection. you must edit the properties of the TCP/IP interface of the connection itself. and select Properties from the context menu. This driver utilizes Ethernet-over-USB. 219 Network Connections dialog 2. Right-click on the Network Connection that indicates "AMX USB Device Link". 220). Launch the Network Connections dialog (select Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections . 219).11 or higher) 245 . This invokes the Local Area Connection Properties dialog (FIG. 220 Local Area Connection Properties dialog TPDesign4 (v2. it should create a new LAN connection (see My Computer | My Network Places | View network connections).FIG. via Windows Network Connections settings: 1.File Transfer Operations MVP-5200i USB Driver The MVP-5200i utilizes a native RNDIS USB driver. FIG.

5. 221 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog 4. Click OK to save your changes. 221). Select Use the following IP address. and click on Properties. This invokes the Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) Properties dialog (FIG. and enter the desired (static) IP Address and Subnet Mask for the panel.11 or higher) . 246 TPDesign4 (v2. The static IP assigned to this connection should be on the same subnet as the IP address entered on the device Setup Pages (Protected Setup | System Settings | IP Settings | IP Address). FIG.File Transfer Operations 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

FIG.VAT template files are created and exported using the VisualArchitect application. When a VAT or TPT template file is imported. Working With the System Page Template The System Page Template is a set of pages.VAT or *.TPT) Files TPD4 allows you to import VisualArchitect (VA) template files (*.TPT template files are created and saved as templates in TPD4. To import a touch panel template file into TPD4: 1. *. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. Locate and select a Touch Panel Template file (*.VAT or *. 222 Example System Page Template TPDesign4 (v2.Working With Templates Working With Templates Importing Template (*. 2. copied and pasted just like any other TPD4 project. *.11 or higher) 247 . containing a set of system pages and popup pages (FIG. a Status dialog indicates the progress as the various component files are loaded. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder.TPT). this could take several minutes. The buttons and pages can be edited. When you open the System Page Template. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. Depending on the size of the template. Once the template has been loaded. it is opened in TPD4 as a project file.VAT) as well as TPD4 template files (*. popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. Select File > Import Touch Panel Template to open the Import Touch Panel Template dialog.TPT) to import into TPD4 for editing. 222).

Address Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Address Code for easy identification. Note that if you click on a button on a System Page. To copy an entire System Page out of the System Page Template folder and paste it into a project: Select File > System Page Template to open the System Page Template folder as a separate project folder in the Workspace Navigator window (Pages tab). "_RGB setup"). you may decide that rather than pasting an entire system page into your project. the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file.setup port) by default. The pages and popup pages included in the System Page Template are displayed in the Pages tab. Alternatively. Once you copy the System Page into your project. if necessary. Note that the System Page Templates all have names that begin with two underscores (i. "__RGB setup"). the Address and Channel Port/Code assignments work differently than the buttons you create. When these pages are pasted into a Project. just like you would for any other page in the Project.e. The double-underscore prefix indicates that the System Pages are intentionally locked. Keep in mind that if the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. you may want to include the entire RGB Setup page in your project. TPD4 will not allow you to save any Page using the doubleunderscore prefix. In this case.Working With Templates The System Page template is a resource that you can use to copy/paste entire System Pages into your project. the name is automatically changed to a single underscore (i. "__RGBsetup"). System Pages and the buttons they contain will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. Copying/Pasting Entire System Pages into a Project You can add System Pages to your project by copying and pasting. and the name is (automatically) changed to use a single-underscore prefix. just like any other page in the Project. you can copy/paste just the buttons you want out of a System Page. The pages that make up the template cannot be modified directly. You can edit or modify the page and contained buttons. or copy/paste selected elements from a System Page into a page in your project. the Reload last workspace option (in the Application tab of the Preferences dialog) will cause the application to attempt to open the (protected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. TPD4 will not allow you to create and save a page with the two underscore prefix. 248 TPDesign4 (v2. and paste them into any page in your project. once the System Page Template is copied into a Project. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. Since there is not a password to unlock the file.e.setup port) by default. you can edit function codes (and all other page and button parameters). the Channel Port is always set to the reserved setup port (0 . TPD4 treats the System File Template as a password-protected file to avoid accidentally modifying the template pages directly. The pages and the buttons they contain are not editable until they are copied out of the System Page Template folder. For example. Again. Channel Code: System Page buttons are each assigned a descriptive name as the Channel Code for easy identification. and them paste them into your Project. Note that each System Template page has a descriptive name that begins with two underscores (i. However. and pasted into a Project. The System Page Template Pages are all intentionally locked. and once these pages or buttons exist within your Project they can be modified as needed. You can open the System Page Template (via the File menu) and copy entire pages or particular elements from a page.11 or higher) . you only want to use some of the features on a System Page. This is to protect the original System Page Template pages from being edited. are always set to the reserved setup port (0 . Once the System Page is pasted into your project. it is fully editable. System Page buttons always use these settings: Address Port: System Page buttons which require communication from the master controller to the panel. it is treated like any other page in your project. Channel Port: Since System Page buttons require communication out of the panel to the master controller. To avoid potential conflicts with the System Page Template. since they always retain their function codes.e.

Select Edit > Copy (or use the Copy toolbar button). Double-click the copied System Page to open it in a Design View window.Working With Templates 1. Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. you may have a need for a particular element or set of elements in one of the System Page Templates in your project. This indicates that the page will be treated like a "normal" project page from this point on.11 or higher) 249 . System Page buttons will remain fully functional when they are copied into your project. Use the keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages anytime you need to add text/numeric entry functions to your Project. :.to a single-underscore prefix (i. they can be modified just like any other button in the project. and the buttons they contain are locked for editing. /. for use with telephone connections. Similar to the keypad popup page. you would simply select and copy that set of bargraph buttons from the RGBsetup System Page and paste them right into an existing page in your project. 2. 3. Clear. • keypad: • keypadExtend: • keypadPrivate: • keypadTele: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. In this case. and International functionality. Green and Blue Level bargraphs into a page. where only asterisks are displayed when you type.e. once the copied buttons are pasted into a page in your project. these popup pages and their contained buttons are locked to editing. Once you bring the keyboard/keypad popup pages into your Project. you may want to use just the Red. Once the System Page button(s) are pasted into your project. Select the System Page (or pages) that you want to copy (in the Pages tab of the Workspace Navigator). In addition to copying/pasting entire System Page Template pages into your project. Note that once the System Page is pasted into the project. The pages in the System Page Template.. '). Copying/Pasting System Page Elements into a Project page In some cases. if necessary. allowing text/numeric entries on the panel. This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. TPD4 allows you to copy/paste specific items from a System Page into an existing page in your project. . until they are pasted into a Project. For example. Like the other System Pages in the System Page Template. but with several additional symbols (-. You can use these keyboards and keypads in your Project without having to build the keys or assign the function codes. Shift. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. since they always retain their function codes. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. TPDesign4 (v2. • keyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page. and edit the page and contained buttons like you would any other page in the project. while you may not necessarily want to include the entire RGBsetup System Page as a page in your project. you can edit the associated function codes (and all other button parameters). You cannot cut a System Page out of the System Page Template. and they will be fully functional. Simply copy/paste these popup pages into your Project. The System Popup Pages include: • keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. including Caps Lock. the System Page name automatically changes from a double. the popup pages and all of their buttons can be edited just like any other popup pages and buttons in your Project. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. "_RGBsetup"). However. Working with System Page Keyboards and Keypads One of the most helpful features of the System Page Template is the set of keyboard and keypad System Popup Pages it contains. Select the target project and select Edit > Paste (or use the Paste toolbar button). Abort and Done buttons).

The elements on this page allow you to reset the vertical and horizontal touch points on the LCD.single or double-beep). • Time: 250 TPDesign4 (v2. and copy only the buttons/keys that you plan to use into an existing page in a Project. copy/paste the system page (or just those elements that you want to use in your project) into your Project. To use these pages in your project. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to the target panel for this Project. etc). popup pages and buttons that are pre-defined with functions that allow you to view/edit various panel and system parameters. System Page Template Reference • Battery: • Calibrate: • Calibrate Test: • Panel: • Progress: • Project: The Battery Base page allows you to configure various battery and power related options. Panel Volume and Default Panel Sounds . This page allows you to match the outgoing screen resolution on an NXP-TPI/4 to the connected touch panel. Version. these popup pages and buttons are fully editable. which contains various setup options that are not usually exposed to the end-user (Device Number. including one protected password (which only displays asterisks when the password is being entered for additional security). When you open the System Page Template. Time Adjustment. Bus Blink. Use the Time page to set the system clock. This page contains options to allow you change any passwords associated with this Project. containing options for various system identification information (IP Settings. Either way. Copy and Paste only selected elements from a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Open a Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page.Working With Templates There are two ways to add a keyboard or keypad to your Project: 1. This is the Project Information page. Select File > Open System Page Template to open the system page template. This page contains a Progress Bar. and to specify how time and date values will be displayed on the panel. TPD4 automatically selects the template that matches the panel and resolution specified for the active project. Protected Setup). 2. used to indicate the progress of file transfer operations. you won't have to do any additional work to make the keyboard/keypad work on the panel. remember that once pasted into your Project. Panel Information. • Protected: • Protected ID: • Protected Password: • Protected Secondary ID: This page contains options to allow you to apply password protection to a secondary (wireless) connection. System Page Template Reference The System Page Template is a set of pages.11 or higher) . The Setup page allows you to set several basic setup options (Panel Timeout. However. Panel Information. Touch Input Select. This is the Protected Setup page. etc). then enter the text for each button in the States tab of the Properties Control window. • Protected Sensors: • Resolution: • Setup: This page contains options to allow you to configure light and motion sensors on the panel. Video/RGB Adjustment. You will see the System Page Template open in the Workspace Navigator as a separate project folder. This page also contains buttons that have page flips to other related System Pages (Project Information. Use the elements in this page to store information specific to your Project (File Name. Dealer ID. then select the target Project in the Workspace Navigator and select Edit > Paste. etc). Job Name. Revision. Master Connection. select Edit > Copy. Baud Rate. The pasted popup page is automatically pasted to the Popup Pages folder for the target Project. Copy and Paste the entire Keyboard or Keypad Popup Page into an existing project: Select the appropriate System Template Popup Page in the Workspace Navigator (Pages tab). containing the following pages. The elements on this page allow you to confirm that the calibration was done properly. This is the Protected ID page.

and International functionality. Status. KeypadPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keypad popup page. This page contains all of the items in the RGB Full Screen System Page. KeypadExtend: Similar to the keypad popup page. Save Settings. plus buttons to indicate video source slot assignments (which relate to video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4). Green and Blue levels. Keyboard Virtual: For use with Computer Control buttons to simulate the keyboard on the PC. Warning Message: This is the Battery Base warning message. Keypad: This is standard 10-key numeric keypad (also includes Backspace. '). Shift. The options in this page allow you to configure the master volume settings for the panel. Clear.Working With Templates System Page Template Reference (Cont. The Video Setup page contains options for setting/adjusting the video sources coming from the NXP-TPI/4 (Brightness. This is generally used as the primary standard keyboard. but includes asterisk and pound symbols additional symbols. Abort and Done buttons). Contrast. This page also contains a clock adjust button for setting the system clock. for text/numeral entries made on the panel. including Caps Lock. /. plus buttons for returning to default settings.11 or higher) 251 . save changes and other textarea buttons relating to video sources (Version. KeyboardPrivate: This is a more secure version of the keyboard popup page.. Undo changes. undo changes. but with several additional symbols (-. TPDesign4 (v2. • RGB Setup: • Video Setup: • Volume: System Page Template Popup Pages The System Page Template also includes several popup pages: Keyboard: This is a full 63-key keyboard. :. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. where only asterisks are displayed when you type. for use with telephone connections. KeypadTele: Similar to the keypadExtend popup page. Input and Format). Horizontal and Vertical Size/Position and Tracking). Full Screen Edit. .) • RGB Full Screen: This page contains options to allow you to adjust various aspects of the RGB signal (Red. Version and Status text-area buttons. and several other buttons to allow a return to the Default RGB values. Saturation and Hue).

). it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. You are ready to begin restructuring the elements to fit your needs. You must have a main preview image ("[preview]. Your navigation menus will always be on top of your Devices.png").TPT) file. 1.. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400. Also. G4 PanelBuilder looks for navigations with the name. Make sure they do not conflict with each other.TPT) file that will be created from this project. Then open the resource manager and select Paste. A G4 PanelBuilder template is a TPD4 file complete with pages. 2. Careful consideration will reveal the type of navigation you will need. The key for creating your own elements naming conventions. According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. 3. Start with the Device and Navigation elements first and the Placeholder elements last.jpg" or "[preview]. named in a manner that G4 PanelBuilder will understand the relationship between all of the elements. the minimum number to make a template family. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the G4 PanelBuilder Template (*.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. This method allows you to modify and delete thus the pages are more likely to be similar. Then. etc. G4 PanelBuilder requires that navigation elements in a template be implemented as pop-ups. Images do not have to be full size. Select Page > Copy Image To Clipboard. [nav#navName]pageName. then make copies of it. The resolutions and panel types are provided here. but many more panel types. in fact AMX templates utilize a 1/4 screen size to reduce the template file size. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. Suggestion: Create a simple TPD4 file showing the desired output. popups and buttons. 252 TPDesign4 (v2. The menu option to export a project as a G4 PanelBuilder template will be disabled for R-4 projects. What navigation model are you going to use? You know you're going to have the required template elements but are some of your menus so complex they will require sub-menus? What devices and features will the template include? Consider using some optional template elements.. You cannot create a "drill-down" style of navigation with G4 PanelBuilder. create several different variations of Navigation and Sub-Navigations (3 items. Suggestion: Mock up the interface in TPD4 by opening the corresponding page and display all applicable popups. Select File > Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template to open the Export As G4 PanelBuilder Template dialog. Things to remember: You must have a minimum of 1 Navigation element. based on the established elements. Any number of template files (*. 4 items.Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a G4 PanelBuilder Template (*. You should spend some time deciding what you want the panel to do. G4 PanelBuilder customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. You must have a minimum of 1 Placeholder element. TPD4 does not support the creation of G4 PanelBuilder templates for R-4 remote devices (since R-4 remotes must implement navigation elements in the form of pages in order for the Back and Up/Down buttons on the remote to function correctly). Suggestion: Start with the most complex Device element first. Now rename the new image to the appropriate element name. Doing this gives you a starting point to begin looking at how to modify the TPD4 file to create a template. On the other hand. where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth.11 or higher) . Create the preview images for the elements.

TPT file is created and a list of errors and warnings are displayed at this time. After you have completed the template design. FIG. Leave the "Job Name" in the Panel Properties the same for all related TPD4 files. 223 TPD4 Workspace . Things to remember: You can use TPD4's Save As Other Panel Type when appropriate or as a starting point.11 or higher) 253 . 5. if applicable. Below is the workspace for TPD4. do a generate.Example G4 PanelBuilder Template TPDesign4 (v2. The pages are highlighted in the color of the element they represent (FIG. Repeat the design for other resolutions. this is the basis of a template family. 223). Not all resolutions have to be done at once. A .Working With Templates 4. If necessary you can build the ones you currently need and address the other resolutions as they present themselves.

[info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. Only one of the pages or popups in A Navigation element can contain an Info button. Consists of at least one popup but can contain multiple popups. pageName .11 or higher) . Element Specific Conventions: [nav#navName]pageName navName . 224 G4 PanelBuilder Templates .This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. [item]buttonName buttonName . The text will be replaced with the name given to the Navigation in the generated TP4 project.Required Template Elements When designing a template it is important to remember the rules that govern elements and their relation with the templates. Item buttons are ordered within the Navigation element in order of left to right then top to bottom. Popups in a Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. 254 TPDesign4 (v2. The popups in the Navigation element must contain at lest one item button that will be filled with navigation information. The chart below demonstrates these rules (FIG. FIG. buttonName. 224).This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder.The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project. Cannot contain any pages Only one can be displayed at a time.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project. The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Navigation element and can contain an optional icon image.Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Required Template Elements The template must have at least one of each of the following elements: Navigation Elements This is the main menu where most of your navigation selections are made. [title]buttonName buttonName .

buttonName . The pages and popups in a Placeholder element can contain one or more Title buttons. pageName .This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Navigation as it will appear within G4 PanelBuilder. Element Specific Conventions: [placeholder#placeholderName]pageName placeholderName .The base page name used in the generated TP4 project.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project.Working With Templates navName . Consists of one page and may have optional popups. buttonName . pageName . Only one page or popup within a Placeholder element can contain an Info button.This is unused and the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouse-over element description in the toolbox. buttonName . The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Placeholder element and can also contain an optional icon image. [title]buttonName buttonName . buttonName . TPDesign4 (v2. Only one Placeholder element can be displayed at a time. The text is replaced with the name given to the Placeholder element in the generated TP4 project.The button name will be used in the generated TP4 project.11 or higher) 255 . Placeholder Elements This is a blank device element that allows you to represent unique items in the diagram area.The name of the Placeholder element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.The base page name that will be used in the generated TP4 project.This is the button name used in the generated TP4 project.

There are rules that govern all template elements (FIG.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. The page in the Mode element must contain at least one Item button that contains the navigation information. Only one Mode element can be displayed at a time. buttonName . [item]buttonName buttonName .11 or higher) . 225): FIG. 225 G4 PanelBuilder Templates . 256 TPDesign4 (v2." Additionally.Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates .. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. "Video Conference Mode" or "Presentation Mode.Optional Template Elements Your templates can have any of the following: Mode Elements This element is generally used for designating "modes" your system will work in.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one page in a Mode element can contain an Info button. i. Consists of a single page and can contain multiple popups. pageName . The Info button contains the page flip information for displaying the Mode element and can also contain an optional icon image. Element Specific Conventions: [mode#modeName]pageName modeName . Mode elements can be associated with rooms.e.The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. Item buttons are ordered within the Mode element by left-to-right then top-to-bottom.Optional Template Elements There are required elements when developing templates but G4 PanelBuilder also supports a series of optional elements that will make your templates more robust. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.Unused.

The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName . Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. navName . Cannot contain pages.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.Unused. Cannot contain pages. buttonName . buttonName .11 or higher) 257 .. The text within the Title buttons are replaced with the name given to the Sub-Navigation in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. [item]buttonName buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Only one of the popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain an Info button. buttonName . TPDesign4 (v2. corporate logo. Element Specific Conventions: [splash#splashName]pageName splashName .Unused. [title]buttonName buttonName . Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups. Popups in the Sub-Navigation element must contain at least one Item button that will contain navigation information. Element Specific Conventions: [subnav#navName]pageName navName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Sub-Navigation element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder pageName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.Unused. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. buttonName .Working With Templates Popups in a Mode element can contain one or more Title buttons.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. The popups in a Sub-Navigation element can contain one or more Title buttons. modeName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Navigation element and can also contain an optional icon image. buttonName .The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Sub-Navigation Elements This element is a submenu and can occur on screen with Navigation elements. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. i. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Mode in the generated TP4 project. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. Item buttons are ordered in the Navigation element left-to-right then top-to-bottom.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.e. buttonName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . [title]buttonName buttonName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project. Splash Elements This element is a popup that can contain an image. pageName .The name of the Mode as it will appear in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.

The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. splashName .The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. i. the "Clean Panel" feature.Unused. pageName . [title]buttonName buttonName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Popups in a Splash element can contain one or more Title buttons. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Splash element and can also contain an optional icon image.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. pageName .Unused. [title]buttonName buttonName . there can only be one Feature element in a panel design. buttonName . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Pages and popups in a Device element can contain one or more Title buttons. buttonName . The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Splash element in the generated TP4 project. Only one Device element can be displayed at a time. deviceName . buttonName . buttonName .e.11 or higher) . 258 TPDesign4 (v2. consult AMX templates where we list the most commonly used devices.Unused. Only one Feature element can be displayed at a time. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox.The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.Working With Templates Only one of the popups in a Splash element can contain an Info button.The base page name used in the generated TP4 project. Device Elements This element is the actual device used. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups.. Feature Elements This element resembles the Device element.The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. this button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Device as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. pageName .The button name used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Splash element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. Element Specific Conventions: [device#deviceName]pageName deviceName . the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Consists of one page and can contain multiple popups.The button name used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. The text within the buttons is replaced with the name given to the Device element in the generated TP4 project. Only one page or popup in a Device element can contain an Info button which contains the page flip information for displaying the Device element and can also contain an optional icon image. Element Specific Conventions: [feature#featureName]pageName featureName . However.Unused. pageName . For reference. buttonName .

the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. Cannot contain pages. [title]buttonName buttonName . "volume. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Feature in the generated TP4 project. TPDesign4 (v2. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the feature as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. subFeatureName .Working With Templates Only one page or popup in a Feature element can contain an Info button.Unused. pageName . Element Specific Conventions: [subFeature#subFeatureName]pageName subFeatureName .e. Feature or Placeholder element from a Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element. Popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons.11 or higher) 259 . featureName . Sub-Feature Elements This element represents the "universal" features that appear on many pages.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. pageName . Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project. Show any popups for the element. which contains the page flip information for displaying the Sub-Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. buttonName .The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.. buttonName . The pages and popups in the Feature element can contain one or more Title buttons.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. buttonName . [title]buttonName buttonName . when applicable.Unused." Consists of at least one popup and can contain multiple popups.Unused.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project. Rules for Navigating a G4 PanelBuilder Template In addition to the template requirements and required elements. pageName . Only one of the pages or popups in a Sub-Feature element can contain an Info button.Unused. buttonName . which contains the page flip information for displaying the Feature element and can also contain an optional icon image. Show the Navigation element that is linked to the element. i.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The base page name that is used in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder.The button name that is used in the generated TP4 project. whose text is replaced with the name given to the Sub-Feature element in the generated TP4 project. [info]buttonName This text is used to populate the mouseover element description in the toolbox. buttonName . there are rules for navigating the templates and template wide conventions you need to heed. When navigating to a Device. the button is deleted in the generated TP4 project.The name of the Sub-Feature element as it appears in G4 PanelBuilder. buttonName .

popup pages are shown in alphabetical order.png). Feature or Placeholder element from a Sub-Navigation element: Hide all popups on the page for that element. Show any popups for the element. or if an icon is used on the corresponding Navigation or Sub-Navigation button. The string "[text]" allows you to prepend/postpend text with characters." There can only be one preview image per element.A template must contain a main preview image and can also contain a preview image for each element.. The element previews should follow the same naming conventions as their page prefixes. when applicable.A template can contain as many buttons named "[panelTitle]" as necessary.Template Wide Conventions Text Replacement . If the text on a button to be replaced does not contain '[text]" then it is unchanged. if not all popup pages should be initially shown. Info buttons are optional and only have to be included within an element if the order the popup pages is shown is important. 260 TPDesign4 (v2. Otherwise.11 or higher) . then show the Sub-Navigation element that is linked to the element.jpg" (or . For Sub-Navigations the user must set "Hide On Action" to No. The main preview image should be named '[preview].Working With Templates Any Sub-Navigation elements that may have been currently displayed will be hidden. they are replaced with the "Job Name" of the panel. If the Info button is omitted. G4 PanelBuilder Templates . Panel Title . Preview Images . Show the Navigation element that is linked to the Sub-Navigation element or chain. When navigating to a Device.jpg.The string "[text]" is required on the button wherever text is to be replaced in the output file. the Sub-Navigation is not shown. Show any popups for the linked Sub-Feature. i.e. Perform the standard page flip to the page for that element. "[device#DVD].

Single Example [feature#US Weather Maps]US Weather Maps Example [mode#Mode 3]Mode 3 Example [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 Description [mode#Mode x] x = the number of mode options Description [nav#Nav 3]Nav 3 x = the number of navigation options G4 Computer Control [device#Computer Control]G4CC TPDesign4 (v2.Single]HVAC .11 or higher) 261 .Dual HVAC .Working With Templates G4 PanelBuilder Templates .Single Feature Names US Weather Maps Mode Names Mode X Navigation Names Nav X Example [device#Audio Conference]Audio Conference [device#Cable Box]Cable Box [device#Camera]Camera [device#Cassette Deck]Cassette Deck [device#CD]CD [device#Document Camera]Document Camera [device#Door]Door [device#DSS]DSS [device#DVD]DVD [device#DVR]DVR [device#HVAC .Dual Volume .Dual [device#HVAC .Dual [device#Volume . G4 PanelBuilder Templates . Errors could occur if the elements do not match from template to template.AMX Naming Convention Device Names Audio Conference Cable Box Camera Cassette Deck CD Document Camera Door DSS DVD DVR HVAC .AMX Naming Conventions AMX urges you to use the following naming convention to allow for portability between templates.Single]Volume .Dual]HVAC .Single Lift Light Zone Monitor Pool Screen Security Shade Slide Projector Spa Switcher size Radio TV VCR Video Projector Volume .Single [device#Lift]Lift [device#Light Zone]Light Zone [device#Monitor]Monitor [device#Pool]Pool [device#Screen]Screen [device#Security]Security [device#Shade]Shade [device#Slide Projector]Slide Projector [device#Spa]Spa [device#Switcher size]Switcher size [device#Radio]Radio [device#TV]TV [device#VCR]VCR [device#Video Projector]Video Projector [device#Volume -Dual]Volume .

Any number of template files (*.TPT) can be created to constitute a template family. based on the established elements. Select File > Export As VisualArchitect Template to open the Export As VisualArchitect Template dialog. named in a manner that VisualArchitect will understand the relationship between all of the elements. A VisualArchitect template is a TPD4 file complete with pages.VAT) file. Both examples are situations where you might consider making specific templates for those panel types. Also. The resolutions and panel types are as follows: Resolution 640x480 800x600 Panel Type • MVP-7500 • TPI4 • MVP-8400 • CA12 • CV12 • TPI4 800x480 • CV7 • CV10 • CV10/PB 1024x768 • CV15 • CA15 • TPI4 1280x1024 1280x768 • TPI4 • CV17 According to the table there are only 6 resolutions. This dialog indicates errors and warnings relating to the VisualArchitect Template (*.Logical Page Scroll Bar Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that are used to implement a scrollbar.Navigations as Pages TPD4 modifies the export of panel projects as VisualArchitect templates to allow navigation elements to be implemented as pages instead of popup pages for panel projects of device class "remote". but 12 different panel types. 262 TPDesign4 (v2. You only need one template per resolution but you should consider instances such as the MVP-8400. where the Pixels Per Inch is higher than the CV12 and the MVP-7500's limited color depth.VAT) file that will be created from this project. popups and buttons. VisualArchitect customizes the TPD4 file based on the navigation flow you designed. VA Templates . These two buttons are named [scrollbartop] and [scrollbarbottom]. TPD4 limits navigation elements of device class "panel" to pop-up pages only.11 or higher) .Working With Templates Exporting Your Project as a VisualArchitect Template TPD4 allows you to export your TPD4 project as a VisualArchitect Template (*. VA Templates . it is suggested you create one for each resolution totaling 6. Then. the minimum number to make a template family.

A logical page that is itself the only page of a logical page group must still contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element containing at least one page flip (to itself). VA Templates .List Box Page Up and Down Elements List box pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement list box single up/down operations.Logical Page Info Element Logical pages must contain a [logicalinfobtn] button element that will be used to identify the first page of a logical page group. These two buttons are named [listboxupbtn] and [listboxdownbtn]. Each list box page must contain one of each of these elements. A [logicalinfobtn] button element must be present in addition to a [info] button element that might be required to indicate that the logical page belongs to a device. TPDesign4 (v2. This button should contain the list of individual logical pages belonging to the logical page collection. Each logical page must contain one of each of these elements. feature.Logical Page Up and Down Elements Logical pages contain two button elements that will be used to implement page flips within the logical page group. These two buttons are named [logicalupbtn] and [logicaldownbtn]. or placeholder implementation. There should be one and only one [logicalinfobtn] button element for each logical page group. starting with itself. VA Templates .Working With Templates VA Templates .11 or higher) 263 .

11 or higher) .Working With Templates 264 TPDesign4 (v2.

system generated filenames are not generated. Use the Customize dialog to customize the TPD4 GUI. This dialog contains four tabs: Application: The items in this tab relate to Startup.Program Preferences Program Preferences Overview Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. TPDesign4 (v2. Undo/Redo Support and Miscellaneous program settings. where you can set general program preferences for TPD4. With this option unchecked. Backup copies and the image library directory. 226 shows the Application tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. Preferences Dialog . Reload last workspace: This option will reopen the last panel file and the pages (including popup pages) that were open when the application was closed (assuming that a panel file was open when the application was closed).Application tab FIG.11 or higher) 265 . "Directories: The items in this tab allow you to specify default directories for Panel files. 226 Preferences Dialog .Application tab The items in the Application tab include: Startup Prompt for system generated name: This option will default the checkbox for system generated filenames (in the New Project Wizard) to the checked position. Editor Selection: The items in this tab allow you associate external editing programs with image and sound files that can be accessed through TPD4. Appearance: The items in this tab relate to the Design View window. although the data that makes them up is still saved.

Note that this option does not take effect immediately on pressing Apply. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Warning Messages When deleting resources in use: Click to receive a warning from TPD4 when you attempt to delete resources that are currently being used by the open project. which is a much slower operation. If an image is not found in the in-memory cache. Use "Copy of" prefixes: This option automatically adds the prefix "Copy of" to any pasted pages and popup pages. this option flushes system memory of any pages that were previously opened but now closed. Miscellaneous Flush Closed Pages on Save: When enabled. The image cache size value specifies the amount of memory allocated for images used in displaying buttons (in the Design View. Click Apply to apply any changes. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. and Button Preview). 266 TPDesign4 (v2. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. without saving any changes. With this option unchecked. With this option unchecked. the tool is reverted to the Selection Tool at the completion of every button draw operation. Since there is not a password to unlock the file. Increase the cache size to keep more images in memory (potentially.Pages tab) on application startup. when the project is saved successfully (default = enabled). Create backup copy: This option saves a backup copy of the panel file to the backup folder every time you perform a save operation. In this case you will be presented with the Enter Access Password dialog. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. if a name conflict occurs. Retain selected tool: This option locks the selected tool (Selection Tool or Button Draw Tool). Image Cache Size (MB): Use the up and down arrows to adjust the size of the image cache (default = 8 MB). the Reload last workspace option will cause the application to attempt to open the (passwordprotected) System Page Template as part of the last opened workspace. by design the only option is to open the System Page Template as a Read-Only file. the user will be asked to resolve the name conflict. it must be loaded again from disc.Program Preferences If the System Page Template was opened as part of the Workspace. State Manager. but will take effect the next time you open a project file. depending on their size) to speed up loading and displaying those images.11 or higher) . Expand Workspace Navigator: This option will expand the tree structure (in the Workspace Navigator .

For example. most 21" monitors typically have between a 19. Once of the Initial Zoom options is called Actual Size. 227 shows the Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.Appearance tab The items in the Appearance tab include: Window Initial Zoom: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of the zoom settings that can be applied as the default initial zoom setting for all new Design View windows. Monitor Size: Use this field to specify the size of the visible portion of the monitor that your pages will actually be displayed on (see Initial Zoom and Note above).5" and 20" viewable area. Fit Height) from the drop-down list. as opposed to the monitor's overall diagonal size. This setting does not affect the zoom setting for pages that are already open.Appearance tab FIG. where you can either use the zoom in and out icons to zoom in/out (in 25% increments). You can also manually set the zoom factor on any page or popup page by selecting the page and using the Zoom Toolbar. This number should represent the diagonal measurement of the visible portion of the monitor or of the space occupied by a fullscreen image. and you want to work with multiple pages without cascading them (which could result in part of the page window being outside of the viewable area).11 or higher) 267 .Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Default = enabled. To use this option. Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the gutter on all new Design View windows.see below). 227 Preferences Dialog . Gutter Color: The Gutter is the area around the outer edge of the Design View windows. this option allows you to see how large a page will appear when actually displayed on the panel. Auto Stack New Windows: This setting causes all page windows to stack directly on top of the last active (selected) page window. or select the zoom setting (including Fit Page. Use this option if you are working on a resolution or zoom setting that takes up most or all of your screen area. Fit Width. TPDesign4 (v2. Because there are variations in dots per inch measurements among panels and among computer monitors. you must first specify their monitor's visible size (in the Monitor Size field .

Dark and Custom. Grid Grid Style: Select from the drop-down list of styles that the grid can be displayed in (Line. Click Apply to apply any changes. the default setting is 8. Grid Color: Click the down arrow to open a palette used to set the default color for the grid (if enabled) on all new Design View windows. The snap tolerance represents the number of pixels within which objects in the Design View window will "snap" to the nearest grid line (applicable only when the Snap To Grid option is enabled. This set of options allow you to modify the way that the transparency checkerboard appears. The options are Light. The Transparency checkerboard is visible on pages and popup pages that are transparent. in the State Manager when a state is transparent. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. without saving any changes. Small. Size: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard sizes. In certain situations. Grid Size: Use the up/down arrows to set the default grid size (measured in pixels). shades and/or colors can facilitate viewing and working with graphics. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.Program Preferences The Auto Stack and Initial Zoom settings are retained the next time you launch the program. If Custom is selected. 268 TPDesign4 (v2. Medium. The range is 4 . the Custom Colors option is enabled (see below). then you can specify a custom color combination for the checkerboard by selecting from these two drop-down lists. Dashed Line or Dots). changing the checkerboard style to different sizes. Custom Colors: If Custom was selected as the Style (see above). Transparency Transparent colors in TPDesign4 are represented by a checkerboard pattern. Medium and Large. Style: Click the down arrow to open a drop-down list of available checkerboard styles that can be used to represent transparency.255. via the Button Selection/Drawing Tools toolbar). Snap Tolerance: Use the up/down arrows to specify the snap tolerance for the grid. The options are Tiny. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. and in the Button Preview when a state is transparent.11 or higher) . Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog.

where you can navigate to an alternative folder. This field is re-enabled once all panels are closed and transfers are completed.. where you can navigate to an alternative folder. Click the browse button (. Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog. In these situations the Temp folder cannot be changed since it is being actively used. 228 Preferences Dialog .Directories tab The items in the Directories tab include: Default Directories Panels: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all Panel (or project) files (*.. Reset: Click to reset all options in the Directories tab to their default settings. If you either have a panel open or a transfer in progress the Temp Folder Location field is disabled. without saving any changes. TPDesign4 (v2. Temp folder location: Use this field to set the location of the folder TPD4 uses for any temp files.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . Backup copies: This text box displays the directory that is currently set as the default directory for all *.TP4 Backup files. Click Apply to apply any changes. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog..) to open the Browse For Folder dialog.Directories tab FIG. Click the browse button (.11 or higher) 269 . Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. This feature accommodates the potential for large projects which need an especially large amount of temporary disk space.TP4).) to open the Browse For Folder dialog.. 228 shows the Directories tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.

and disassociate it from image or sound files in TPD4.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog .With an editor selected (in the Editors list). Editors table . The Default column indicates which of the programs is currently set as the default editor. Once you have associated an external program to image and/or sound editor.Editor Selection tab The options in the Editor Selection tab allow you to associate external programs of your choice with image and sound files. by filename (*. 270 TPDesign4 (v2.Lists all external image or sound editing programs (depending on the Editor Type selected) that have been added. The items in the Editor Selection tab include: Editor Type menu . 229 Preferences Dialog . you can edit image and files by selecting the file in either the Images or Sounds tab of the Resource Manager and clicking the Edit button. click this button to remove it from the list.Click to add either an image or a sound editing program to the Editors list (depending on the Editor Type selected). 229 shows the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG.11 or higher) . to accommodate in-place editing of the images and sounds used in your Project.Editor Selection tab FIG.EXE and file path. Add Editor button .Click the down arrow to select either Image Editors or Sound Editors from the drop-down list. Remove Editor button .

230 shows the Undo/Redo tab of the Preferences dialog: FIG. Reset All: Click to reset all options in all tabs to their default settings. By default. 230 Preferences Dialog . For example. without saving any changes.Undo/Redo tab FIG. Click OK to save your changes and close the Preferences dialog. Enable the Redo system: This option enables/disables the ability to redo actions. Pressing OK or Accept after enabling/disabling the undo system will result in a clearing of the undo/redo history.Program Preferences Preferences Dialog . By default. this option is selected. Click Apply to apply any changes. Reset: Click to reset all options in this tab to their default settings. Number of Undo Levels: Use the up/down arrows to change the number of undo actions allowed (default = 500). Click Cancel to close the Preferences dialog.11 or higher) 271 . if you changed a button property on a button that exists on a page that has been closed. TPDesign4 (v2. this option will automatically change the selection so that the item(s) affected by the Undo / Redo action are selected. this option is selected. Show affected pages on Undo: With this option enabled. the program will always display the page(s) affected by an undo operation. even they have been closed since that action was performed. Change selection on Undo: When enabled. that page will automatically be reopened to show the button that was affected at the point that the Undo is performed.Undo/Redo tab The items in the Undo/Redo tab include: Undo / Redo Support Enable the Undo system: This option enables/disables the ability to undo actions.

272 TPDesign4 (v2. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. Adding an External Editing Program for Sound Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects. 2.Program Preferences Adding an External Editing Program for Image Files Use the options in the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog to associate one or more image editing programs with image files in TPD4 projects..) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files. 231). The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. 231 Preferences dialog . Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1. If you add additional programs to the list. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. 4.Editor Selection tab Note that Image Editors is already selected in the Editor Type drop-down menu. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. 2. Click the down arrow and select Sound Editors from the Editor Type drop-down menu. Click the Add Editor (+) button to access the Choose Editor dialog. 3. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. Click the Browse button (. and open the Editor Selection tab (FIG. but one is specified as the default image editor: 1..) to locate and select the desired program's executable (. in the Open dialog. in the Open dialog. 3.11 or higher) ..EXE) file. FIG. 231).. Note that you can associate multiple editor programs with image files. Click the Browse button (.EXE) file. 4.

Click OK to close the Choose Editor dialog. and open the Editor Selection tab. Select Edit > Preferences to open the Preferences dialog. Changing the Default External Image or Sound Editor Program You can change the default image or sound editor program via the Editor Selection tab of the Preferences dialog: 1. 2. Double-click on any program in the list (other than the current default) to access the Choose Editor dialog. If you add additional programs to the list. The Default column indicates which program is the current default (TRUE = current default).Program Preferences FIG. 232 Preferences dialog . 3. Check the Default Editor checkbox to set the selected program as the default editor (FIG. Select the Editor Type that you want to change the default program for (Image Editors or Sound Editors) from the drop-down menu.11 or higher) 273 . 233). FIG.Editor Selection tab The first program added to the Editors list is automatically designated as the default image editor. Click OK in the Choose Editor dialog to add the selected program to the Editors list. 4. This selection populates the Editors table with a listing of all editing programs that have been added. 5. you have the option (in the Choose Editor dialog) to set the default image editor. TPDesign4 (v2. 233 Choose Editor dialog (Default Editor option selected) 5.

Note that the cursor symbol indicates that it is not allowed to be placed anywhere except inside the area of a toolbar (any toolbar). 274 TPDesign4 (v2. Select a command category (under Categories). FIG. 5.11 or higher) . 234 Default Editor Indicated In the Default Column of the Editors Table Customizing the Menus and Toolbars Use the options in the Command tab of the Customize dialog to customize the contents of the TPD4 toolbars and menus (FIG. 235). along with their associated toolbar icon. 3. if one exists. 6. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). 234).Program Preferences The new default editor is indicated in the Default column of the Editors table (FIG. 235 Customize dialog . While holding the mouse-button down. FIG. 2.Command tab Customizing the Toolbars Adding Buttons To Existing Toolbars 1. The command/icon is placed as a button in the toolbar. to the Commands tab. and release the mouse button. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). regardless of category. Alternatively. 4. Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the toolbar. drag the command/icon to a toolbar.

Select Button Appearance to open the Button Appearance dialog (FIG. In the Button Appearance dialog. 236 Customizing menu items 3. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the button is dragged outside of the toolbars. 3. TPDesign4 (v2. 2. Alternatively. FIG. 237 Button Appearance dialog 4. 236). For toolbar buttons. right-click on the select the button that you want to associate an icon with to open the context menu. 6. Associating an Icon With a New Command Once you have added a new command to a Toolbar or Menu. Click OK. right-click on a menu item (FIG. 4.11 or higher) 275 . Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize). 237). you can associate an icon with the command: 1. 5. as long as the Customize dialog is open. select Image Only or Image and Text (the Text Only option does not allow you to associate an icon). For menu items. Select an icon from the User-Defined Image field. you can simply right-click on any button to open the New Command context menu. FIG. drag the button to any area outside of a toolbar. Release the mouse button to delete the button from the toolbar. Click to select a toolbar button from an existing toolbar. 2. Select Delete to delete the button. While holding the mouse button down. Open the Customize dialog (select View > Customize).Program Preferences Removing Buttons From Existing Toolbars 1.

2. 5. 6. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a list of commands (under Commands). FIG. Click the New button. Enter the new name in the Toolbar Name text field and click OK to save the change. The new toolbar name appears in the Toolbars list. open the Commands tab of the Customize dialog. 238 Customize dialog .Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Toolbar 1. This opens the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. Click and drag commands from the Commands list and drop them inside the area of the new toolbar. in an empty area near the other toolbars. 238). Enter a name for the new toolbar in the text field and click OK. FIG. along with an empty new toolbar icon. 7. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab (FIG. With the empty toolbar in place. 4.11 or higher) . Repeat this process to add as many commands as you like to your custom toolbar(s) (FIG. 239). 239). 239 Toolbar Name dialog 3. 276 TPDesign4 (v2. 8.Toolbars tab 2. 238 on page 276). and click Rename to open the Toolbar Name dialog (FIG. Click and drag to move the new toolbar icon into position. FIG. 3. Select the toolbar you want to rename from the list. 240). 240 Dragging a Command From the Commands List Into the New Toolbar Renaming Custom Toolbars 1.

to the Commands tab (FIG. Click to highlight a command/icon (under Commands). FIG. 3. Select a command category (under Categories). Position the command/icon right where you want to drop it in the menu. Click to select a menu item from an existing menu. Release the mouse button to delete the item from the menu. 3. Click Delete to permanently delete the selected toolbar. drag the command/icon to the open menu. The commands included in the selected category are displayed (under Commands). you can simply right-click on any menu item to open the Command context menu. Open the Customize dialog. The command/icon is placed as a new option in the menu.Program Preferences Deleting Custom Toolbars To delete custom (user-added) toolbars from the TPD4 workspace: 1. 2. Click to select a custom toolbar. 6. TPDesign4 (v2. The standard TPD4 toolbars cannot be deleted. Customizing the Menus Adding Commands To Existing Menus 1. Note that the cursor symbol changes to an "x" when the menu item is dragged outside of the menus. 4. While holding the mouse button down. Open the Customize dialog to the Toolbars tab. 2. 235 on page 274). if one exists. drag the menu item to any area outside of a menu. 241). as long as the Customize dialog is open. along with their associated toolbar icon. 5. Alternatively. Open the menu to which you want to add a command. 7. regardless of category (FIG. 3.11 or higher) 277 . Open the Customize dialog. select All Commands to view a full list of all commands. 241 Customize dialog . Alternatively.Adding Commands To Existing Menus 4. 2. While holding the mouse-button down. Removing Commands From Existing Menus 1. Select Delete to delete the button. and release the mouse button.

While holding the mouse button down. 242 Customize dialog . Select New Menu from the Categories list. 278 TPDesign4 (v2. 244). 244 Creating the New (Empty) Menu At the Cursor Location 5. 243 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 4. to the Commands tab (FIG. 245 Dragging the New Menu Icon To a Location Within the Menu Bar 8. FIG. FIG. Add commands to the new menu by clicking and dragging commands from the Commands list to the new menu (FIG. 3. Release the mouse button to place the selected command in the new menu.Creating a New Custom Menu This item represents a new "empty" menu. FIG. and select Button Appearance. 7. 235 on page 274). 245). This opens the Button Appearance dialog. 6. Type the name for the new menu in the Button Text field and press OK.11 or higher) . Open the Customize dialog. This places the "New Menu" entry in the Commands list (FIG. Select a command category (under Categories) to display a set of commands (under Commands). 243). To name the new menu. 2. drag the New Menu icon to a location within the Menu Bar (FIG. FIG. Release the mouse button to create the new (empty) menu at the cursor location (FIG. 242).Program Preferences Creating a New Custom Menu 1. right-click on the menu to open the New Command context menu.

. 246 Customize dialog . Specify any Arguments. if necessary. as you want it to appear in the Tools menu.) to locate and select the application's. 6. 3. TPDesign4 (v2.Program Preferences Adding a Shortcut To an Application In the Tools Menu Use the options in the Tools tab of the Customize dialog to add/remove shortcuts to external applications in the Tools menu: 1.EXE file in the Open dialog. Click Close to close the Customize dialog. Open the Customize dialog to the Tools tab (FIG.11 or higher) 279 . Specify an Initial Directory. if necessary. 5. 246). The new shortcut should appear at the bottom of the Tools menu. 7. Click the New (Insert) button to create an empty text field in the Menu Contents list.Toolbars tab 2.. 4. Next to the Command field. New (Insert) button FIG. The directory path is displayed in the Command text box. click the browse button (. Enter a name for the application.

sometimes referred to as "Keyboard Accelerators" (such as CTRL+C for the "Copy" command) can be customized in TPD4. If you assign the minus key (-). Enter the new Hotkeys) in the Select New Shortcut Key field. Click Assign to assign the key(s) to the selected menu item. and click Remove. 247): FIG. Setting Custom Hotkeys Use the Keyboard tab of the Customize dialog to create new Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators). Multiple hotkeys can be assigned to the same command. To remove a hotkey assignment.Keyboard tab 1. but only the first one will be displayed next to the item in the menu after this type of change. 2. 4. 5. The information in this dialog is read-only. 3. always use the number pad on your keyboard. click Reset All. Choose a command category in the Category drop-down menu. to the Keyboard tab. 280 TPDesign4 (v2. You can view all of the current hotkey assignments in the Help Keyboard dialog (Help > Keyboard Map). as opposed to the minus key in the main key set.11 or higher) . then highlight the command's hotkey assignment in the Current Keys list. To reset all hotkey assignments to their default settings. 247 Customize dialog .Program Preferences Hotkeys (Keyboard Accelerators) Hotkeys. Open the Customize dialog. select the command in the Commands list. or to modify existing ones (FIG. Choose a command in the Commands list.

Program Preferences TPDesign4 (v2.11 or higher) 281 .

624.932.It’s Your World .6993 technical support • www. All rights reserved.222.amx. TX 75082 USA • 800. . AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX.Take Control™ 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE. RICHARDSON.8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.com 9/09 ©2009 AMX. AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.0193 • 469.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful